overnance is a system that provides a framework for managing organisations. It identifies who can make decisions, who has the authority to act on behalf of the organisation and who is accountable for how an organisation and its people behave and perform.
DrTutor |
المقررات المتاحة
The difference between projects and programs has been ignored or confused by many people for too long. A project is chartered to create a specified “deliverable” as efficiently as possible (Project Management Institute [PMI], 2008a)
test
The PRINCE2® 7 Foundation course provides a complete introduction to the world’s leading project management methodology. Designed for aspiring project managers, team leaders, coordinators and anyone involved in project delivery, this course explains how PRINCE2 offers a structured, flexible and scalable approach suitable for any industry or organisation.
This training introduces the full PRINCE2 framework, including the seven Principles, seven Practices, and seven Processes that ensure clear governance, effective planning, controlled delivery and successful project outcomes. You will learn how PRINCE2 establishes strong business justification, defines roles and responsibilities, manages risk, controls quality and ensures consistent communication throughout the project lifecycle.
Through practical examples and scenario-based learning, the course helps you understand how PRINCE2 can be applied to real projects. You will explore how projects are started, planned, monitored, delivered and closed using te PRINCE2 model. You will also learn the importance of tailoring PRINCE2 to suit different project sizes, complexities and organisational environments.
This course prepares you for the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation exam, giving you the knowledge, confidence and terminology needed to work effectively in a PRINCE2-based project environment. Whether you are new to project management or seeking a recognised certification to enhance your career, PRINCE2 Foundation provides the essential grounding you need.
What’s Included
- Duration of the course (e.g., 10–12 hours for eLearning)
- Access period (e.g., 12 months)
- Tutor support
- Exam simulator / mock exams
- PRINCE2 process map
- Optional printed or digital PRINCE2 manual
- Preparation for the PRINCE2 Foundation exam
Delivery Options
The PRINCE2® 7 Foundation course is available in multiple formats to suit your learning style and schedule. The content is identical across all delivery methods, covering the full PRINCE2 framework, Principles, Practices, Processes, and exam preparation.
Delivery Options & Pricing
-
eLearning / Online Self-Paced with ILX and Drtutor support – From £731.50
Fully online interactive course delivered by ILX and Drtutor support , approx. 10–12 hours of study, 12 months’ access to all course materials, full tutor support via email or chat, PRINCE2 process map for reference, mock exam / exam simulator included. -
Live Virtual Classroom with ILX Tutors – From £1,143.75
Real-time instructor-led training delivered by accredited ILX tutors, interactive scenario-based exercises and discussions, full tutor support, PRINCE2 process map and mock exam included, certificate of completion. -
In-Person Classroom with ILX Tutors / On-Site – From £1,542.75
Face-to-face training delivered by ILX-accredited instructors, hands-on activities, group exercises and scenario walkthroughs, full course materials and PRINCE2 process map, access to mock exam and guidance for Foundation exam, certificate of completion. All options prepare you fully for the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation certification exam, giving you the knowledge, confidence, and skills to work effectively in a PRINCE2-managed project environment.
The key concepts and terminology of PRINCE2® 7
The seven PRINCE2® Principles and how they guide successful projects
The seven PRINCE2® Practices: Business Case, Organisation, Quality, Plans, Risk, Change, Progress
The seven PRINCE2® Processes from project start-up to project closure
How to define roles, responsibilities and project governance structures
How PRINCE2® manages risk, quality, change, and communication
How to apply a stage-by-stage management approach
How to tailor PRINCE2® to different environments and project types
The knowledge required to pass the PRINCE2® Foundation certification exam
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Certification: PRINCE2 Project Management Foundation
- Duration: eLearning approximately 12 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Prerequisites: No specific project management or PRINCE2 experience required, although basic project awareness is helpful
- Delivery Methods: eLearning 12 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days
Who It’s For
This course is designed for professionals who are new to project management or who support project delivery and want to build a strong grounding in a globally recognised project methodology. It is suitable for aspiring project managers, junior project professionals, team members involved in project delivery, business analysts, coordinators, operational staff, and anyone who needs a structured and proven approach to managing change and delivering successful projects across different industries.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: 60
- Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Delivery Method: Online remotely proctored exam
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no mandatory prerequisites for this course, and learners do not need previous PRINCE2 knowledge to participate. Learners selecting the classroom or live virtual classroom formats must complete the mandatory online pre-course study to ensure they are fully prepared before attending the instructor-led sessions. It is recommended that learners have a basic understanding of project work to help contextualise the methodology.
FAQ
1-What is the PRINCE2 Project Management Foundation certification?
This certification provides an introduction to the PRINCE2 methodology, covering the principles, practices, and processes used to manage projects effectively in any environment.
2-Does the PRINCE2 Foundation certification expire?
The PRINCE2 Foundation certification does not expire and remains valid for life once passed.
3-How long does it take to complete the PRINCE2 Foundation course?
Most learners complete the eLearning in around 12 hours, while live virtual classroom and classroom formats run over three days.
4-Is the PRINCE2 Foundation exam difficult?
The exam is considered manageable with structured study, and the ILX training materials are designed to fully prepare candidates.
5-Do I need prior project management experience?
No prior experience is required, although familiarity with projects and organisational structures can help with understanding the content.
6-What topics are covered in PRINCE2 Foundation?
The course covers key concepts of projects and PRINCE2, the methodology’s principles, the role of people in projects, the seven practices, and the seven processes.
7-Is the Foundation certification enough to start managing projects?
Yes, Foundation gives a structured framework for project delivery, although many professionals continue to Practitioner level to apply the method in more depth.
8-Is PRINCE2 Foundation recognised globally?
Yes, PRINCE2 is recognised worldwide and adopted across public and private sectors internationally.
9-What skills will I gain after completing PRINCE2 Foundation?
Learners gain the ability to understand project stages, governance, documentation, roles, controls, and structured approaches to delivery.
10-Is the exam included with the course?
Yes, all ILX delivery formats include the official Foundation exam.
11-How is the exam delivered?
The exam is delivered online through a remote proctoring system that verifies identity and ensures exam conditions.
12-Do I need to buy the official manual?
The eLearning package includes a digital manual, while classroom and live virtual formats may offer the manual as an optional hard copy.
13-Can I use the Foundation certification to progress to Practitioner level?
Yes, Foundation is a mandatory prerequisite for taking PRINCE2 Practitioner.
14-How should I prepare for the exam?
Learners should use the official manual, mock exams, process map, and ILX exam simulator for effective preparation.
15-Is PRINCE2 Foundation relevant for agile environments?
Yes, PRINCE2 provides a structured governance layer that complements Agile delivery approaches.
16-What industries use PRINCE2?
PRINCE2 is used in IT, engineering, finance, healthcare, government, construction, retail, and many other sectors.
17-Do employers value PRINCE2 Foundation?
Yes, employers recognise PRINCE2 as a benchmark for reliable project delivery capability.
18-Can I retake the exam if I fail?
Yes, candidates may purchase Take2 exam insurance as an optional extra for a free retake.
19-Does the course include tutor support?
Yes, ILX provides tutor assistance across all delivery methods.
20-What if English is not my first language?
Reasonable adjustments may be available through the exam provider upon application.
You must hold a valid certification in a relevant and specified project management qualification. Refer to the FAQs on this page for the complete list.
The PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner course builds on the Foundation level, providing advanced knowledge and practical skills to manage projects using the globally recognised PRINCE2 methodology. Designed for project managers, team leaders, coordinators, and anyone responsible for delivering projects, this course equips learners to apply PRINCE2 principles, practices, and processes in real-world scenarios to ensure successful project outcomes.
This training focuses on the application of the seven PRINCE2® Principles, seven Practices, and seven Processes, helping learners understand how to tailor the methodology to suit project complexity, organisational requirements, and stakeholder expectations. You will learn how to use PRINCE2 to manage project risks, control quality, monitor progress, and maintain business justification throughout the project lifecycle.
Through scenario-based exercises, case studies, and practical examples, learners gain hands-on experience applying PRINCE2 to different project environments. The course explores how to initiate, plan, monitor, control, and close projects effectively, while ensuring clear governance, defined roles and responsibilities, and consistent communication. Learners also develop the skills to adapt PRINCE2 for complex projects, manage exceptions, and make informed decisions at each stage.
This course prepares learners for the PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner exam, giving them the knowledge, confidence, and terminology required to manage projects professionally. Whether you are a project manager seeking to advance your skills or a professional aiming for internationally recognised certification, PRINCE2 Practitioner provides the essential tools and expertise to lead projects successfully in any industry.
What’s Included
- Duration of the course (approx. 12–15 hours for eLearning)
- Access period (12 months for online learners)
- Tutor support
- Exam simulator / mock exams
- PRINCE2 process map
- Optional printed or digital PRINCE2 manual
- Preparation for the PRINCE2 Practitioner exam
Delivery Options & Pricing
-
eLearning / Online Self-Paced with ILX and Drtutor support – From £850
Fully online interactive course delivered by ILX and drtutor support approx. 12–15 hours of study, 12 months’ access to all course materials, full tutor support via email or chat, PRINCE2 process map for reference, mock exam / exam simulator included. -
Live Virtual Classroom with ILX Tutors – From £1,320
Real-time instructor-led training delivered by accredited ILX tutors, interactive scenario-based exercises and discussions, full tutor support, PRINCE2 process map and mock exam included, certificate of completion. -
In-Person Classroom with ILX Tutors / On-Site – From £1,780
Face-to-face training delivered by ILX-accredited instructors, hands-on activities, group exercises and scenario walkthroughs, full course materials and PRINCE2 process map, access to mock exam and guidance for Practitioner exam, certificate of completion.
All options prepare learners fully for the PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner certification exam, equipping them with the skills to manage complex projects with confidence and professionalism.
Apply the PRINCE2® Principles to complex project scenarios
-
Use the seven PRINCE2® Practices to manage risk, quality, change, and progress
-
Implement the seven PRINCE2® Processes to control and deliver projects successfully
-
Tailor PRINCE2® to different project types, sizes, and organisational environments
-
Define roles, responsibilities, and governance structures for effective project management
-
Handle real-world project challenges using scenario-based techniques
-
Prepare to pass the PRINCE2® Practitioner certification exam with confidence
Facts
- Course Level: Practitioner
- Certification: PRINCE2® Project Management Practitioner
- Duration: 20 study hours for eLearning, 2 days for Live Virtual Classroom, 2 days for Classroom delivery
- Exam Duration: 150 minutes
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Prerequisites: A valid PRINCE2 Foundation or other approved project management certification
- Delivery Methods: eLearning (20 hours), Live Virtual Classroom (2 days), Classroom (2 days)
Who It’s For
This course is designed for practising project managers, aspiring project managers, project coordinators, business analysts, team managers, and professionals responsible for the planning, execution and control of projects who need to apply PRINCE2 in practical environments. It is also suitable for individuals who aim to enhance their capability in using structured methodologies to deliver predictable and well-controlled project outcomes.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 150 minutes
- Number of Questions: 70 scenario-based multiple-choice questions
- Question Type: Scenario multiple choice, open book (official manual allowed)
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Delivery Method: Online remote-proctored exam or in-class exam depending on training method
Pre-Course Requirements
Learners must hold a valid PRINCE2 Foundation certificate or an approved equivalent recognised by the exam board. Learners selecting Classroom or Live Virtual Classroom must also complete mandatory pre-course reading to ensure they are familiar with the key concepts before attending the instructor-led sessions.
Frequently Asked Questions- FAQs
1. What is the purpose of the PRINCE2 Practitioner qualification?
The PRINCE2 Practitioner qualification demonstrates your ability to apply and tailor the PRINCE2 methodology in real project environments.
2. Is the exam included with this course?
Yes, the Practitioner exam is included with all delivery formats.
3. Do I need PRINCE2 Foundation before taking Practitioner?
Yes, a valid PRINCE2 Foundation certificate or equivalent is required before sitting the Practitioner exam.
4. How long is the Practitioner exam?
The exam lasts 150 minutes and contains scenario-based questions.
5. Is the Practitioner exam open book?
Yes, you may use the official PRINCE2 manual during the exam.
6. How long does the eLearning course take to complete?
Most learners complete the eLearning course in approximately 20 hours of study time.
7. How long is the Live Virtual Classroom option?
The Live Virtual Classroom is typically delivered over two consecutive instructor-led days.
8. Does the Classroom course also include workshops?
Yes, the Classroom format includes practical group exercises and scenario-based workshops.
9. What support is provided during eLearning?
You receive tutor assistance and access to online resources throughout your licence period.
10. How long is my eLearning licence valid?
Your licence remains active for 12 months from the date of activation.
11. What score do I need to pass the exam?
You must score at least 60 percent to pass and achieve Practitioner status.
12. How is the Practitioner exam delivered?
The exam is delivered online through remote proctoring or in person as part of a classroom course.
13. Do Practitioner certificates expire?
Yes, Practitioner status is valid for three years and can be renewed through re-certification or subscription to MyAxelos.
14. Is PRINCE2 Practitioner recognised internationally?
Yes, PRINCE2 is widely adopted across the UK, Europe, Middle East, Australia and many global organisations.
15. Are there any recommended study materials?
The official PRINCE2 manual is recommended and is provided with the course.
16. Can I retake the exam if I fail?
Yes, you may retake the exam, and some learners choose optional exam insurance for a discounted retake.
17. Is this course suitable for people without project management experience?
It is recommended that learners have some practical project exposure before attempting Practitioner.
18. Will I learn how to tailor PRINCE2?
Yes, tailoring PRINCE2 to different project scenarios is a major focus of the Practitioner course.
19. Is pre-course reading required?
Yes, especially for Classroom and Live Virtual Classroom learners, pre-course reading is essential.
20. Does the course include real project scenarios?
Yes, all training formats use practical scenarios to develop applied project management capability.
The PRINCE2® 7 Foundation & Practitioner combined programme is the most comprehensive and efficient way to become a fully certified PRINCE2 project manager. This integrated course takes you from understanding the fundamentals of PRINCE2 to confidently applying the method in real project environments — giving you both theoretical knowledge and practical capability in one structured learning path.
Designed for aspiring project managers, team leaders, coordinators, PMO staff and anyone responsible for delivering projects, this programme offers a complete exploration of the seven Principles, seven Practices and seven Processes that define the PRINCE2 project management methodology. You will learn how projects are started, planned, controlled, delivered and closed using a globally recognised, scalable and flexible framework used by organisations in every industry.
Through real-world examples, scenario-based learning, practical application exercises and exam-focused preparation, you will understand not only what PRINCE2 is, but how to apply it effectively in different environments. You will explore how to tailor the method to different project sizes, levels of complexity, organisational structures and delivery approaches — including agile and hybrid contexts.
This programme fully prepares you for both the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation exam (testing your knowledge and concepts) and the PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner exam (testing your ability to apply PRINCE2 in realistic project scenarios). By the end, you will have the confidence, capability and certification needed to manage and support PRINCE2-based projects professionally.
Whether you are starting your project management career or seeking to advance into project leadership roles, this course provides the complete foundation and practitioner-level qualification you need.
What’s Included
- Accredited PRINCE2® 7 Foundation & Practitioner training
- Foundation exam (official)
- Practitioner exam (official)
- Official PRINCE2® 7 manual (digital or printed depending on package)
- PRINCE2® 7 process map
- Mock exams and exam simulator
- Tutor support
- 12-month access (eLearning)
- Course materials and downloadable resources
- Certificate upon passing each exam.
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX and Drtutor support From £1,230.00
- Full online, self-paced Foundation + Practitioner programme
- Approx. 30–35 hours total learning
- 12 months’ access to all modules
- Tutor support via email and chat
- PRINCE2 process map included
- Mock exams and exam simulator
- Recommended for independent learners or those needing flexibility
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Accredited instructor-led online course
- Real-time training delivered by ILX-accredited PRINCE2 experts
- Interactive workshops, case studies and group discussions
- Structured timetable over consecutive days or split sessions
- Exam preparation support and guidance
- Ideal for learners who prefer live instruction and collaboration
In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited Trainers
Available in the UK and internationally
- Face-to-face learning with certified ILX instructors
- Practical group activities and scenario walkthroughs
- Printed materials and PRINCE2 process map
- Full preparation for both exams
- On-site delivery available for corporate groups
- Perfect for organisations seeking team-based training
Understand key PRINCE2® concepts, roles and terminology
-
Apply the seven Principles to maintain a controlled and well-governed project
-
Use the seven Practices to manage Business Case, Quality, Risk, Change, Plans, Organisation and Progress
-
Navigate the seven PRINCE2 Processes from project start-up to closure
-
Define project roles, responsibilities and governance structures
-
Manage risk, quality, change requests, communication and planning
-
Apply PRINCE2’s stage-by-stage management approach
-
Tailor PRINCE2 for different industries, technologies and project sizes
-
Work confidently in PRINCE2-based environments
-
Successfully pass the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation and Practitioner exams
PRINCE2® 7 Foundation & Practitioner training. Learn the full PRINCE2 methodology and become a certified project manager. Includes exams, mock tests, tutor support and delivery options: eLearning, virtual classroom or in-person.
FAQ
It is a complete programme that teaches the full PRINCE2® 7 project management method and prepares you for both official exams.
Who should take this course?
Ideal for new or experienced project managers, PMO staff, coordinators, consultants and anyone responsible for project delivery.
Do I need the Foundation certificate before Practitioner?
Yes — Foundation must be passed first. This combined course prepares you for both in one structured programme.
How long does the course take?
eLearning usually takes 30–35 hours. Virtual and classroom options are typically delivered over 4–5 days.
Are the exams included?
Yes. Both the PRINCE2 Foundation and PRINCE2 Practitioner exams are included.
Is the course accredited?
Yes — this programme follows the official PRINCE2® 7 syllabus and is delivered by accredited ILX trainers or drtutor eLearning.
Can I study at my own pace?
Yes — the drtutor eLearning package gives you 12 months’ access so you can study anytime.
Is this course suitable for beginners?
Yes — no previous experience is required. Foundation covers the basics and Practitioner builds real application.
Delivery Comparison Table
| Delivery Option | Provider | Format | Key Features | Price From |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| eLearning / Self-Paced | drtutor | Online | 12 months’ access, interactive modules, mock exams, tutor support | £1,230.00 |
| Live Virtual Classroom | ILX Tutors | Instructor-led online | Real-time lessons, discussions, group exercises, exam prep | £1,981.00 |
| In-Person Classroom / On-Site | ILX Tutors | Face-to-face | Hands-on training, printed materials, team workshops | £2,476.00 |
The PRINCE2 Agile Foundation course combines the robust governance and structured project-management framework of PRINCE2 with the flexibility, responsiveness and team-centric practices of Agile. Designed for project managers, Scrum practitioners, product owners, business analysts or anyone delivering projects in dynamic environments, this course helps you manage projects with both control and agility.
You will learn how PRINCE2’s governance, roles, and control mechanisms integrate with Agile practices like iterative delivery, frequent feedback, and collaborative planning — enabling projects to stay adaptable while maintaining structure, accountability, and quality. Through real-world scenarios, practical examples, and method-tailoring guidance, you’ll discover not only what PRINCE2 Agile means, but how to apply it in your organisation to deliver value efficiently and reliably.
This training also fully prepares you for the official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification. On completion, you’ll have the knowledge, terminology, and confidence to work in or manage Agile-aligned PRINCE2 projects — a powerful advantage in today’s project environments.
What’s Included
- Accredited PRINCE2 Agile Foundation training
- Official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation exam voucher
- Official PRINCE2 Agile manual (digital; optional printed copy)
- PRINCE2 Agile process map / reference materials
- Tutor support during the course
- Mock exam / practice questions (if self-paced/eLearning)
- Course completion certificate upon passing exam
Delivery Options & Pricing
-
eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX & Drtutor
Self-paced online learning with full access to course content, manual, process maps and exam voucher. Price: £730 + VAT (to be confirmed). -
Live Virtual Classroom – ILX Accredited Tutors
Instructor-led virtual training covering all course modules, live interaction, exam preparation. Price: £1350+ VAT (subject to availability). -
In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited
Face-to-face training sessions led by ILX tutors, including workshops, group exercises and exam preparation — ideal for corporate teams. Price: £1610 + VAT (contact for quote).
Note: Exact prices may vary depending on location, schedule and VAT. Please request a quote when booking.
- For classroom or live-virtual delivery, the course typically spans three days
- For self-paced eLearning, most providers estimate about 12 hours of study time for the Foundation level.
Understand Agile mindset and core Agile principles
-
Describe how PRINCE2 and Agile integrate under the PRINCE2 Agile framework
-
Explain PRINCE2 Agile terminology, roles, governance and artefacts
-
Apply Agile practices (e.g. Scrum, Kanban, Lean-Startup techniques) within PRINCE2-managed projects
-
Tailor PRINCE2 governance and planning for Agile project delivery
-
Adapt project controls, risk management, and quality assurance to Agile contexts
-
Support teams in delivering incremental value through flexible project execution
-
Prepare effectively for the PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification exam
Key Facts
-
Certification: PRINCE2 Agile Foundation (official)
-
Accreditation: by PeopleCert / AXELOS via ILX Group
-
Prerequisites: None — prior PRINCE2 or Agile experience helpful but not required
-
Exam Format: 60-minute multiple-choice, closed-book, 50 questions, pass mark 60%
-
Languages: English (ILX offers versions in different languages)
Who It’s For
Project managers, programme managers, Scrum Masters, Agile coaches, business analysts, product owners, change managers and professionals delivering or supporting projects who want to combine structure and flexibility. Perfect for organisations seeking to adopt Agile within a controlled PM governance structure.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Do I need prior PRINCE2 or Agile experience?
No. This is an entry-level foundation course. A basic understanding of projects helps, but prior certification isn’t required.
Is the PRINCE2 Agile exam included?
Yes — the course package includes the official exam voucher.
Is the course available online?
Yes — both self-paced eLearning and live virtual classroom options are available alongside in-person training.
Can I combine PRINCE2 Agile with existing PRINCE2 or Agile certifications?
Yes. PRINCE2 Agile builds on PRINCE2’s structure while integrating Agile practices — making it suitable whether you already use PRINCE2, Agile, or both.
What will I gain on completion?
You’ll earn the official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification, understand how to plan, govern and deliver Agile-aligned projects under PRINCE2, and be able to support or lead hybrid Agile-Governed projects effectively.
The PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner course is designed for experienced project professionals who want to combine the control and governance of PRINCE2 with the flexibility and responsiveness of Agile. Building on the Foundation level, this course focuses on applying PRINCE2 Agile principles, practices, and processes in complex, real-world projects.
You will learn how to integrate Agile approaches, such as Scrum, Kanban, Lean Startup, and iterative delivery, into PRINCE2-managed projects. The course explores tailoring the methodology to fit project context, adapting governance structures, managing change-driven initiatives, and guiding Agile teams in fast-paced, dynamic environments.
Through practical, scenario-based exercises and real-world examples, you’ll understand not just the theory of PRINCE2 Agile but also how to apply it to improve project outcomes, ensure consistent delivery of value, and maintain control and quality in any organisation.
By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared to sit the PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner exam, giving you the confidence, terminology, and strategic insight to lead Agile-aligned projects with both structure and adaptability.
What’s Included
- Accredited PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner training
- Official PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner exam voucher
- Comprehensive digital course materials and manual
- Scenario-based exercises and real-world case studies
- Tutor support throughout the course
- Mock exam / practice questions
- Course completion certificate upon passing the exam
Delivery Options & Pricing
-
eLearning – Delivered by drtutor
Self-paced online training with full access to digital course materials, scenario-based exercises, mock exams, and tutor support. Price: £730 + VAT
-
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Real-time instructor-led training with interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Price: £1,250 + VAT -
In-Person Classroom – ILX Accredited
Face-to-face training led by ILX-accredited instructors, including hands-on activities, workshops, and scenario walkthroughs. Price: £1,600 + VAT.
Integrate Agile practices within the PRINCE2 framework to deliver projects efficiently
-
Tailor PRINCE2 processes, themes, and governance to fit Agile environments
-
Lead and manage Agile teams, ensuring clear roles, responsibilities, and collaboration
-
Use iterative planning, incremental delivery, and adaptive management to handle project complexity
-
Apply PRINCE2 Agile controls for risk, quality, and change management in dynamic environments
-
Evaluate and adjust project delivery strategies using real-world scenarios
-
Make informed decisions to ensure projects deliver value consistently
-
Confidently sit and pass the PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner exam
Key Facts
- Certification: PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner
- Prerequisites: Valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation (or approved certification)
- Exam format: 150-minute multiple-choice scenario-based open-book exam, 60% pass mark
- Duration: Classroom / Virtual Classroom – 2 days; approx. 20–21 hours guided learning
- Language: English
Who It’s For
Project managers, programme managers, Agile coaches, Scrum Masters, business analysts, product owners, change managers, PMO leads, and other professionals responsible for delivering complex projects. Ideal for anyone looking to combine structured governance with Agile flexibility to improve project outcomes.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Do I need the Foundation before taking Practitioner?
Yes. A valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certificate or other approved qualification is required to take the Practitioner exam.
Is there an online self-paced option?
No. The Practitioner course is only offered through live virtual classrooms or in-person training led by ILX-accredited instructors.
How will this course help me in real projects?
You will learn to tailor PRINCE2 processes and Agile practices to fit your project’s context, manage iterative delivery, guide teams in dynamic environments, and maintain control and quality, ensuring consistent delivery of value.
What is included in the exam?
The exam is scenario-based, multiple choice, open-book (using the official manual), and covers practical application of PRINCE2 Agile in complex projects.
How long does the course take?
The course is typically 2 days for live delivery, with an estimated 20–21 hours of guided learning.
Will I receive a certificate?
Yes. Upon passing the exam, you receive the official PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner certificate.
Can I combine this with other certifications?
Absolutely. This course complements PRINCE2 Foundation, PRINCE2 Agile Foundation, and other project management or Agile certifications, enabling hybrid governance and delivery skills.
The PRINCE2 Agile Foundation & Practitioner course combines the structured governance of PRINCE2 with the flexibility and responsiveness of Agile frameworks. This comprehensive programme first builds a solid foundation through the Foundation level, then advances to the Practitioner level, where you will apply PRINCE2 Agile principles, practices, and processes in real-world project scenarios.
You will explore how to manage projects in dynamic, fast-paced environments, integrating Agile techniques such as Scrum, Kanban, and Lean Startup while maintaining PRINCE2 governance. Scenario-based exercises, case studies, and practical workshops ensure you not only understand the theory but can apply it effectively in your projects.
By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared for both the PRINCE2 Agile Foundation and Practitioner certification exams, equipped with the skills, confidence, and professional language to deliver projects successfully across industries and organisational environments.
What’s Included
- Accredited PRINCE2 Agile Foundation & Practitioner training materials
- Official exam vouchers for both Foundation and Practitioner levels
- Digital course content including scenario-based exercises and mock exams
- Tutor support throughout the course
- PRINCE2 Agile process and framework guides
- Certificate of completion upon passing the exams
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX , drtutor exam support
Self-paced online training with full access to digital course materials, scenario-based exercises, mock exams, and tutor support. Price: £1,140 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Instructor-led virtual training with interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Price: £2000 + VAT
In-Person Classroom – ILX Accredited
Face-to-face training with ILX-accredited instructors, including hands-on workshops, group exercises, and scenario walkthroughs. Price: £2600 + VAT
Understand the principles, practices, and processes of PRINCE2 Agile
-
Integrate Agile methods within the PRINCE2 governance framework
-
Tailor PRINCE2 Agile controls, processes, and management products for any project environment
-
Lead Agile teams effectively within structured projects
-
Apply iterative planning, incremental delivery, and continuous improvement in real projects
-
Manage risk, quality, change, and communication within Agile-PRINCE2 projects
-
Confidently sit and pass both PRINCE2 Agile Foundation and Practitioner exams
Key Facts
- Certification: PRINCE2 Agile Foundation & Practitioner
- Prerequisites: Valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation or approved equivalent required for Practitioner
- Exam Format: Foundation – 60 minutes, 50 multiple-choice questions, 50% pass mark; Practitioner – 150 minutes, scenario-based, open-book, 60% pass mark
- Recommended Study Time: eLearning approx. 20–25 hours; Live Virtual Classroom / In-Person 3 days
- Materials: Digital course pack, official manual, scenario exercises, exam vouchers, tutor support
Who It’s For
Project managers, Agile practitioners, Scrum Masters, product owners, PMO leads, business analysts, programme and change managers, and professionals responsible for delivering projects in Agile or hybrid governance environments.
Frequently Asked Questions (Expanded FAQ)
Do I need to complete the Foundation before the Practitioner?
Yes, a valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certificate or approved equivalent is required to enrol in the Practitioner course. This ensures you have the essential knowledge of PRINCE2 Agile principles and terminology before advancing.
Is there an online self-paced learning option?
Yes. The eLearning format allows you to study flexibly at your own pace. You get full access to all digital course materials, scenario exercises, mock exams, and tutor support for 12 months.
What is the format and duration of the exams?
-
Foundation Exam: 60 minutes, 50 multiple-choice questions, 50% pass mark.
-
Practitioner Exam: 150 minutes, open-book, scenario-based multiple-choice questions, 60% pass mark.
Will I receive a certificate after passing?
Yes. Upon successfully passing the exams, you will receive official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation and Practitioner certificates.
Can this course help me manage hybrid or Agile-governed projects?
Absolutely. You will learn how to integrate Agile practices into PRINCE2 governance, tailor processes, and lead teams in complex project environments. This equips you to manage both traditional and Agile projects effectively.
What support is available during the course?
All learners receive full tutor support, whether studying online or in a live classroom. You can ask questions, get guidance on exercises, and receive practical tips for the exams.
How long does it take to complete the course?
-
eLearning: approximately 20–25 hours, flexible study.
-
Live Virtual Classroom / In-Person: 3 full days of instructor-led training including exercises, scenarios, and exam preparation.
Are there any prerequisites for the course?
For the Foundation level, no prior Agile or PRINCE2 knowledge is required. For the Practitioner level, a valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification or approved equivalent is mandatory.
Can I apply what I learn immediately in my projects?
Yes. The course is designed to provide practical skills and scenario-based learning, so you can apply Agile methods within PRINCE2 projects immediately, tailoring governance and delivery to your organisation’s needs.
Is this course suitable for experienced project managers?
Yes. Experienced project managers will gain advanced skills in integrating Agile and PRINCE2, enabling them to lead hybrid projects and improve delivery efficiency and team collaboration.
The Project Management Professional (PMP)® certification is one of the most respected and globally recognised credentials for experienced project managers. Issued by the Project Management Institute (PMI), PMP validates that an individual has the practical experience, formal education, and professional competence required to lead and direct complex projects successfully across industries and sectors. This course is designed for professionals who already operate within project environments and are seeking to formalise, strengthen, and internationally validate their project management capability.
The PMP course provides advanced, structured training aligned with PMI standards and the PMBOK® framework, enabling learners to apply consistent, proven project management practices in real-world environments. It develops the ability to manage scope, schedule, cost, quality, resources, risk, and stakeholder expectations while balancing strategic objectives and operational constraints. The certification is widely recognised by employers as a benchmark of senior-level project management expertise and is often a requirement for leadership roles in project, programme, and portfolio management.
Completing the PMP course equips professionals with the knowledge and confidence to deliver projects more predictably, manage teams effectively, and make informed decisions under pressure. It supports long-term career progression, enhances professional credibility, and demonstrates commitment to continuous professional development at an international level.
What’s Included
- Duration of the eLearning course: approximately 35–40 hours
- 12-month online access licence
- Project Management Professional (PMP)® aligned training content
- Skills-based interactive eLearning modules
- Tutor support throughout the learning period
- Agile Practice Guide (optional add-on)
- Process Groups: A Practice Guide (optional add-on)
- Preparation aligned to the PMP® examination syllabus
- Online pre-course material for classroom delegates
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, approximately 35–40 hours of study, 12-month licence, exam not included. Normal price: £1,150 + VAT, or £42.50 + VAT per month. Special offer: £510 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with collaborative workshops, practical project scenarios, and structured exam preparation. Exam not included. Price: From £3,275 + VAT.
Understand how to lead and manage projects across predictive, Agile, and hybrid delivery environments using PMI best practice.
Apply structured project management processes aligned with the PMBOK® Guide to ensure consistent, repeatable project outcomes.
Manage project scope, schedule, cost, quality, and resources effectively while balancing competing organisational priorities.
Identify, assess, and mitigate project risks to minimise disruption and protect delivery objectives.
Demonstrate leadership behaviours required to manage teams, stakeholders, and sponsors within complex project environments.
Analyse project inputs, tools, and techniques to make informed, evidence‑based management decisions.
Contribute effectively within PMOs and enterprise project governance structures.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced Professional Certification
- Duration: Approximately 35–40 hours for eLearning; classroom duration varies by schedule
- Exam Duration: 230 minutes
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI using psychometric scoring
- Prerequisites: PMI eligibility criteria apply
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is designed for experienced project managers, programme managers, project coordinators, PMO professionals, and business analysts who are responsible for leading projects and delivering measurable business outcomes. It is suitable for professionals seeking formal recognition of their project management experience and for those working in complex, enterprise, or regulated environments where a globally recognised certification is required.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 230 minutes
- Number of Questions: 180 multiple-choice questions, including pre-test items
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Certification: Project Management Professional (PMP)®
- Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI)
- Exam Voucher: Not included
Pre-Course Requirements
To sit the PMP examination, candidates must meet PMI eligibility requirements relating to formal education, verified project management experience, and completion of required project management training hours. Candidates are strongly advised to review the official PMI eligibility criteria before committing to the examination. A mandatory online pre-course applies to learners selecting the classroom delivery option.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the PMP® certification?
The PMP® is a globally recognised professional certification issued by PMI that validates advanced project management knowledge, experience, and leadership capability.
Who should take the PMP course?
The course is intended for experienced project managers and professionals responsible for delivering projects, programmes, or portfolios within structured environments.
Is the PMP exam included in the course price?
No. The PMP examination is not included and must be booked and paid for directly through the Project Management Institute.
How long does it take to complete the eLearning course?
Most learners complete the eLearning in approximately 35–40 hours, with access available for 12 months.
Is the course aligned to the PMBOK® Guide?
Yes. The course is fully aligned to PMI standards and reflects current PMP examination content.
Do I need prior project management experience?
Yes. The PMP certification is designed for experienced professionals and requires documented project management experience.
Can I study without taking the exam?
Yes. You may complete the training for professional development purposes, but certification requires passing the PMI exam.
Does the course cover Agile and hybrid approaches?
Yes. The course addresses predictive, Agile, and hybrid delivery models in line with current PMP requirements.
Is tutor support available?
Yes. Tutor support is available throughout the learning period for both eLearning and instructor‑led formats.
Is this certification recognised internationally?
Yes. PMP® is recognised globally across industries and sectors.
What roles benefit most from PMP certification?
Project Managers, Programme Managers, PMO leads, Business Analysts, and senior delivery professionals benefit significantly.
Can the course support career progression?
Yes. PMP certification is widely regarded as a benchmark for senior project management roles.
Are study guides included?
Core learning materials are included. Additional PMI publications may be purchased as optional extras.
How is the classroom course structured?
Classroom delivery includes instructor‑led teaching, group exercises, and exam‑focused preparation.
Is there a mandatory pre‑course?
Yes. Classroom learners must complete a mandatory online pre‑course before attending.
How do I book my Project Management Professional (PMP) exam?
The PMP exam is not included with this course. Candidates must apply directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI) website and meet all eligibility criteria listed in the prerequisites before they can take the exam.
How do I access my PMP pre-course work?
For delegates selecting the classroom study option, mandatory online pre-course work must be completed prior to attending. The materials are designed to take approximately four to six hours. Full instructions and access links will be sent within 48 hours of booking. Completion of all pre-course work is required to receive the course completion certificate.
What are the prerequisites for the Project Management Professional (PMP) course?
Candidates must satisfy one of the following eligibility paths:
-
Secondary degree (high school diploma, associate’s degree, or global equivalent): Minimum five years of professional project management experience, including at least 7,500 hours leading or directing projects, and 35 hours of project management education or CAPM certification.
-
Four-year degree: Minimum three years of professional project management experience, including at least 4,500 hours leading or directing projects, and 35 hours of project management education or CAPM certification.
What are the benefits of obtaining the PMP certification?
The PMP certification is globally recognised and demonstrates advanced project management expertise. It validates your ability to deliver projects efficiently within scope, time, and budget, enhances career opportunities, and often leads to higher earning potential. PMP equips professionals with the tools, techniques, and credibility to manage projects effectively and gain recognition from employers worldwide.
The Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)® certification is a globally recognised entry-level credential developed by the Project Management Institute (PMI) to validate foundational project management knowledge. It is designed for individuals seeking to start or progress a career in project management by gaining a structured understanding of project processes, terminology, and best practices.
Aligned with the PMI Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), the CAPM course introduces learners to core project management concepts, methodologies, and tools used across industries worldwide. The training provides practical insight into how projects are initiated, planned, executed, monitored, and closed, enabling learners to contribute effectively as informed project team members.
By completing this course, delegates develop confidence in working within both traditional predictive environments and adaptive approaches such as Agile. The CAPM certification demonstrates commitment to professional development and provides a strong foundation for further progression to advanced PMI certifications.
What’s Included
- Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)® eLearning course
- Approximately 23–25 hours of online training
- 12-month eLearning licence
- Coverage of PMBOK® Guide aligned concepts and processes
- Project management fundamentals and lifecycle knowledge
- Introduction to traditional and Agile methodologies
- Tutor support during the licence period
- Optional add-ons available at checkout, including Agile Practice Guide and Process Groups: A Practice Guide
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced study, approximately 23–25 hours to complete, 12-month licence. Exam not included. Price: £510.00 + VAT or £42.50 + VAT per month
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Instructor-led classroom training. Pricing from £2,755.00 + VAT. Mandatory online pre-course applies. Exam not included.
Understand project management fundamentals, core concepts, and project lifecycles across industries.
Recognise project roles, responsibilities, governance structures, and planning processes.
Apply tools and techniques for communication, risk management, and structured problem-solving.
Identify when to use predictive, plan-based project management methodologies.
Create and manage project schedules, controls, and documentation for predictive projects.
Recognise when adaptive and Agile frameworks are appropriate.
Plan iterations and execute adaptive task management activities.
Conduct effective stakeholder communication and gather clear, actionable requirements.
Understand business analysis roles, processes, and product roadmaps within projects.
Validate project requirements through structured and effective product delivery.
Facts
- Course Level: Entry-Level Professional Certification
- Duration: Approximately 23–25 hours eLearning
- Exam Duration: 3 hours
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Prerequisites: Secondary degree and 23 hours of project management education
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is designed for individuals looking to start or progress a career in project management, including aspiring project managers, project coordinators, junior PMO staff, business analysts, and professionals who work on projects and want a formal understanding of project management principles. It is suitable for those with little or no formal project management experience who want a globally recognised certification.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 3 hours
- Number of Questions: 150 multiple-choice questions, including 15 pre-test questions
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Certification: Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)®
- Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI)
- Exam Voucher: Not included
Pre-Course Requirements
To take the CAPM examination, candidates must hold a secondary degree such as a high school diploma, GED, or global equivalent and must have completed at least 23 hours of formal project management education. A mandatory online pre-course applies if the classroom delivery option is selected.
FAQs
What is the CAPM® certification?
The CAPM certification validates foundational knowledge of project management principles, terminology, and practices as defined by PMI and the PMBOK® Guide.
Who should take the CAPM course?
The course is ideal for individuals starting a career in project management or professionals who want to formalise their project management knowledge without prior experience.
Do I need project management experience to take the CAPM course?
No prior professional project management experience is required, but candidates must meet PMI’s education requirements.
How long does the CAPM course take to complete?
The eLearning course takes approximately 23–25 hours and is available with a 12-month licence.
Is the CAPM exam included in the course fee?
No. The CAPM examination must be purchased separately through PMI.
What is the format of the CAPM exam?
The exam consists of 150 multiple-choice questions, including pre-test items, and lasts three hours.
Does the CAPM certification expire?
Yes. CAPM certification requires renewal in line with PMI’s Continuing Certification Requirements.
Is a pre-course required?
A mandatory online pre-course applies only to the classroom delivery option.
Does this certification support career progression?
Yes. CAPM provides a strong foundation for entry-level project roles and progression to advanced PMI certifications such as PMP®.
Who awards the CAPM certification?
The certification is awarded by the Project Management Institute (PMI).
How do I book my Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM) exam?
The CAPM exam is not included as part of this course. Candidates must apply directly to the Project Management Institute (PMI) before sitting the exam. PMI enforces a strict protocol to verify that all prerequisite criteria have been met prior to exam eligibility. It is recommended to review the official CAPM Handbook to fully understand the application process. PMI membership offers additional benefits, including reduced exam fees and a free PMBOK Guide download.
How do I access my CAPM pre-course work?
For delegates taking the classroom study option, mandatory pre-course work must be completed ahead of the training. This is expected to take four to six hours. Instructions and access links will be provided within 48 hours of booking. Completion of all pre-course work is required to receive the CAPM course completion certificate.
Does the Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM) certification expire?
Yes, CAPM certification requires renewal every five years. Further details on renewal processes and requirements are available on the PMI website.
Do I need any prior experience to take the CAPM course?
No prior project management experience is required. Candidates must have a secondary degree, such as a high school diploma, GED, or global equivalent, and must have completed at least 23 contact hours of project management education before attempting the exam.
The PMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)® certification is a globally recognised credential from the Project Management Institute (PMI) that validates knowledge and skills in Agile practices, principles, tools, and techniques. This course is designed to help professionals effectively lead Agile projects, apply Agile frameworks, and enhance delivery within diverse project environments.
Through a combination of structured training, practical exercises, and case studies, the PMI-ACP course equips delegates with the ability to implement Agile methodologies such as Scrum, Kanban, Lean, XP, and TDD. Participants gain the knowledge to adapt Agile approaches to project requirements, deliver high-value outcomes, and contribute to continuous improvement initiatives across their organisations.
The PMI-ACP credential demonstrates competence in Agile project management and positions participants to play a strategic role in driving successful Agile implementations, enhancing team performance, and fostering adaptive planning across projects.
What’s Included
- Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)® training
- Two industry case studies demonstrating real business problems
- Two hands-on projects to apply practical Agile skills
- Five simulation test papers for self-assessment
- Tutor support during the licence period
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX-Simplilearn with DrTutor support
Self-paced study, approximately 13 hours to complete, 12-month licence. Exam not included. Price: £405.00 + VAT or £33.75 + VAT per month
Understand Agile principles, values, and mindset across frameworks such as Scrum, Kanban, XP, and TDD.
Apply iterative and incremental approaches to project delivery for high-velocity outputs.
Develop the ability to deliver value-driven stories and epics with adaptive planning techniques.
Engage stakeholders effectively and enhance team performance within Agile environments.
Implement practical Agile tools and methods to identify, prevent, and resolve project issues.
Integrate lessons learned into continuous improvement and project lifecycle activities.
Understand how to manage and lead Agile initiatives to achieve organisational objectives.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced Professional Certification
- Duration: Approximately 13 hours eLearning
- Exam Duration: 3 hours
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Prerequisites: PMI eligibility criteria apply
- Delivery Methods: eLearning
Who It’s For
This course is designed for Project Managers, aspiring Project Managers, Agile team members, Software Developers, and team leaders or managers who are responsible for planning, executing, or delivering Agile projects. It is suitable for professionals looking to formalise their Agile knowledge and enhance their ability to lead Agile initiatives.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 3 hours
- Number of Questions: 120 multiple-choice questions
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Certification: Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)®
- Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through PMI
- Exam Voucher: Not included
Pre-Course Requirements
To sit the PMI-ACP examination, candidates must meet PMI eligibility requirements relating to project experience and formal Agile training hours. There is no mandatory pre-course for the eLearning option.
FAQs
Why should I do a PMI-ACP course?
The PMI-ACP certification validates advanced Agile knowledge, improves project success rates, and demonstrates professional expertise in Agile practices.
What study options are available for the Agile Certified Practitioner course?
The course is available via self-paced eLearning with a 12-month licence. Classroom or live virtual options are not included in this offering.
What are the prerequisites for the PMI-ACP course?
Candidates must meet PMI’s eligibility criteria, including a secondary degree or higher, at least 1,500 hours of experience working on Agile project teams in the last three years, a minimum of 2,000 hours of general project management experience in the last five years (or hold a valid PMP® or PgMP® certification), and 12 hours of formal Agile training. Full details are available on the PMI website.
How do I book my PMI-ACP exam?
The examination is booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI) and is not included with the course. Once you’ve applied and eligibility is confirmed, you pay the exam fee to PMI and schedule your exam.
Does this course support career progression?
Yes. PMI-ACP certification enhances career prospects for professionals leading Agile initiatives and demonstrates globally recognised Agile competency.
Who awards the PMI-ACP certification?
The certification is awarded by the Project Management Institute (PMI).
Is prior Agile experience required?
No. While prior experience is helpful, the course provides foundational and practical knowledge required to pass the certification.
How long is the course?
The eLearning course requires approximately 13 hours to complete and is available with a 12-month licence.
Are there any hands-on exercises included?
Yes. Two industry case studies and two hands-on projects are included to reinforce practical Agile skills.
Does the course include exam preparation?
Yes. Five simulation test papers are provided for self-assessment and exam readiness.
Can I complete this course in stages?
Yes. The self-paced eLearning format allows participants to progress according to their own schedule.
Is tutor support available?
Yes. Tutor support is included throughout the 12-month licence period.
Does this course cover multiple Agile frameworks?
Yes. It covers Scrum, Kanban, Lean, XP, and TDD methodologies.
Will this course help me manage Agile teams?
Yes. The training equips learners with practical skills to enhance team performance, stakeholder engagement, and Agile project delivery.
Is the exam included in the course fee?
No. The exam is purchased separately through PMI.
What skills will I gain?
Delegates will gain practical Agile project management skills, value-driven delivery techniques, adaptive planning knowledge, and the ability to lead Agile initiatives.
The PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® certification is a globally recognised credential designed for professionals who specialise in identifying, analysing, and managing project risks. This course strengthens your ability to anticipate uncertainty, apply structured risk management techniques, and protect projects from potential threats that can impact cost, schedule, scope, and business value.
Delivered through an engaging, skills-based eLearning programme, the PMI-RMP course develops a disciplined yet adaptable approach to risk management that can be applied across industries and project environments. Learners gain a deep understanding of risk planning, qualitative and quantitative analysis, response strategies, and stakeholder engagement, enabling them to manage complexity and uncertainty with confidence.
By completing this course, professionals enhance their credibility as risk specialists and position themselves as key contributors to successful project delivery. The training aligns with PMI best practices and prepares learners to apply risk management principles in real-world project scenarios while supporting progression toward the PMI-RMP certification.
What’s Included
- PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® eLearning course
- Approximately 7 hours of skills-based online training
- 12-month eLearning licence
- Training delivered via PMI-approved learning partner
- Tutor and platform support during licence period
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced study, approximately 7 hours to complete, 12-month licence. Exam not included. Price: £405.00 + VAT or £33.75 + VAT per month
Understand core risk management principles, concepts, processes, tools, and techniques used across professional project environments.
Identify, analyse, and monitor project risks throughout the project lifecycle.
Apply qualitative and quantitative risk analysis methods to support informed decision-making.
Adapt risk management practices to suit different project types, scales, and delivery models.
Implement effective risk response strategies to minimise threats and enhance opportunities.
Recognise common challenges in risk management and apply structured approaches to address them.
Facts
- Course Level: Professional Certification
- Duration: Approximately 7 hours eLearning
- Exam Duration: 3.5 hours
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Prerequisites: PMI eligibility criteria apply
- Delivery Methods: eLearning
Who It’s For
This course is designed for programme managers, project managers, line managers, and risk management consultants who are responsible for identifying and managing risk within projects or programmes. It is suitable for professionals seeking to formalise their risk management expertise and for those working in environments where proactive risk control is critical to project success.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 3.5 hours
- Number of Questions: 170 multiple-choice questions
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
- Certification: PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)®
- Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI)
- Exam Voucher: Not included
Pre-Course Requirements
To sit the PMI-RMP examination, candidates must meet PMI eligibility requirements relating to education, professional experience, and risk management experience. Full details of the eligibility criteria are defined by PMI and should be reviewed carefully before committing to the exam. There is no mandatory pre-course work for this training course.
FAQs
What is the PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® certification?
The PMI-RMP certification recognises professionals who specialise in identifying, assessing, and managing project risks using structured and proven risk management practices.
Who should take the PMI-RMP course?
The course is suitable for project managers, programme managers, line managers, and risk management consultants involved in managing uncertainty and risk within projects.
How long does the PMI-RMP course take to complete?
The eLearning course takes approximately 7 hours to complete and is available with a 12-month licence.
Is the PMI-RMP exam included in the course fee?
No. The PMI-RMP examination is not included and must be purchased separately through PMI.
What is the format of the PMI-RMP exam?
The exam consists of 170 multiple-choice questions and has a duration of 3.5 hours.
Are there any prerequisites for the PMI-RMP certification?
Yes. PMI defines specific eligibility requirements related to education and professional experience, which must be met before sitting the exam.
Is there any pre-course work required?
No. There is no mandatory pre-course work for this training course.
What skills will I gain from this course?
You will gain advanced skills in risk planning, qualitative and quantitative risk analysis, implementing risk responses, and managing project uncertainty.
Does this certification support career progression?
Yes. The PMI-RMP certification enhances professional credibility and supports career progression into senior project, programme, and risk management roles.
Who awards the PMI-RMP certification?
The certification is awarded by the Project Management Institute (PMI), a globally recognised professional body.
How do I book my Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP) exam?
The RMP exam is not included as part of this course.
If you wish to take the Risk Management Professional exam, you will need to apply directly via the Project Management Institute (PMI) who will ensure you meet all prerequisite requirements.
To ensure you understand the full PMI exam booking process we recommend you review the PMI-RMP Credential Handbook.
What are the prerequisites for the PMI-RMP course?
To sit the PMI-RMP exam, you must have:
A secondary degree (high school diploma, associate’s degree, or the global equivalent)
36 months of project risk management experience within the last five years
40 hours of project risk management education
OR
A four-year degree (bachelor’s degree or the global equivalent)
24 months of project risk management experience within the last five years
30 hours of project risk management education
Who is the Risk Management Professional course suitable for?
This course is ideal for Project and Programme Managers, risk specialists, or other professionals that handle project uncertainties, who are looking to enhance their skills and develop more effective risk management strategies.
How long does the PMI-RMP course take to complete?
Delivered by our partner, Simplilearn, this eLearning course is expected to take approximately seven hours to complete. You will have access to your eLearning licence for 12 months, so you can work through the course materials at your own pace.
The ITIL® 4 Foundation course provides a modern, practical and business-focused introduction to IT Service Management (ITSM). Built on global best practice and aligned with today’s fast-moving digital landscape, ITIL 4 helps organisations deliver reliable, efficient and customer-driven services in a world shaped by cloud, automation, DevOps and Agile ways of working.
This course takes you beyond theory. You will explore the complete ITIL 4 framework — including the Service Value System, the Four Dimensions of Service Management, and the 34 Management Practices — and understand how these components work together to create a resilient, high-value service culture. Through scenario examples, guided explanations and real-world applications, you will learn HOW to apply ITIL principles to improve stability, reduce downtime, streamline processes and enhance service quality.
Whether you work in IT operations, support, digital services, cybersecurity or service delivery, ITIL 4 Foundation gives you a powerful, structured model for managing modern IT environments. By the end of the course, you will be ready to sit the ITIL® 4 Foundation exam with confidence and understand how to bring immediate value back into your organisation through better incident handling, proactive problem management, efficient change processes and continual service improvement.
This certification is recognised worldwide and is often the first step for professionals seeking stronger roles in IT service management, digital transformation and operational leadership.
What’s Included
- 12-month access to ITIL 4 Foundation eLearning
- Fully accredited ITIL 4 training content
- Exam simulator & practice tests
- ITIL 4 digital study guides
- Tutor support from drtutor
- Official ITIL® 4 Foundation exam voucher
- Certificate upon passing
- Access to downloadable reference materials
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX and drtutor support
Self-paced, flexible online learning designed for busy professionals.
Full 12-month access, exam included, tutor support, practice exams.
Price: £700 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Real-time instructor-led training with interactive discussions, case studies and exam preparation.
Price: £730+ VAT
In-Person Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Face-to-face teaching by accredited ILX instructors with group exercises, activities and exam readiness.
Price: £1,700 + VAT.
-
Understand the purpose, value and benefits of ITIL 4
-
Apply ITIL concepts to improve service quality and stability
-
Use the Service Value System to design and manage effective IT services
-
Support faster, more reliable service delivery aligned with business goals
-
Improve incident, problem and change processes
-
Collaborate more effectively across IT and digital teams
-
Drive continual improvement initiatives
- Prepare confidently for the ITIL 4 Foundation exam
Key Facts
Certification: ITIL® 4 Foundation
Study Method: eLearning / Virtual Classroom / Classroom
Access Duration: 12 months (eLearning)
Estimated Study Time: 10–12 hours
Exam: Included
Accredited: Fully accredited by ILX & PeopleCert
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for:
- IT Support and Service Desk teams
- IT Managers & Service Delivery Managers
- Operations teams, Infrastructure teams, Network teams
- Cybersecurity, Cloud and Digital professionals
- Project Managers and Agile teams working with IT services
- Professionals seeking ITSM career progression
- Anyone entering IT service roles
Exam Information
- Format: Multiple choice
- Questions: 40
- Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Delivery: Online, remote-proctored exam
Pre-Course Requirements
No formal prerequisites.
General knowledge of IT, support environments or service operations is helpful but not mandatory.
Extended FAQ (drtutor enhanced version)
1. What is ITIL 4 and why is it important?
ITIL 4 is the world’s leading service management framework, used globally to improve the quality, efficiency and reliability of IT services. It helps organisations reduce downtime, improve customer satisfaction, manage risk and align IT with business priorities.
2. How long does the ITIL 4 Foundation course take?
Most learners complete the course in 10–12 hours, depending on experience.
3. Can I take the ITIL 4 exam online?
Yes. The exam is taken online with a remote proctor, giving you full flexibility.
4. Does the eLearning include the exam?
Yes — all drtutor eLearning packages include the official ITIL 4 Foundation exam.
5. Do I need technical experience?
No technical background is required. ITIL is suitable for beginners and experienced professionals.
6. Is ITIL 4 Foundation recognised internationally?
Yes. ITIL certifications are accepted worldwide across IT, digital services and enterprise operations.
7. What career opportunities does ITIL 4 Foundation support?
Service Desk Analyst, Service Manager, IT Operations roles, Incident/Problem Manager, Process Lead, Digital Service roles, and ITSM leadership positions.
8. Are practice exams included?
Yes — the eLearning includes exam simulators and sample questions to support faster exam success.
9. Can my organisation train multiple staff?
Yes — group and corporate packages are available via drtutor and ILX.
The ITIL® 4 Specialist: Create, Deliver & Support (CDS) course is the essential operational module within the ITIL 4 Managing Professional (MP) stream. Designed for IT teams and leaders who are responsible for building, running, and supporting digital products and services, this course dives deep into how modern IT organisations operate end-to-end — from design and development to release, support, and continual improvement.
In this programme, learners explore the full service delivery lifecycle, gaining the knowledge and capability to optimise workflows, improve team structures, enhance collaboration, and deliver high-quality customer experiences. CDS moves beyond theory and focuses on real-world execution — equipping you with the tools to manage work effectively, strengthen service performance, and integrate technical practices such as agile, DevOps, automation, and cloud-native operations.
Whether you work in IT operations, service management, support, engineering, DevOps, or digital product delivery, this course provides the practical blueprint for how modern teams should collaborate and operate. The training takes the ITIL 4 concepts and translates them into clear operational models that improve efficiency, resilience, and service reliability.
After completing the course, you’ll be well prepared for the ITIL 4 Specialist: Create, Deliver & Support (CDS) exam, enabling you to progress toward the full ITIL 4 Managing Professional (MP) qualification.
What’s Included
- Official ITIL® 4 Specialist: CDS accredited training
- Fully updated course materials aligned with the latest ITIL 4 guidance
- Instructor-led sessions or eLearning modules (depending on option selected)
- Exam voucher for ITIL® 4 CDS
- Practice exam questions and mock tests
- Course workbook and downloadable study resources
- Access to an online learner portal
- Expert tutor support
- Certificate of completion
- Up to 18 CPD hours (based on delivery format)
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Real-time online training with interactive discussion, practical exercises, and exam preparation delivered by accredited ITIL experts. Instructor-led real-time course, 2 days / 14–16 hours total. Price: £1,995 + VAT
Self-Paced eLearning
Flexible online learning with interactive modules, multimedia content, and full exam preparation included. Self-paced online training, 12 months’ access, approx. 12 hours study.Price: £795 + VAT
In-Person Classroom – ILX Accredited
Face-to-face, 2 days / 14–16 hours (or on-site schedule as agreed). Price: £2885+ VAT
Apply the principles of service design, development, and delivery within ITIL 4
-
Build high-performing, cross-functional IT teams
-
Integrate agile, DevOps, and lean practices into service operations
-
Understand end-to-end value streams and how services are created and supported
-
Use modern tools and automation to streamline workflows and reduce waste
-
Improve service reliability, efficiency, and user satisfaction
-
Manage work effectively across the entire service lifecycle
-
Align operational practices with business and digital strategy
-
Enhance collaboration between development, operations, and support teams
-
Prepare for and pass the ITIL® 4 CDS exam
Key Facts
- Course Level: ITIL 4 Specialist (Managing Professional stream)
- Exam Format: 40 questions, multiple choice
- Exam Duration: 90 minutes
- Pass Mark: 70%
- Delivery: Virtual classroom, self-paced eLearning, In-Person Classroom – ILX
- Accredited: Fully accredited by PeopleCert
Estimated Training Hours: Virtual Classroom: 18 hours
- eLearning: 20–25 hours (self-paced)
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for:
- IT service managers
- IT operations managers
- Service desk leads and support specialists
- DevOps and digital product teams
- IT project managers and delivery managers
- Process owners and technical professionals
- Anyone pursuing the ITIL 4 Managing Professional (MP) designation
- Professionals responsible for designing, delivering, or supporting Digital & IT Services
Exam Information
- Format: Closed-book, online
- Type: Multiple-choice, scenario-basedQuestions: 40
- Passing Score: 70%
- Duration: 90 minutes
- Prerequisite: ITIL 4 Foundation
- An exam voucher is included with all training options.
Pre-Course Requirements
- Mandatory: ITIL® 4 Foundation certificate
- Recommended reading: ITIL 4 Create, Deliver & Support publication
- For classroom learners: pre-reading materials will be provided
- For eLearning: no specific technical prerequisites required
FAQ
1. What is the ITIL® 4 Specialist: Create, Deliver & Support (CDS) module?
It is the key operational module in ITIL 4 that focuses on how to design, build, deliver, and support IT-enabled services across their full lifecycle.
2. Do I need the ITIL 4 Foundation certificate to enrol?
Yes. ITIL 4 Foundation is a strict prerequisite for sitting the CDS exam.
3. How long does the CDS course take to complete?
Virtual classroom takes around 18 hours of instructor-led learning. eLearning typically takes 20–25 hours depending on your study pace.
4. Is the CDS exam included in the course price?
Yes. All ILX training options include the official PeopleCert exam voucher.
5. What exam format should I expect?
The exam has 40 multiple-choice questions, lasts 90 minutes, and requires a 70% score to pass.
6. Is the exam taken online?
Yes. Exams are delivered online with remote proctoring, so you can take them from home or the office.
7. Are mock exams provided to help me prepare?
Yes. Practice questions and mock tests are included with both the eLearning and virtual classroom options.
8. Is there a self-paced online learning option?
Yes. The eLearning package is fully flexible, allowing you to study anytime, anywhere.
9. Does the course cover practical operational activities?
Absolutely. CDS is a highly practical module covering team structures, workflows, automation, DevOps, agile, and real-world operational models.
10. Does this module count toward ITIL Managing Professional (MP)?
Yes. CDS is one of the four modules required for earning the ITIL 4 Managing Professional designation.
11. What type of professionals typically take CDS?
IT service managers, DevOps engineers, service desk leads, IT operations teams, product owners, delivery managers, and digital service professionals.
12. Are the materials accredited by PeopleCert?
Yes. All ILX materials meet official PeopleCert accreditation requirements.
13. How long is the exam voucher valid for?
Normally 12 months from the date of issue.
14. Does the course include tutor support?
Yes. Virtual classroom includes live tutor interaction; eLearning includes support through the online learning portal.
15. Is there pre-reading before starting the course?
A pre-course study guide is provided; completing it is recommended but not mandatory.
16. Can I retake the exam if I fail?
Yes. You can add the PeopleCert “Take2” resit option at additional cost.
17. Can I combine CDS training with other ITIL 4 modules for a faster Managing Professional path?
Yes. Many learners choose to schedule multiple ITIL 4 Specialist modules (CDS, DPI, HDA, and HVIT) in sequence or combined formats to efficiently progress toward the ITIL 4 Managing Professional certification, balancing study pace with practical application.
18. Do I need technical experience to take CDS?
No, but general IT service management knowledge is helpful.
19. Does the eLearning option include video content?
Yes. It includes instructor-led videos, interactive modules, assessments, and downloadable resources.
20. Is this qualification recognised internationally?
Yes. ITIL qualifications, including CDS, are globally recognised and widely adopted across industries.
The ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve (DPI) course is designed for professionals who shape strategy, lead teams, and drive measurable improvement across IT and digital services. This certification goes beyond operational tasks — it empowers leaders to connect long-term strategic direction with day-to-day delivery, enabling organisations to stay agile, resilient, and continuously improving.
This programme equips you with the principles, tools, and governance frameworks needed to build high-performing teams, enhance value streams, embed continual improvement, and optimise decision-making. You will learn how to direct work at strategic and tactical levels, plan with clarity, integrate governance and compliance, and ensure improvements deliver real outcomes.
DPI strengthens your ability to manage change, influence organisational culture, and implement improvements that support innovation and operational excellence. Whether you lead service teams, manage transformation programmes, or oversee risk and governance, this course provides the strategic mindset and practical toolkit required to drive lasting value across your organisation.
What’s Included
- Accredited ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve (DPI) training
- ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve certification exam
- Official ITIL® 4 DPI manual
- Tutor support
- 12-month access for eLearning learners
- Mandatory online pre-course for Virtual Classroom / Classroom learners
- Optional Take2 exam insurance available
Delivery Options & Pricing (with hours & duration)
eLearning – Delivered by ILX- DrTutor support
Self-paced, accredited online training
- Price: £773.50 + VAT
- Access Duration: 12-month licence
- Study Time Required: Approx. 12–14 hours
- Includes Exam: Yes
- Monthly Instalment Option: £64.46 + VAT/month
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Real-time instructor-led learning with group activities, case studies, and exam preparation.
- Price: £2,006.25 + VAT
- Format: Live interactive training
- Includes: Tutor-led sessions, exercises, pre-course, exam
Classroom – Delivered by ILX Accredited Instructors
In-person learning with collaborative workshops and intensive exam preparation.
- Price: £2,885.00 + VAT
- Format: Face-to-face training
- Includes: Printed materials, expert instruction, pre-course, exam
Direct and govern digital and IT operations effectively
-
Integrate governance, risk, and compliance into the service value system
-
Apply organisational change management to drive successful improvements
-
Use measurement and reporting to support strategic planning
-
Enhance value streams and optimise workflows
-
Lead high-performing teams focused on continuous improvement
-
Align IT strategy with business outcomes
-
Implement structured planning and improvement frameworks
Key Facts
- Certification: ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve
- Study Time: 12–14 hours (eLearning)
- Delivery Modes: eLearning, Virtual Classroom, Classroom
- Level: Intermediate / Strategic
- Exam Included: Yes
- Accredited: Yes
Who It’s For
Ideal for professionals responsible for shaping strategy, leading teams, or managing improvements. Suitable roles include:
- Change Manager
- Service Designer
- Service Portfolio Manager
- IT Operations Manager
- Risk Manager
- Continuous Improvement Lead
- Transformation Manager
- Team Leaders or Senior Analysts moving into strategic roles
Prerequisites
You must hold one of the following:
- ITIL® 4 Foundation
- ITIL® v3 Foundation
- ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Transition Certificate
Training must be taken via an accredited training organisation.
Exam Information
- Format: Multiple choice
- Duration: 90 minutes
- Pass Mark: 70%
- Closed Book: Yes
- Delivery: Online exam with remote proctor
FAQ
1. Is ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve globally recognised?
Yes. It is an internationally respected qualification used by organisations worldwide to improve governance, planning, and continual improvement capability.
2. Does the DPI certification expire?
ITIL certificates typically remain valid, but AXELOS recommends renewing every 3 years to stay current with best practice.
3. How long does the eLearning course take to complete?
Approximately 12–14 hours, depending on your study pace.
4. What does the Virtual Classroom option include?
Live tutor-led sessions, discussions, exercises, pre-course learning, and the exam.
5. Are the training materials accredited?
Yes — all DPI content delivered by DrTutor and ILX is fully accredited.
6. Do I need ITIL® 4 Foundation to take this course?
Yes. A valid ITIL® 4 or ITIL® v3 Foundation certificate is required.
7. Is the exam included in all delivery methods?
Yes — all study options include the DPI exam.
8. Can I study at my own pace?
Yes — the eLearning option gives 12 months of flexible access.
9. Is tutor support available in eLearning?
Yes. You receive access to tutor assistance when needed.
10. What topics are covered in DPI?
Governance, continual improvement, organisational change management, GRC, planning, measurement, reporting, and strategic direction.
11. Can I take the exam online from home?
Yes — exams are delivered via secure online proctoring.
12. Is pre-course work required?
Mandatory pre-course applies for Virtual Classroom and Classroom options.
13. Do I receive the official ITIL® DPI manual?
Yes — the manual is included.
14. Can I add Take2 exam insurance?
Yes — it can be selected as an optional extra.
15. Who should take DPI?
Anyone responsible for directing work, improving processes, managing change, or aligning strategy with operations.
The ITIL® 4 High-Velocity IT (HVIT) course delivers a focused, practical route to mastering how organisations deliver digital products and services at speed while maintaining resilience, governance and customer value. Designed for leaders and practitioners working in high-tempo environments, HVIT combines proven ITIL guidance with Lean, Agile, DevOps and product management thinking to create a coherent approach for modern delivery pipelines.
This programme goes beyond abstract theory: it explains how to design and operate value streams that move fast, reduce cycle time, and preserve stability through automation, continuous delivery practices, telemetry and robust controls. You will learn how organisations successfully sequence experiments, manage risk in rapid release cycles, and scale delivery across teams without sacrificing compliance or user experience. The course uses real-world scenarios, practical exercises and decision frameworks so you can apply learning immediately to your teams and platforms.
Completing HVIT gives you both the vocabulary and the applied techniques senior stakeholders expect: how to balance velocity with resilience, how to structure teams around outcomes not tasks, how to use metrics that actually inform decisions, and how to embed continuous improvement into every delivery loop. The certification prepares you for the official ITIL® HVIT exam and supports progression within the ITIL 4 Managing Professional stream.
What’s Included
- Accredited ITIL® 4 HVIT training materials and learning modules
- Official ITIL® 4 HVIT exam voucher
- Interactive case studies and scenario exercises
- Practice exam questions and mock tests
- Digital study guide and downloadable reference materials
- Tutor support and learner helpdesk access
- 12-month access for eLearning students (where applicable)
- Certificate issued upon successful completion
- Optional exam insurance / Take2 available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence; approx. 12–14 hours study time; fully accredited, exam included. Price: £871.50 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Instructor-led (ILX tutors)
Real-time interactive delivery across scheduled sessions; practical workshops and exam preparation; typical format delivered over 2–3 days depending on timetable. Price: £2,675.00 + VAT
Classroom – In-person (ILX accredited)
Face-to-face instructor delivery with group activities, labs and scenario facilitation; typical programme length 2–3 days. Price: £2,452.25 + VAT(eLearning is delivered by ILX with DrTutor learner support included.)
Understand the characteristics of high-velocity organisations and how they operate
Map and optimise value streams to increase flow and reduce waste
Apply Agile, Lean and DevOps practices inside an ITIL service-value system
Design and operate automated delivery pipelines with appropriate controls
Use measurement, observability and telemetry to make faster, evidence-based decisions
Manage risk, resilience and compliance in rapid release cycles
Build and lead cross-functional teams focused on outcomes and product value
Embed continual improvement and safe experimentation into delivery lifecycles
Prepare to apply HVIT principles across cloud, platform and product teams
Key Facts
- Certification: ITIL® 4 High-Velocity IT (HVIT)
- Study formats: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
- eLearning access: 12 months
- Estimated eLearning study time: 12–14 hours
- Typical live/classroom duration: 2–3 days (format dependent)
- Exam included: Yes (voucher provided with training)
- Accredited: Yes — PeopleCert / ITIL framework
Who It’s For
Digital transformation leads, DevOps engineers, release and platform teams, product owners, service delivery and operations managers, automation and SRE practitioners, architects and anyone responsible for delivering software, services or digital change at pace.
Exam Information
- Format: Multiple-choice
- Questions: 40
- Duration: 90 minutes
- Pass mark: 70%
- Delivery: Online, remote-proctored (closed book)
- Prerequisite: ITIL® 4 Foundation (or equivalent entry as defined by PeopleCert)
Pre-Course Requirements
A valid ITIL® 4 Foundation certificate (or ITIL v3 Foundation plus transition where applicable) is required.
Learners should have practical exposure to digital delivery, service operations or development practices to maximise benefit.
For Live or Classroom delivery, completion of mandatory short pre-course material is recommended.
FAQ
1. What makes HVIT different from other ITIL 4 modules?
HVIT focuses specifically on running and scaling high-velocity digital delivery — blending ITIL guidance with DevOps, Agile and lean practices to support rapid, resilient value streams.
2. Who should take this course first — HVIT or other ITIL modules?
Start with ITIL 4 Foundation to gain core concepts; after that, HVIT is suitable for those working in fast delivery environments or aiming for the Managing Professional stream.
3. How long will the eLearning take to finish?
Typical completion for eLearning is 12–14 hours, depending on prior experience and learning pace.
4. Can I take the exam online from home?
Yes. The exam is delivered via secure remote proctoring, allowing you to sit from home or the office.
5. Is tutor support available for eLearning students?
Yes. DrTutor provides learner support for the ILX-delivered eLearning package, including helpdesk access and guidance.
6. What practical exercises are included?
The course includes scenario workshops, value-stream mapping tasks, resilience exercises and mock decision scenarios that mirror real delivery challenges.
7. What happens if I fail the exam?
You can purchase an optional resit package (Take2) or rebook the exam independently; DrTutor can advise on resit options.
8. Does the course include any hands-on labs or tools?
While HVIT is primarily conceptual and strategic, practical sessions include templates, metrics dashboards and worked examples of CI/CD and automation patterns.
9. Is prior technical experience required?
Not strictly, but practical experience in delivery, operations or development will make the content more immediately applicable.
10. Will this qualification help me get a promotion or new role?
Yes — HVIT signals modern digital delivery competency and is recognised by organisations prioritising cloud, automation and product-centric teams.
11. Can organisations train multiple members at once?
Yes — DrTutor can arrange private group bookings for Virtual Classroom or Classroom delivery with tailored scheduling.
12. Are course materials downloadable?
Yes — learners receive downloadable reference materials, templates and the official syllabus content for study and reference.
13. How is the course assessed?
Assessment is via the official PeopleCert multiple-choice exam requiring 70% to pass.
14. Does HVIT cover compliance and governance at speed?
Yes — the course covers how to implement lightweight governance, risk and compliance strategies that do not impede velocity.
15. How does HVIT relate to SRE and platform engineering?
HVIT complements SRE and platform engineering by providing governance and management practices that enable safe fast flow while supporting reliability objectives.
16. Are continued professional development (CPD) credits available?
Yes — completing the course contributes CPD hours; exact allocation depends on organisational policy.
17. Can I combine HVIT with other ITIL modules for the Managing Professional qualification?
Yes — HVIT is one of the modules that contribute to ITIL 4 Managing Professional when taken with the other required modules.
18. How soon can I apply what I learn?
Immediately. The course emphasises practical application and provides tools and templates designed for rapid adoption within teams and delivery pipelines.
The ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy (DITS) course equips senior IT and business professionals with the strategic skills necessary to drive digital transformation, align IT capabilities with business objectives, and create sustainable value across the organisation. This course blends ITIL 4 best-practice guidance with practical, real-world applications for governance, risk management, compliance, and continual improvement. You will learn how to assess market disruptions, manage risk, optimise value streams, and lead organisational change to deliver measurable outcomes. Through scenario-based learning, case studies, and strategic exercises, you will gain not just theoretical knowledge but actionable expertise to apply immediately in your organisation. On completion, learners will hold the ITIL 4 DITS certification, providing recognised validation of their ability to shape digital and IT strategies that drive competitive advantage and operational excellence.
What’s Included
- Accredited ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy training course
- Official ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy exam
- Digital manual and course workbook
- Practice exam questions and mock tests
- Tutor support throughout the programme
- For eLearning: 12-month access to all course content
- Certificate of completion upon passing the exam
- Optional extras including exam-resit insurance
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support.
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approximately 25–30 hours to complete, with exam included. Price: £871.50 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX.
Immersive learning experience, three-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, with interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2,006.25 + VAT or £167.19 + VAT per month
Classroom – Delivered by ILX.
In-person Face-to-face, 3 days, instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Price: £2,885.00 + VAT
You will be able to understand and apply ITIL 4 guiding principles to digital-strategy decisions
Evaluate market disruptions, risks, and opportunities to define robust digital strategies
Align IT and digital strategy with business objectives to optimise organisational value
Implement governance, risk management, and compliance frameworks within digital environments
Lead and manage organisational change and transformation programmes effectively
Use measurement and reporting techniques to monitor strategic outcomes and ensure continual improvement
Drive innovation, service optimisation, and long-term growth through structured strategic planning
Direct, plan, and improve value streams to ensure operational efficiency
Key Facts
- Certification: ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy (DITS)
- Prerequisites: Valid ITIL 4 Foundation (or v3 Foundation plus transition where applicable)
- Study Time (eLearning): 25–30 hours
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
- Exam: Online, remote-proctored, closed-book, 30 multiple-choice questions, 60 minutes, 70% pass mark
Who It’s For
This course is designed for IT and business leaders, digital strategists, CIOs, CTOs, service portfolio managers, project managers, compliance and risk officers, and senior managers responsible for IT strategy and organisational direction. It is ideal for professionals shaping digital strategy and leading transformation initiatives.
Exam Information
The ITIL 4 DITS exam consists of 30 multiple-choice questions, is closed-book, and is taken online under remote proctoring. Candidates have 60 minutes to complete the exam, with a 70% pass mark required to achieve certification.
Pre-Course Requirements
A valid ITIL 4 Foundation certificate (or approved equivalent) is required. Learners should have exposure to IT or digital services, business operations, or organisational change to gain maximum benefit. Mandatory pre-course material must be completed for classroom and virtual delivery.
FAQ
1. What is the scope of the ITIL 4 DITS course?
The course covers strategic planning, digital transformation, governance, risk management, compliance, organisational viability, change management, and alignment of IT and digital services with business objectives.
2. Do I need ITIL 4 Foundation before enrolling?
Yes, a valid ITIL 4 Foundation or equivalent certification is required before taking this course.
3. How long does the eLearning course take to complete?
The eLearning course is approximately 25–30 hours depending on your pace and prior experience.
4. Can the exam be taken online?
Yes, the exam is delivered online under remote proctoring.
5. How many questions are on the exam and how much time is allocated?
The exam has 30 multiple-choice questions and candidates have 60 minutes to complete it.
6. What is the passing score for the exam?
The pass mark is 70%, meaning 21 correct answers out of 30.
7. Are practice exams provided?
Yes, mock tests and practice questions are included to support exam preparation.
8. Is there any pre-course material for classroom or live virtual delivery?
Yes, completion of mandatory short pre-course material is recommended for these formats.
9. Does the course cover governance and compliance?
Yes, governance, risk management, and compliance are core components of the course content.
10. Who benefits most from this course?
IT leaders, digital transformation managers, strategists, project managers, risk officers, service portfolio managers, and senior executives overseeing IT and digital operations.
11. Is the course globally recognised?
Yes, ITIL 4 DITS certification is internationally recognised and valued across industries.
12. Can I combine DITS with other ITIL modules?
Yes, DITS is part of the ITIL Strategic Leader stream and can be combined with other modules for higher-level certification.
13. Are learning materials provided digitally?
Yes, digital manuals, workbooks, and online resources are included.
14. Is tutor support available for eLearning learners?
Yes, DrTutor support is provided for eLearning participants.
15. Can I take this course while working full-time?
Yes, the self-paced eLearning format allows learners to study while continuing professional responsibilities.
16. Will I receive a certificate upon passing?
Yes, successful candidates receive the official ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy certification.
17. Does the course teach continual improvement principles?
Yes, continual improvement is embedded throughout the course to ensure sustainable organisational success.
18. Can the course help me manage digital transformation initiatives?
Absolutely, the course provides practical frameworks and strategic guidance for leading digital and IT transformations.
19. Is exam-resit insurance available?
Optional exam-resit insurance can be added at checkout for additional security.
20. What support is provided during the course?
Learners receive tutor guidance, access to digital resources, and assistance with exam preparation throughout their learning journey.
The ITIL® 4 Specialist: Drive Stakeholder Value (DSV) course is designed for professionals who want to transform how their organisation builds, manages, and strengthens stakeholder relationships. In an environment where customer expectations continue to rise and digital services evolve rapidly, this qualification equips you with the capabilities to shape end-to-end value experiences that deliver measurable impact.
This programme goes far beyond theory. It demonstrates how demand is converted into value through every stage of the service relationship — from engagement and design to delivery, measurement, and continual improvement. You will learn how to understand stakeholder behaviours, map value journeys, design trusted partnerships, and create service interactions that maximise satisfaction and loyalty.
Through structured frameworks, practical tools, and scenario-based learning, you will develop a robust understanding of how to influence, negotiate, communicate, and facilitate value co-creation across diverse stakeholders. Whether your role focuses on customer experience, service delivery, product ownership, business relationship management, or organisational strategy, this course gives you the language, confidence, and practical toolkit to elevate the quality of every stakeholder interaction.
Upon completion, you will be prepared to sit the ITIL® 4 Specialist: Drive Stakeholder Value certification exam — a core module of the ITIL 4 Managing Professional stream. The skills you gain will strengthen your ability to shape service culture, improve outcomes, and contribute to a more responsive and value-driven organisation.
What’s Included
✔ Accredited ITIL® 4 Drive Stakeholder Value (DSV) training
✔ Official ITIL® 4 DSV exam
✔ Comprehensive digital course materials
✔ Practice exam questions and self-assessment tools
✔ Tutor support and guidance
✔ Access to the official ITIL® 4 publications (digital)
✔ DrTutor learner support for eLearning students
✔ Certificate upon successful completion
✔ Optional extras (e.g., Take2 exam insurance) available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor Support
Self-paced learning with 12-month access
Approx. 12–14 hours to complete
Price: £847.00 + VAT
A flexible online learning experience ideal for independent learners wanting to study at their own pace. Includes exam voucher, progress tracking, multimedia lessons, and personalised DrTutor support throughout your study period.
Live Virtual Classroom – Instructor-Led
Real-time online training delivered by certified ILX instructors
Interactive sessions, group exercises, and exam preparation
Typical duration: 3 days (6–7 hours per day)
Price: £2,006.25 + VAT
Designed for learners who benefit from live teaching, expert guidance, and collaborative activities in a structured format, without the need to travel.
Classroom Training (In-Person)
Delivered at selected training centres
Immersive, instructor-led learning with practical workshops
Typical duration: 3 days
Price: £2,885.00 + VAT
Ideal for teams or individuals seeking a fully immersive learning experience with direct interaction, peer discussions, and hands-on exercises.
Understand key principles of stakeholder value and co-creation
-
Map and manage stakeholder journeys end-to-end
-
Build trusted, high-value service relationships
-
Translate demand into actionable service opportunities
-
Strengthen customer experience and personalise service offerings
-
Manage communication, expectations, and service interactions
-
Use negotiation, prioritisation, and collaboration techniques
-
Apply behavioural insight to improve service engagement
-
Monitor service relationships and drive continual improvement
-
Align stakeholder needs with organisational outcomes
Key Facts
- Certification: ITIL® 4 Specialist: Drive Stakeholder Value
- Study Formats: eLearning, Virtual Classroom, Classroom
- Licence Length: 12-month eLearning access
Course Duration:
eLearning: 12–14 hoursVirtual/Classroom: Approx. 3 full days - Exam Format: Multiple choice, online proctored
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for:
- Customer Experience and Customer Success professionals
- Service Delivery Managers
- Business Relationship Managers
- Product Owners & Service Owners
- IT and Digital Service Managers
- Engagement Leads & Stakeholder Managers
- ITSM and Service Desk Leaders
- Anyone involved in service design, delivery, or customer interaction
Exam Information
- Format: 40 multiple-choice questions
- Duration: 90 minutes
- Closed Book: Yes
- Pass Mark: 70%
- Delivery: Online, remote proctored
Pre-Course Requirements
You must hold one of the following:
- ITIL® 4 Foundation Certificate, or
- ITIL® v3 Foundation, or
- ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Transition Certificate
If you choose Virtual or Classroom learning, a short mandatory online pre-course will be required before attending the live sessions.
FAQ
1. What is the purpose of the ITIL® 4 DSV certification?
It helps professionals master stakeholder engagement, customer experience, service relationships, and value co-creation across digital services.
2. Is DSV part of the ITIL® 4 Managing Professional stream?
Yes. It is one of the four modules required to achieve the ITIL 4 Managing Professional designation.
3. How long does it take to complete the eLearning course?
Most learners complete it in 12–14 hours.
4. Can I access the course materials offline?
All core materials are delivered digitally and require internet access. Downloads may vary by content type.
5. Do I need ITIL 4 Foundation to take this?
Yes — it is a mandatory prerequisite.
6. How long do I have access to eLearning?
You receive 12 months of access from the activation date.
7. Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes — all study options include the official ITIL® exam.
8. Can I retake the exam?
Yes. Optional Take2 exam insurance can be added at checkout.
9. Does the qualification expire?
ITIL 4 certifications do not expire, but PeopleCert recommends periodic CPD.
10. Is the Virtual Classroom live or pre-recorded?
It is fully live, instructor-led training with real-time interaction.
11. Will I receive a digital certificate?
Yes — successful learners receive an official PeopleCert e-certificate.
12. Does this course help with customer experience roles?
Absolutely. DSV is strongly aligned with CX, stakeholder engagement, and service relationship management.
13. Can businesses book this as a private team course?
Yes — DrTutor can arrange private virtual or on-site sessions on request.
14. Is the classroom training schedule fixed?
Classroom training is offered on selected dates throughout the year.
15. Is tutor support included?
Yes — all learners receive support, with ILX support added for eLearning.
The ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader Learning Path is designed to equip executives, senior managers, and IT professionals with the comprehensive skills and strategic insight required to lead in today’s rapidly evolving digital and service-driven business environment. This integrated learning path combines three globally recognised ITIL® 4 certifications—ITIL® 4 Foundation, ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve, and ITIL® 4 Digital & IT Strategy—into a cohesive programme that provides both foundational knowledge and advanced strategic capabilities. Participants will gain a robust understanding of service management principles, the service value system, governance, risk management, and digital strategy execution, all aligned to deliver measurable business outcomes.
Through immersive learning experiences, scenario-based exercises, and practical case studies, learners will explore how to integrate IT strategy with business objectives, optimise service value streams, and drive continual improvement across their organisations. The programme emphasizes practical application, enabling leaders to translate theory into actionable strategies that enhance operational efficiency, improve decision-making, and support innovation. By mastering the ITIL® 4 framework, participants will develop the ability to create sustainable, value-driven digital transformation initiatives that align IT services with business priorities and stakeholder expectations.
This learning path also positions learners to achieve the prestigious ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader designation, demonstrating mastery in both directing, planning, and improving service delivery, as well as crafting and executing effective digital strategies. Beyond individual professional growth, the course provides organisations with leaders capable of fostering high-performing teams, optimising service management practices, and ensuring technology investments consistently deliver value.
Upon completion, participants will not only be prepared for all three ITIL® 4 certification exams but will also gain a strategic lens for evaluating and improving IT and digital operations. This comprehensive understanding empowers leaders to confidently drive transformation, manage change, mitigate risks, and leverage innovation to achieve competitive advantage. Whether you are shaping organisational strategy, leading IT-enabled projects, or advancing your professional credentials, the ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader Learning Path provides the knowledge, confidence, and executive-level insight necessary for impactful leadership.
What’s Included
- ITIL® 4 Foundation
- ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve
- ITIL® 4 Digital & IT Strategy
- All official PeopleCert examinations
- Accredited learning materials
- Scenario-driven learning
- Full ILX-DrTutor learner support
- Official practice questions
- Exam preparation resources
- Digital course resources
- Accredited ILX eLearning delivery
- ITIL Strategic Leader designation upon completion
- Optional extras including Take2 exam insurance
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 82 hours, 12-month licence, with all three exams included. Price: £1,902 + VAT or £158.50 + VAT per month
Understand the core concepts of ITIL 4 and the four dimensions of service management
Apply ITIL practices and principles to meet organisational requirements
Optimise service value chains and improve service delivery
Plan, direct, and improve value streams effectively
Integrate governance, risk, and compliance into IT operations
Implement continual improvement methods for sustainable organisational success
Leverage digital strategies to enhance innovation and operational performance
Develop leadership skills to drive strategic IT initiatives
Measure and report on key performance indicators for IT services
Enhance decision-making through scenario-based simulations
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation, Managing Professional, Strategic Leader
- Certification: ITIL 4 Foundation; ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve; ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy
- Duration: 82 hours eLearning; 5-day Live Virtual Classroom; 5-day Classroom
- Exam Duration: 60–90 minutes per exam, depending on course
- Pass Mark: 65–70%
- Prerequisites: None for ITIL 4 Foundation; ITIL 4 Foundation required for the other two
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for IT and digital managers, senior executives, aspiring leaders, and professionals responsible for IT service delivery, governance, and strategic initiatives. It is suitable for individuals seeking to enhance organisational value through improved digital strategy, governance frameworks, and service management practices across IT-enabled products and services.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60–90 minutes per exam
- Number of Questions: 40–60 per exam, depending on certification
- Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65–70% depending on certification
- Delivery Method: Online via remote proctor or in-classroom for Live/Physical options
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no prerequisites for the ITIL 4 Foundation exam. For ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve and ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy, learners must hold a valid ITIL Foundation certificate. No prior experience is mandatory, but practical exposure to digital service management and IT operations is recommended to maximise learning benefits.
FAQ
What is the ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader designation?
The ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader designation recognises professionals who have achieved a comprehensive understanding of IT strategy, governance, and digital transformation through three core ITIL 4 certifications.
Which certifications are included in this bundle?
The bundle includes ITIL 4 Foundation, ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve, and ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy.
How long is the eLearning course?
The eLearning option provides approximately 82 hours of accredited online content, accessible for a 12-month licence period.
Can I take the exams online?
Yes, all included exams can be taken online via a secure remote proctoring system.
Do I need to complete ITIL 4 Foundation before the other courses?
Yes, ITIL 4 Foundation is required before taking ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve and ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy.
What is included in the learning materials?
All courses include accredited digital learning resources, official manuals, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation tools.
Are tutor support and guidance included?
Yes, full DrTutor tutor support is provided throughout the learning path to help learners succeed in all three certifications.
How is the Live Virtual Classroom delivered?
The Live Virtual Classroom is an interactive, five-day course in an online virtual environment with 6–7 hours of instructor-led training each day.
Is there an in-person classroom option?
Yes, the bundle also offers a five-day in-person instructor-led course with workshops, exercises, and exam preparation.
What is the pass mark for the exams?
Pass marks vary by exam and range between 65–70% depending on the certification.
Can I purchase optional extras?
Yes, optional extras such as Take2 exam insurance and hardcopy manuals are available at checkout.
Do these certifications expire?
No, ITIL certifications do not expire.
How do these certifications benefit my career?
Achieving the ITIL 4 Strategic Leader designation demonstrates expertise in IT service management, strategy, and governance, enhancing career prospects in senior IT and digital leadership roles.
Can I apply these skills in real-world projects?
Yes, the learning path includes scenario-based exercises and practical examples to directly apply ITIL principles to organisational IT and digital strategies.
Are the courses internationally recognised?
Yes, all three ITIL certifications included are globally recognised and accredited by PeopleCert.
What is the total duration for the Live or Classroom options?
Both the Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom options are five-day courses, with 6–7 hours of learning per day.
The ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Bundle is a comprehensive and strategically designed learning path that equips IT professionals and managers with the advanced skills and knowledge required to lead and optimise IT-enabled services in modern organisations. This bundle delivers five globally recognised ITIL® 4 certifications, providing learners with both technical and strategic capabilities to manage complex service environments, drive digital transformation, and deliver measurable business value. Participants will gain a deep understanding of ITIL® 4 concepts, including the service value system, the service value chain, and the guiding principles that underpin effective IT service management.
The programme covers essential areas such as service creation and support, stakeholder engagement, high-velocity IT, and the planning, directing, and improvement of organisational practices. Learners will develop the ability to align IT initiatives with business strategy, manage risk and compliance effectively, foster continual improvement, and drive innovation across digital services. Scenario-based exercises and interactive simulations mirror real-world decision-making challenges to ensure practical application of skills.
This learning path enhances individual expertise while delivering tangible organisational impact. IT professionals will gain the confidence and authority to lead IT-enabled transformations, optimise operational efficiency, and enhance customer experiences. It is especially valuable for IT managers, service delivery leads, digital transformation leaders, and aspiring senior executives who aim to implement a structured, value-driven approach to IT service management. Completion of this bundle demonstrates mastery of ITIL® 4 best practices, positions learners as strategic leaders within their organisations, and supports career progression in an increasingly competitive and digitally-driven business landscape.
What’s Included
- ITIL® 4 Foundation accredited eLearning and exam
- ITIL® 4 Create, Deliver & Support accredited eLearning and exam
- ITIL® 4 Drive Stakeholder Value accredited eLearning and exam
- ITIL® 4 High Velocity IT accredited eLearning and exam
- ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve accredited eLearning and exam
- Official digital manuals for all five certifications covered by this learning path
- Full DrTutor learner support throughout the programme
- Scenario-based exercises for real-world application
- Exam preparation resources to maximise learner success
- Optional extras available at checkout, including Take2 exam insurance
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 56 hours, 12-month licence, with all exams included. Price: £3,126 + VAT or £260.50 + VAT per month.
Master ITIL® 4 core concepts including the service value system, service value chain, and guiding principles
Understand and implement ITIL® 4 service management practices in real-world environments
Plan, design, and manage IT-enabled products and services effectively
Align IT initiatives with business strategy to drive value and outcomes
Enhance service delivery, operational efficiency, and customer experience
Embed continual improvement, governance, risk, and compliance practices
Develop high-velocity IT capabilities for rapid, digital service delivery
Manage stakeholder relationships and optimise service value streams
Apply scenario-based decision-making to practical organisational challenges
Drive measurable improvements in service management and digital transformation initiatives
Key Facts
- Course Level: Managing Professional
- Certification: ITIL® 4 Foundation; ITIL® 4 Create, Deliver & Support; ITIL® 4 Drive Stakeholder Value; ITIL® 4 High Velocity IT; ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve
- Duration: 56 hours eLearning, 12-month licence
- Exam Duration: Varies per certification
- Pass Mark: Varies per certification
- Prerequisites: ITIL® 4 Foundation required for all modules except Foundation itself
- Delivery Methods: eLearning
Who It’s For
This bundle is ideal for IT professionals and managers responsible for delivering IT-enabled services, managing stakeholder relationships, driving digital transformation, aligning organisational strategy, and leading continual improvement. It is also suitable for digital leaders and aspiring senior executives seeking a structured framework to enhance service management, optimise team performance, and deliver measurable business value.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: Varies by certification
- Number of Questions: Varies by certification
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: Varies by certification
- Delivery Method: Online through accredited examination platforms
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no prerequisites for the ITIL® 4 Foundation exam. To attempt the other four certifications, learners must hold a valid ITIL® 4 Foundation and attend training through an accredited training organisation. No pre-course work is required.
FAQ
How is the learning path delivered?
The ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Learning Path is delivered through accredited eLearning with full DrTutor support, providing a self-paced, flexible experience.
How are the exams structured?
Each certification has its own exam format, including multiple-choice questions designed to assess knowledge, understanding, and practical application of ITIL® 4 concepts.
Do all five certifications expire?
ITIL® 4 certifications do not expire, but it is recommended to stay current with evolving ITIL® best practices through continuous professional development.
What are the benefits of achieving the ITIL® 4 Managing Professional designation?
The designation demonstrates advanced knowledge and skills in IT service management, enhances career prospects, and positions professionals to lead strategic digital and IT service initiatives effectively.
How do I access the digital versions of the ITIL® 4 manuals?
Official digital manuals are included for all certifications and can be accessed through the accredited eLearning platform upon enrolment.
Can I purchase optional extras like exam insurance?
Yes, optional extras such as Take2 exam insurance and hardcopy manuals are available at checkout to enhance your learning experience.
Who should attend this course?
IT managers, service delivery leads, digital transformation leaders, and aspiring senior executives aiming to optimise IT-enabled services and align them with business strategy should attend.
How long does it take to complete the learning path?
The bundle comprises approximately 56 hours of online content, designed to be completed over a 12-month self-paced licence period.
What support is available during the course?
DrTutor provides full learner support, including guidance, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation resources throughout the learning path.
How are scenario-based exercises integrated?
Exercises simulate real-world decision-making and organisational challenges to ensure practical application of ITIL® 4 concepts.
Is prior ITIL experience required?
ITIL® 4 Foundation is required for all modules except the Foundation course itself. Other than that, no prior experience is necessary.
Can I complete this bundle entirely online?
Yes, the bundle is delivered through accredited eLearning with a flexible self-paced approach.
Will this course help with career advancement?
Yes, achieving the ITIL® 4 Managing Professional designation positions learners for leadership roles and demonstrates expertise in IT service management and digital transformation.
What industries benefit from this learning path?
IT, digital services, consulting, finance, healthcare, and any organisation delivering IT-enabled products or services can benefit from the skills acquired.
How do I prepare for the exams?
Exam preparation resources are provided, including practice questions, scenario-based exercises, and access to official digital manuals.
Can this bundle be customised for corporate teams?
Yes, DrTutor can provide guidance on team enrolment and corporate training options for multiple learners.
What is the licence period for eLearning?
The eLearning licence period is 12 months, providing ample time to complete all five certifications.
The MoP® Foundation course provides a structured introduction to portfolio management, giving professionals the skills to align multiple projects and programmes with organisational strategy. You will learn how to prioritise initiatives, optimise resource use, manage risks, and maximise business value.
This course covers the core MoP® principles, portfolio definition and delivery cycles, practices for governance, and the key roles and responsibilities required for effective portfolio management. Through real-world examples and scenario-based learning, you will understand how to embed a portfolio office, make informed decisions, and ensure transparency and accountability across all initiatives.
By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared to sit the MoP® Foundation exam, equipped with practical knowledge and confidence to contribute to portfolio management or senior management decision-making.
What’s Included
- Accredited MoP® Foundation training
- Official MoP Foundation exam
- Official MoP manual (digital or printed)
- Portfolio process and cycle maps
- Mock exams or exam simulator for eLearning learners
- Full tutor support
- 12-month access for online learners
- Downloadable course materials and resources
Delivery Options & Pricing
-
eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX, supported by Drtutor – From £732.00
Self-paced online learning with 12 months’ access, full tutor support, mock exams, process maps, and downloadable resources. -
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors £1883
Interactive, instructor-led online sessions with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and full exam preparation. -
In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited £2620
Face-to-face training with group activities, practical exercises, scenario walkthroughs, exam preparation, and certified ILX instructors.
All delivery methods prepare you fully for the MoP® Foundation certification exam.
Understand portfolio management and its value to organisations
-
Apply MoP® principles, cycles, and governance practices
-
Define roles, responsibilities, and portfolio office structures
-
Evaluate and prioritise portfolio initiatives based on strategic alignment
-
Use portfolio management techniques for risk, resources, and value optimisation
-
Apply MoP® documentation and tools for decision-making and control
-
Embed portfolio management to support organisational change and value realisation
-
Be fully prepared for the MoP® Foundation certification exam
Key Facts
- Accreditation: ILX Group / AXELOS
- Certification: MoP® Foundation
- Exam: 50 multiple-choice questions, 40 minutes, pass mark 50%
- Duration: 10–12 hours eLearning, 1–2 days Virtual/Classroom
- Access Period: 12 months for online learners
- Prerequisites: None; suitable for beginners and experienced professionals
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
What is the purpose of the MoP® Foundation course?It provides fundamental knowledge of portfolio management, including how to align projects and programmes with organisational strategy to maximise value.
Who should take this course?
Portfolio managers, PMO staff, senior stakeholders, change managers, and anyone responsible for managing multiple initiatives.
Do I need prior project or programme management experience?
No, the course is designed for both beginners and experienced practitioners.
How long does the exam take, and what is the pass mark?
The exam is 40 minutes long, consisting of 50 multiple-choice questions. The pass mark is 50%.
Is the exam included in the course?
Yes — all delivery formats include the official MoP Foundation exam.
Can I study at my own pace?
Yes — the eLearning route provides 12 months’ access to allow flexible learning.
What support is available during the course?
Full tutor support, mock exams, study guides, and interactive resources are provided throughout.
Is the MoP Foundation recognised globally?
Yes — MoP is a globally recognised framework for portfolio management in organisations.
The Management of Portfolios (MoP®) Practitioner course builds on the Foundation level and equips professionals with the practical skills to apply MoP principles, practices and techniques within a real organisational environment. Designed for portfolio managers, programme managers, project managers, PMO leaders and strategic decision-makers, this course focuses on turning strategy into successful delivery by aligning investment, resources and change initiatives with organisational priorities.
This training provides a comprehensive, applied understanding of how to implement portfolio management to optimise value, improve decision-making, enhance risk control and strengthen organisational governance. You will learn how to use MoP guidance to evaluate business cases, prioritise initiatives, balance capacity, manage interdependencies and ensure consistent oversight of change portfolios.
The course includes realistic scenarios, exercises and practical application of MoP tools, giving you the confidence to use MoP methods in your own organisation. You will explore portfolio definitions, delivery cycles, governance structures, organisational energy, stakeholder engagement and best-practice approaches for creating a sustainable portfolio management framework.
Completing this course prepares you for the MoP® Practitioner exam and provides the practical insight required to support executives, boards and PMOs in shaping a balanced, strategically aligned and value-driven change portfolio.
What’s Included
Accredited MoP® Practitioner training
Official MoP® Practitioner exam
Portfolio management scenarios and practical exercises
Exam preparation and sample papers
MoP® Practitioner digital course materials
Tutor support from ILX-accredited instructors
Certificate upon passing the Practitioner exam
Delivery Options & Pricing
There is no eLearning option for MoP Practitioner. Training is delivered exclusively by ILX-accredited tutors in Virtual Classroom or In-Person formats.
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors – From £1,143.75
Real-time instructor-led training
Interactive discussions and scenario-based learning
Exam preparation included
Digital course materials provided
Ideal for remote learners who need structured support
In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited – From £1,542.75
Face-to-face training with ILX practitioners
Group exercises, case-study applications and facilitated workshops
Full MoP course pack and exam preparation
Suitable for organisations wanting on-site or team-based delivery
All options fully prepare you for the MoP® Practitioner certification exam.
How to analyse portfolio information to support strategic decision-making
How to evaluate and prioritise programmes and projects
How to balance organisational capacity, resources and risk
How to design, implement and maintain portfolio governance
How to apply MoP® tools across portfolio definition and delivery cycles
How to support senior leaders, PMOs and boards with portfolio insights
The knowledge and application skills needed to pass the MoP Practitioner exam
Key Facts
Certification level: MoP® Practitioner
Prerequisite: MoP® Foundation (required)
Exam format: Objective testing, open-book (MoP manual only), 2.5 hours
Audience: Portfolio managers, PMO leaders, programme managers, senior managers, change leaders
Accreditation: PeopleCert / Axelos
Delivery: Virtual Classroom or In-Person only
Provider: drtutor (partnered with ILX for tutor-led delivery)
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Do I need MoP Foundation before taking Practitioner?
Yes. You must hold the MoP® Foundation certification before sitting the Practitioner exam.
Is this course available as eLearning?
No. MoP Practitioner is delivered only by ILX tutors via Virtual Classroom or In-Person.
Does this course include the exam?
Yes. The official MoP® Practitioner exam is included.
Is the MoP manual required?
Yes. The exam is open-book using the official MoP manual.
Will this help me work in a PMO or strategic role?
Yes. MoP Practitioner develops practical portfolio management skills used in PMOs, strategy, governance and executive-level environments.
Do I get a certificate?
Yes — after passing the Practitioner exam, you will receive the official MoP® Practitioner certification.
The Management of Portfolios (MoP®) Foundation & Practitioner Combined course provides a complete, end-to-end learning pathway for professionals responsible for aligning change initiatives with organisational strategy. This comprehensive programme covers both the MoP Foundation and Practitioner levels, giving you the knowledge, practical skills and confidence to apply portfolio management effectively in real organisational environments.
The course explores how portfolio management enables organisations to make informed investment decisions, prioritise initiatives, optimise resource allocation and ensure that change activity delivers maximum value. You will learn the MoP Principles, Practices and key techniques, and then apply them through scenario-based learning to develop real-world capability in supporting executives, PMOs, programme managers and strategic leaders.
Throughout the training you will examine portfolio definition and delivery cycles, governance structures, strategic alignment techniques, organisational energy, risk management, dependency mapping, benefits management and decision-support processes. This combined course prepares you for both MoP® Foundation and MoP® Practitioner exams, ensuring you can understand, apply and tailor portfolio management guidance in your organisation.
This is the ideal route for anyone seeking full MoP certification in one structured, cost-effective programme that moves from theory to applied practice.
What’s Included
Accredited MoP® Foundation training
Accredited MoP® Practitioner training
Official MoP® Foundation exam
Official MoP® Practitioner exam
Digital MoP® course materials
Portfolio management scenarios and exercises
Mock exam questions and exam preparation
Tutor support throughout the course
Certificate upon passing both exams
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – ILX Accredited – From £2,700
Real-time training delivered by ILX-accredited tutors
Covers both Foundation and Practitioner
Interactive discussions, case studies and scenario-based exercises
Comprehensive exam preparation for both levels
Digital course pack and all required materials included
Ideal for remote learners wanting structured guidance
In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited – From £4000
Face-to-face training with ILX instructors
Group exercises, guided application of MoP tools and practical workshops
Foundation and Practitioner exam preparation included
Printed materials provided
Ideal for teams or organisations seeking dedicated on-site delivery
All delivery options fully prepare you for both MoP Foundation and MoP Practitioner certification exams.
Understanding the key concepts, terms and principles of MoP®
Applying MoP principles, practices and techniques in real scenarios
Aligning programmes and projects with strategic organisational objectives
Evaluating and prioritising investments across a portfolio
Analysing risk, capacity, resources and interdependencies
Designing and implementing effective portfolio governance
Supporting senior leaders and PMOs with decision-support information
Applying MoP guidance across portfolio definition and delivery cycles
The practical competence required to pass both MoP® Foundation and Practitioner exams
Key Facts
Certification: MoP® Foundation + MoP® Practitioner
Accreditation: PeopleCert / Axelos
Prerequisite for Practitioner: MoP® Foundation
Exam method: Online with remote proctor
Exam type: Multiple-choice (Foundation) and Objective Testing (Practitioner)
Study format: Virtual Classroom or In-Person/ Tutor support
Provider: ILX-accredited tutor-led components
FAQ
Is this course suitable for beginners?
Yes. It starts at Foundation level and builds up to Practitioner, making it suitable for those new to portfolio management.
Are both exams included?
Yes. The combined package includes both MoP Foundation and MoP Practitioner exams.
Do I need the MoP manual?
Yes. The Practitioner exam is open-book using the official MoP manual.
Can I take Practitioner without Foundation?
No. You must pass the Foundation exam before attempting Practitioner.
Is the content identical across delivery methods?
Yes. All formats cover the full MoP syllabus, including principles, practices and application.
Does this qualification help with PMO or strategic roles?
Absolutely. MoP skills are highly valued in PMOs, governance boards, strategy teams and senior management environments.
The Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®) certification is one of the most prestigious and globally recognised credentials for senior business analysis professionals. Issued by the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA®), CBAP® validates advanced knowledge, extensive practical experience, and professional competence in business analysis practices aligned to the BABOK® Guide Version 3.
This course is designed for experienced Business Analysts and professionals working in senior, strategic, or leadership roles who are responsible for identifying complex business needs, defining high-value requirements, and delivering solutions that drive measurable organisational outcomes. It provides in-depth coverage of the six BABOK® knowledge areas, enabling learners to apply structured, best-practice approaches to requirements management, stakeholder engagement, solution evaluation, and business value delivery.
Through a combination of expert-led content, real-world case studies, and practical examples, this CBAP® training strengthens your ability to operate confidently at an enterprise level. You will deepen your understanding of how business analysis supports strategy, governance, change initiatives, and continuous improvement across a wide range of industries, including finance, technology, public sector, healthcare, and professional services.
Completing this course supports progression into senior business analysis roles and prepares you for the CBAP® certification exam, helping you demonstrate credibility, leadership capability, and strategic insight. CBAP®-qualified professionals are highly sought after and typically trusted with complex initiatives, cross-functional programmes, and decision-making responsibilities that directly influence organisational success.
What’s Included
- Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®) eLearning course
- Approximately 14 hours of structured online study
- 12-month self-paced eLearning licence
- Coverage of all six BABOK® Guide Version 3 knowledge areas
- 50 industry-recognised business analysis tools and techniques
- 11 real-world business case studies
- Three full CBAP simulation test papers for self-assessment
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
This self-paced eLearning course allows learners to study flexibly over a 12-month period. The programme is aligned to IIBA standards and supports experienced professionals preparing for the CBAP exam. Ongoing academic support is provided through ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £450.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £37.50 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will master the Business Analysis Core Concept Model.
Learners will understand and apply all six BABOK® Guide Version 3 knowledge areas.
Learners will apply over 50 business analysis tools and techniques.
Learners will analyse business needs and recommend high-value solutions.
Learners will strengthen stakeholder collaboration and communication.
Learners will evaluate solutions and measure business value delivery.
Learners will gain confidence to operate at senior and strategic levels.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced
- Study Time: Approximately 14 hours
- Access Period: 12 months
- Delivery Method: eLearning
- Certification: Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®)
- Awarding Body: IIBA®
Who It’s For
This course is designed for experienced Business Analysts with significant practical experience, Senior Business Analysts, Project Managers, Product Managers, Consultants, and professionals working in requirements analysis, systems analysis, and process improvement roles.
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites to take this training course. However, formal eligibility requirements must be met before applying for the CBAP exam through IIBA.
Exam Information
- Exam Name: Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®)
- Certification Body: International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA®)
- Exam Duration: 3.5 hours (210 minutes)
- Number of Questions: 120 multiple-choice questions
- Question Type: Scenario-based multiple choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: Not published by IIBA® (scaled scoring model)
- Delivery Method: Online exam delivered by IIBA® via remote proctoring
- Exam Availability: Scheduled directly through IIBA® after eligibility approval
- Exam Included: No – the exam fee is paid separately to IIBA
Pre-Course Requirements
There is no mandatory pre-course work. This course assumes prior professional experience in business analysis.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the CBAP certification?
CBAP is an advanced professional certification awarded by IIBA that recognises senior-level expertise in business analysis practices and leadership.
Is the CBAP exam included in this course?
No. The exam must be booked separately through IIBA once eligibility requirements are met.
How long do I have access to the course?
You receive a 12-month eLearning licence from the date of enrolment.
How much study time is required?
The course contains approximately 14 hours of structured learning, excluding additional revision and practice exams.
Who issues the CBAP certification?
The certification is issued by the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA®).
What experience do I need to sit the CBAP exam?
You must have at least 7,500 hours of business analysis work experience over the last 10 years, including 900 hours in four of the six BABOK® knowledge areas.
Are professional development hours required?
Yes. A minimum of 35 hours of professional development within the last four years is required.
Does this course cover the BABOK® Guide Version 3?
Yes. The entire course is aligned to BABOK® Guide Version 3.
Is this course suitable for beginners?
No. This course is designed for experienced professionals operating at senior or strategic levels.
What roles does CBAP help with?
CBAP supports progression into Senior Business Analyst, Lead Analyst, Product Manager, Programme Manager, Strategy Consultant, and Business Architect roles.
Is the certification internationally recognised?
Yes. CBAP is recognised globally across multiple industries and sectors.
Can I study alongside full-time work?
Yes. The self-paced eLearning format is designed for working professionals.
Does CBAP improve career progression?
Yes. CBAP holders are often trusted with higher-impact initiatives, leadership responsibilities, and strategic decision-making roles.
What salary can CBAP-qualified professionals earn?
In the UK, CBAP-certified professionals typically earn between £65,000 and £90,000 per year, with senior and consulting roles exceeding £100,000, depending on experience and sector.
Is this course accredited?
The training is aligned with IIBA standards and supports CBAP exam preparation but does not itself award the certification.
Does the CBAP certification expire?
Yes. CBAP holders must maintain certification through IIBA’s Continuing Development Requirements (CDR) programme.
The Business Analysis Business Analyst Learning Path is a comprehensive, career-focused programme designed to develop end-to-end business analysis capability using industry-relevant tools, methodologies, and real-world case studies. Delivered exclusively by ILX, this learning path is ideal for individuals seeking to enter the business analysis profession or progress into more advanced, data-driven analyst roles within modern organisations.
This programme provides structured exposure to core business analysis principles alongside practical data analytics, Agile methodologies, and advanced analytical techniques. Learners gain hands-on experience with widely used tools such as Excel, Tableau, Python, SQL, R, and Agile Scrum frameworks, enabling them to analyse complex data, support business decision-making, and contribute effectively to organisational change initiatives.
The learning path combines expert-led instruction, self-paced eLearning, applied projects, and industry case studies developed in collaboration with leading global organisations. It supports the development of analytical thinking, stakeholder engagement, requirements management, and data-driven insight generation, preparing learners to operate confidently in business, technology, and transformation environments.
With 12 months’ access to structured learning content and practical exercises, this programme equips learners with in-demand business analysis skills that align with current employer expectations across sectors including finance, technology, consulting, healthcare, and public services.
What’s Included
Twelve months’ access to the complete Business Analyst Learning Path eLearning programme.
Certified Business Analysis Professional CBAP® course content.
Tableau training for data visualisation and dashboard development.
Data analysis and visualisation with Python.
Mathematical optimisation for business problems.
Business Analyst capstone project.
Harvard Business Publishing case studies for business analysis.
Elective modules including Agile Scrum Master, CCBA®, SQL training, data science with R, and business analytics with Excel.
Practical projects, assessments, and applied learning activities.
Course completion certificate upon meeting the required criteria.
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX
This programme is delivered as self-paced online training with 12 months’ access to all course content. Learners can study at their own pace, complete practical projects, and build a portfolio of applied business analysis skills.
Price: £1,250.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £104.17 + VAT per month, subject to finance availability
Learners will develop the ability to apply structured business analysis frameworks to identify organisational needs and recommend effective solutions.
Learners will gain practical expertise in analysing data using Excel, Tableau, Python, R, and SQL to support evidence-based decision-making.
Learners will understand Agile and Scrum methodologies and how they are applied within business analysis and project environments.
Learners will build competency in requirements elicitation, stakeholder management, and business analysis planning.
Learners will develop confidence in translating data insights into actionable business recommendations.
Learners will complete real-world projects and case studies that demonstrate applied business analysis capability.
Facts
- Course Level: Professional learning path.
- Duration: 12-month access.
- Study Time: Approximately 14 hours plus applied projects and electives.
- Delivery Method: eLearning only.
- Certification: Skills and knowledge-based programme with course completion certificate.
- Exam: No single formal exam included.
Who It’s For
This learning path is suitable for graduates, early-career professionals, and career-changers seeking to build practical business analysis and data analytics skills. It is also appropriate for professionals in business, IT, operations, or project roles who want to strengthen analytical capability and transition into business analysis responsibilities.
Exam Information
This learning path does not have a single, overarching exam. Instead, learners are assessed across individual courses and projects as follows:
-
Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®): Learners must complete at least 85% of the online self-paced learning or attend one live virtual classroom batch, complete one project, and pass one assessment with a score of at least 60%. Formal CBAP® exam registration is separate via IIBA, requiring eligibility criteria.
-
Tableau Training: Learners complete at least 85% of the course and a project-based assessment to demonstrate dashboard creation and data visualisation skills.
-
Data Analysis and Visualisation with Python: Completion of at least 85% of the online course is required, with practical exercises assessed.
-
Mathematical Optimisation for Business Problems: At least 85% of the course must be completed, with project exercises used for assessment.
-
Business Analyst Capstone Project: Learners attend one LVC batch and complete a real-world project demonstrating applied business analysis skills.
-
Harvard Business Publishing Case Studies: Learners complete one LVC batch and submit analysis of case studies for assessment.
-
Elective Courses (Agile Scrum Master, CCBA®, SQL, R, Excel): Assessment varies by course, typically requiring completion of exercises or projects.
Learners receive a course completion certificate for the learning path after meeting the above criteria across all modules. Individual certifications (e.g., CBAP®) are obtained by fulfilling external exam and eligibility requirements where applicable.
Note: There is no single formal certification exam associated with this learning path. Learners receive a course completion certificate upon meeting defined completion and assessment criteria across the included modules. Some individual courses within the programme may align to external certification pathways, which are pursued separately if eligibility requirements are met.
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no mandatory prerequisites for enrolling in this learning path. Prior exposure to business processes, data analysis, or project environments is beneficial but not required.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Business Analysis Business Analyst Learning Path?
It is a structured eLearning programme that develops business analysis, data analytics, and Agile skills through multiple integrated courses and practical projects.
How long do I have access to the course?
You will have 12 months’ access to all learning materials from the date of enrolment.
Is this course suitable for beginners?
Yes. The learning path starts with foundational concepts and progressively builds advanced skills, making it suitable for beginners and career-changers.
Is there a formal certification included?
There is no single formal certification exam included, but learners receive a course completion certificate and gain training aligned to recognised industry standards.
Can this course help me become a Business Analyst?
Yes. The learning path develops the core skills, tools, and methodologies required for Business Analyst roles across multiple industries.
What tools will I learn during the programme?
You will gain experience with Excel, Tableau, Python, SQL, R, Agile Scrum frameworks, and supporting analytical libraries and tools.
Is the training self-paced?
Yes. The programme is delivered entirely as self-paced eLearning, allowing you to study around work and personal commitments.
Does this course include real-world projects?
Yes. The learning path includes applied projects, case studies, and a capstone project designed to reflect real business scenarios.
What industries is this course relevant to?
The skills taught are applicable across finance, technology, consulting, healthcare, retail, public sector, and professional services.
Will this course help with career progression?
Yes. The programme strengthens analytical capability, decision-making skills, and technical knowledge valued by employers.
What salary can a Business Analyst expect in the UK?
In the UK, Business Analysts typically earn between £40,000 and £65,000 per year, with senior and specialist roles exceeding £70,000 depending on experience and sector.
Does this course guarantee a job?
No course can guarantee employment, but this learning path significantly improves job readiness and employability.
Are there any live sessions included?
This delivery option focuses on eLearning. Some modules reference live virtual components conceptually, but the programme is completed online.
Can I study while working full-time?
Yes. The self-paced structure is designed to support learners studying alongside full-time employment.
Is financial instalment payment available?
Yes. Monthly payment options are available, subject to finance approval.
The Business Analysis Applied Business Architecture course is a three-day live virtual classroom programme designed to equip professionals with practical skills in business architecture, bridging strategy and operational execution to align organisational goals. Delivered exclusively by ILX, this course is endorsed by the International Institute of Business Analysis™ (IIBA®) and provides 24 PD Hours/CDUs, making it suitable for career advancement in enterprise and strategic architecture roles.
This immersive course focuses on the application of business architecture frameworks and techniques to translate organisational strategy into operational capability. Participants will learn how to create business motivation models, business capability models, and business model canvases, and use capability-based planning to shape and operationalise strategy effectively. By exploring stakeholder engagement, value mapping, and strategic analysis, learners develop a comprehensive understanding of how business architecture can drive organisational performance and support transformative change.
Through storytelling, visualisations, and hands-on case study exercises, participants gain practical experience in applying business architecture concepts to real-world scenarios. The course emphasises critical thinking, design thinking, and architectural thinking, allowing professionals to present strategic recommendations confidently to executive audiences and support the successful delivery of organisational change initiatives.
This course is highly suitable for CXOs, strategists, planners, department heads, chief architects, enterprise architects, program architects, program managers, and change managers seeking to strengthen their expertise in aligning strategy with execution. Participants will leave with actionable skills to implement business architecture frameworks, optimise value delivery, and provide strategic advice that drives measurable business outcomes.
What’s Included
- Three days of instructor-led training delivered in a live virtual classroom environment.
- Comprehensive course materials covering all concepts, techniques, and exercises.
- Access to practical case studies for applied learning.
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
This immersive learning experience is delivered entirely online, providing the interaction and guidance of an in-person classroom without the need for travel.
Price: £2,990.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £249.17 + VAT per month, subject to finance availability
Learners will acquire the ability to create business motivation models and business model canvases to conceptualise and structure strategic thinking.
Learners will understand how to develop business capability models and use capability-based planning to operationalise strategy effectively.
Learners will gain knowledge of stakeholder identification and engagement techniques to address concerns and optimise collaboration.
Learners will develop skills in value mapping, analysing value disciplines, value chains, and creating compelling value propositions.
Learners will understand capability mapping, strategic analysis, and methods for identifying organisational strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.
Learners will learn how to present strategic narratives to executives using business modelling, storytelling, and visualisation techniques.
Learners will gain practical experience through case studies, applying business architecture theory to real-world organisational challenges.
Facts
- Course Level: Professional learning programme.
- Duration: 3 Days.
- Delivery Method: Live virtual classroom.
- Certification: Skills and knowledge-based, endorsed by IIBA™, 24 PD Hours/CDUs.
- Exam: No exam associated with this course.
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for CXOs, strategists, planners, department heads, chief architects, enterprise architects, program architects, program managers, and change managers seeking practical skills in business architecture. It is suitable for professionals responsible for aligning strategy with execution to improve organisational performance.
Prerequisites
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. Knowledge of business fundamentals and TOGAF® frameworks is advantageous but not required.
Exam Information
There is no formal exam for this course. Participants receive a certificate of completion endorsed by IIBA™ and eligible for 24 PD Hours/CDUs.
Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required. Learners are encouraged to bring prior organisational or strategic experience to maximise engagement and application.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is business architecture?
Business architecture is a discipline that aligns organisational strategies with operational frameworks by mapping processes, value streams, capabilities, and goals, creating a cohesive structure to drive efficiency and strategic decision-making.
How will this course support my career progression?
This course provides practical tools to implement business architecture frameworks, enabling professionals to align strategy with operations, optimise value delivery, and provide strategic advice, positioning them for leadership and strategic roles.
Is this course suitable for beginners?
While no formal prerequisites are required, familiarity with business fundamentals enhances comprehension. The course is designed to support professionals at various levels seeking practical skills in business architecture.
How is the course delivered?
This course is delivered as a live virtual classroom, combining interactive lectures, hands-on exercises, and case study analysis. Participants experience the engagement of a traditional classroom with the convenience of online delivery.
What tools or frameworks will I learn?
Learners will work with business motivation models, business capability models, business model canvases, and techniques for stakeholder engagement, value mapping, capability mapping, and strategic analysis.
How many PD Hours or CDUs will I earn?
This course is eligible for 24 PD Hours/CDUs endorsed by IIBA™.
Does this course include practical exercises?
Yes, practical exercises and case studies are integrated throughout to reinforce learning and application of business architecture concepts.
Can this course help me with strategic decision-making?
Yes, learners will gain skills to analyse organisational strategy, map capabilities, optimise value streams, and present recommendations to executive audiences.
Who is this course ideal for?
CXOs, strategists, planners, department heads, chief architects, enterprise architects, program architects, program managers, and change managers.
Do I need any prior business architecture knowledge?
Prior knowledge is not required, but experience with organisational strategy or frameworks like TOGAF® is beneficial.
Is there a certificate provided?
Yes, a certificate of completion is awarded, endorsed by IIBA™, eligible for 24 PD Hours/CDUs.
What is the price of the course?
The course is priced at £2,990.00 + VAT, with an optional finance plan of £249.17 + VAT per month.
How long is the course?
The course is delivered over three full days of intensive skills-based training.
Is travel required for the course?
No, the live virtual classroom format allows full participation online.
Can this course help improve my organisational influence?
Yes, the skills gained enable participants to align strategy and operations, communicate effectively with stakeholders, and influence decision-making at senior levels.
What outcomes can I expect after the course?
Participants will leave with practical skills in business architecture, strategic analysis, value mapping, and stakeholder engagement, ready to implement frameworks that support organisational change.
Will this course impact my earning potential?
Professionals with business architecture expertise can expect enhanced career prospects, with UK salaries typically ranging from £60,000 to £90,000 per year depending on role, seniority, and sector.
Are there any optional modules?
No optional extras are provided for this course.
Do I need to complete pre-course work?
No pre-course preparation is required.
The APMG International Change Management Foundation course provides a comprehensive introduction to organisational change principles and practices. This globally recognised certification equips professionals with the knowledge and skills necessary to support, implement, and manage change initiatives effectively across different organisational environments.
Designed for individuals responsible for facilitating change, including Change Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, HR professionals, and team leaders, this course focuses on understanding both the organisational context and human responses to change. You will learn practical techniques to identify resistance, engage stakeholders, communicate effectively, and support individuals through transition periods.
The course emphasises the importance of aligning change initiatives with organisational culture, goals, and strategies. Participants gain insights into the roles and responsibilities of Change Managers, including coordinating with change sponsors and teams, assessing change impacts, and ensuring initiatives achieve their desired outcomes. By completing this Foundation course, professionals can enhance organisational capability, foster collaboration, and create the groundwork for successful and sustainable change.
What’s Included
Accredited APMG International Change Management Foundation trainingAPMG International Change Management Foundation exam
Official Change Management v3 study guide (digital version included with all study options; hardcopy included with classroom and live virtual classroom)
Tutor support throughout the course
Optional extras including Pass Protect exam insurance and hardcopy study guide for eLearning option.
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced accredited online training with 12-month licence, approximately 10–12 hours of study. Includes digital Change Management v3 study guide and exam voucher.
Price: £910.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £75.83 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Three-day immersive online classroom with interactive workshops, practical exercises, and live tutor support.
Price: £2020.00 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Three-day in-person training with lectures, scenario-based exercises, and group discussions. Hardcopy study guide included. Price: £2130.00 + VAT.
Understand the organisational context, culture, and goals of change initiatives
Recognise and manage human responses to change, minimising negative impacts
Differentiate between valid concerns and resistance to change
Propose appropriate solutions in response to concerns and resistance
Support change sponsors, leaders, and agents effectively
Develop stakeholder engagement and communication strategies
Assess change impacts, severity, and progress collaboratively with colleagues
Apply change management principles to real-world organisational scenarios
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Course Duration: 12-month licence for eLearning; 3 days for classroom/virtual options
- Delivery Method: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
- Certification: APMG International Change Management Foundation
- Awarding Body: APMG International
Who It’s For
Change Leaders, Change Managers, Organisational Development Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, HR professionals, team leaders, and anyone involved in supporting or implementing organisational change initiatives
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course
Exam Information
- Multiple choice exam
- 50 questions, split into four sections
- Duration: 40 minutes
- Closed book
- Pass mark: 50%
Optional Extras
Pass Protect exam insuranceHardcopy of official Change Management v3 study guide for eLearning learners
Pre-course Requirements
Mandatory online pre-course for live virtual classroom delivery.Frequently Asked Questions
How is the Change Management Foundation course delivered?
Available via eLearning, live virtual classroom, and in-person classroom. eLearning takes approximately 10–12 hours, while classroom options are delivered over three days.
Who is the Change Management Foundation course for?
Ideal for professionals involved in organisational change initiatives, including Project Managers, team leaders, HR professionals, and anyone seeking to improve their understanding of change processes.
How do I access my digital study guide?
Upon purchasing the course, you will receive an email to redeem your exam voucher on the APMG portal, which grants access to the digital Change Management v3 study guide.
What happens if I fail my exam?
You may re-take the exam for a fee. Pass Protect allows you to re-sit at a reduced cost if purchased alongside your initial course.
Can I purchase a hardcopy of the study guide?
Hardcopy is included with classroom and live virtual classroom options. eLearning learners can add it as an optional extra.
Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, the APMG Foundation certification is recognised globally as a standard for change management competence.
Do I need prior experience in change management?
No formal experience is required, but familiarity with organisational processes and project management is beneficial.
How long is the eLearning licence valid?
The eLearning licence provides 12 months of access to training materials and exercises.
Does the course include tutor support?
Yes, tutor support is provided for all study options to guide learning and answer questions.
What roles will this course help me in?
Supports Change Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, HR professionals, team leaders, and business leaders responsible for change.
How will this course benefit my career?
Provides internationally recognised certification and equips you with practical skills to support and implement organisational change effectively.
Can the skills learned be applied in Agile or hybrid projects?
Yes, principles are applicable across various methodologies, including Agile, traditional, and hybrid environments.
Is the study guide included in the course fee?
Digital version included with all options; hardcopy included with classroom and live virtual classroom. Optional for eLearning.
What is the pass mark for the exam?
50% of the total marks (25/50).
Are there pre-course requirements for eLearning?
No mandatory pre-course work for eLearning.
The APMG International Change Management Practitioner course is an advanced, globally recognised certification that equips professionals with the skills and knowledge required to lead and implement organisational change effectively. Building on foundational change management principles, this Practitioner course focuses on the practical application of structured methodologies, helping change leaders, managers, and organisational development professionals drive successful transformation initiatives.
This course is designed for individuals responsible for delivering organisational change programmes, including Change Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, and other change support staff. Participants will learn how to identify the learning needs of individuals, provide feedback that supports progress, and use coaching techniques to guide leaders at all levels. The course also emphasises conflict resolution, sustaining change, embedding new behaviours, and facilitating collaboration across teams.
Throughout the course, learners will gain hands-on experience in applying change management principles to real-world scenarios. By the end of the programme, participants will be able to establish a clear framework for implementing change, manage stakeholder expectations, address resistance, and ensure the benefits of change are realised long-term. This comprehensive training enables professionals to strengthen organisational capability, foster a culture of continuous improvement, and become highly effective change leaders.
What’s Included
Accredited APMG International Change Management Practitioner trainingAPMG International Change Management Practitioner exam
Tutor support throughout the course
Optional extras including official study guide and Pass Protect exam insurance.
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, accredited online training with a 12-month licence, allowing learners to study flexibly and access practical exercises and case studies aligned with the Practitioner exam.
Price: £1040.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £86.67 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Two-day immersive training delivered online with interactive workshops, practical exercises, and live tutor guidance.
Price: £2020.00 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Two-day in-person immersive accredited training, combining lectures, group work, and scenario-based exercises.
Price: £2130.00 + VAT
Identify the learning needs of individuals impacted by change initiatives
Provide constructive feedback to support development and progression through change
Apply coaching techniques to guide leaders and managers at all levels
Recognise and resolve conflict during change processes
Facilitate group collaboration and co-design for successful change implementation
Develop strategies to embed and sustain organisational change over the long term
Apply structured change management methodologies to real-world scenarios
Strengthen stakeholder engagement and collaboration throughout change initiatives
Facts
- Course Level: Practitioner / Advanced
- Course Duration: 12-month licence for eLearning; 2-day classroom/virtual options
- Delivery Method: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
- Certification: APMG International Change Management Practitioner
- Awarding Body: APMG International
Who It’s For
Change Leaders, Change Managers, Organisational Development Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, and associated support staff responsible for implementing or managing organisational change initiatives.Prerequisites
Passing the APMG Change Management Foundation exam is required before enrolling in the Practitioner course.Exam Information
- Objective testing based on a case study scenario
- Five sections, 16 marks each, total 80 marks
- Duration: 2.5 hours
- Open book (official Change Management v3 study guide only)
- Pass mark: 50% (40/80)
Optional Extras
Official Change Management v3 study guidePass Protect exam insurance
Pre-course Requirements
Mandatory online pre-course is required for those selecting the live virtual classroom delivery option.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Change Management Practitioner course?
It is an advanced, accredited course by APMG International, designed to develop practical skills for managing and embedding organisational change successfully.
Do I need to complete the Foundation course first?
Yes. Completion of the Change Management Foundation certification is a prerequisite for Practitioner.
How will this course help me manage conflict during change initiatives?
You will learn to recognise sources of conflict, apply resolution techniques, and facilitate communication to maintain alignment and progress.
What does the Practitioner exam involve?
The exam uses objective testing based on a case study, with five sections worth 16 marks each, completed over 2.5 hours. You may use the official Change Management v3 study guide.
How do I apply for reasonable adjustments for the exam?
Applications for adjustments must be submitted directly to ILX at the time of exam scheduling, ideally with at least 15 working days’ notice.
Can I study this course online?
Yes, eLearning and live virtual classroom options are available, both supported by ILX and DrTutor.
Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, APMG certifications are recognised globally and demonstrate competence in professional change management practices.
How long is the eLearning licence valid?
The eLearning licence provides 12 months of access to the training materials and exercises.
Does this course include tutor support?
Yes, tutor support is provided for all delivery formats to answer questions and guide learning.
What career roles does this course support?
Change Managers, Programme Managers, Project Managers, Portfolio Managers, Organisational Development Managers, and consultants leading change initiatives.
How will this course benefit my career?
It equips you with recognised, practical skills to lead change, manage resistance, improve stakeholder engagement, and embed sustainable organisational improvements.
Are there pre-course requirements for eLearning?
No mandatory pre-course work is required for the eLearning option.
Can the skills learned be applied in Agile environments?
Yes, the course content is applicable to various change management methodologies, including Agile, traditional, and hybrid approaches.
Does the course provide certification upon completion?
Yes, successful completion of the exam awards the APMG International Change Management Practitioner certification.
What is the pass mark for the Practitioner exam?
The pass mark is 50% of the total marks (40 out of 80).
Is the study guide included in the course fee?
No, the official Change Management v3 study guide is available as an optional extra.
The APMG International Change Management™ Foundation & Practitioner course is a five-day live virtual classroom programme designed to equip professionals with comprehensive knowledge, frameworks, and practical techniques to lead successful organisational change. Delivered exclusively by ILX, this course provides immersive, skills-based training and combines both Foundation and Practitioner levels, ensuring participants can not only understand change management principles but also apply them effectively to real-world organisational scenarios.
This course addresses the growing need for skilled change managers who can guide organisations through complex transitions, overcome resistance, and implement strategic initiatives that drive measurable outcomes. Participants will explore stakeholder engagement, organisational culture, communication strategies, and facilitation techniques while mastering the application of change management frameworks to achieve sustainable improvements. By the end of the course, learners will be capable of planning, implementing, and embedding change initiatives that align with organisational objectives and enhance business performance.
The Foundation level equips participants with the essential knowledge of change management principles, organisational context, human responses to change, and stakeholder management strategies. The Practitioner level builds on this foundation by enabling learners to apply objective testing and case study analysis to manage complex change initiatives. This combination ensures professionals gain both theoretical understanding and practical experience, making them highly effective change leaders within their organisations.
What’s Included
Accredited APMG International Change Management Foundation & Practitioner training delivered in a live virtual classroom.
Official Change Management v3 study guide (optional for eLearning, included with LVC).
Foundation and Practitioner exams included.
Tutor support throughout the course.
Further optional extras, including Pass Protect exam insurance.
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
This immersive online delivery provides the engagement of a classroom environment with the flexibility of virtual learning.
Price: £3,410.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £284.17 + VAT per month subject to availability
eLearning – Delivered by ILX
Self-paced accredited online training with access for 12 months. This option includes all course materials and ILX support.
Price: £1,760.00 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Instructor-led training in a traditional classroom setting over five days. Includes all course materials, tutor support, and exams.
Price: £3,635.00 + VAT.
Participants will develop the ability to identify organisational context, culture, and goals to tailor change initiatives effectively.
Participants will gain skills to recognise human responses to change, distinguish between valid concerns and resistance, and implement strategies to manage both.
Participants will learn to develop stakeholder engagement plans, create clear communication strategies, and promote teamwork to ensure successful change adoption.
Participants will master facilitation techniques for co-design, enabling productive collaboration and problem-solving during change initiatives.
Participants will gain expertise in measuring the impact of change, assessing progress, and applying coaching principles to empower change leaders.
Participants will understand how to sustain change by embedding new practices into organisational systems and processes.
Facts
- Course Level: Professional, accredited Foundation & Practitioner programme.
- Duration: 5 Days.
- Delivery Method: Live virtual classroom.
- Certification: APMG International Change Management™ Foundation & Practitioner.
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for Change Leaders, Change Managers, Organisational Development Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, and other professionals supporting or managing change initiatives.
Prerequisites
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. Completion of the Foundation exam is required before undertaking the Practitioner exam.
Exam Information
Foundation Exam
Format: Multiple-choice assessment
Number of questions: 50
Sections: Four
Duration: 40 minutes
Pass mark: 25 out of 50 (50%)
Closed book: Yes
Practitioner Exam
Format: Objective testing based on a case study scenario
Reference materials: Official Change Management v3 study guide allowed
Sections: Five
Marks per section: 16
Duration: Two and a half hours
Pass mark: 40 out of 80 (50%)
Pre-Course Requirements
Completion of mandatory online pre-course work is required for the live virtual classroom option to ensure participants are prepared for immersive training.
Optional Extras
The official Change Management v3 study guide (for eLearning only) and Pass Protect exam insurance are available.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is APMG International Change Management?
APMG International Change Management provides a globally recognised standard for change management practices, combining theoretical frameworks with practical application to ensure successful organisational change.
How long is the course?
The live virtual classroom delivery lasts five days, with the first three days covering the Foundation level and the final two days covering the Practitioner level.
What study options are available?
Participants can choose eLearning, live virtual classroom, blended learning, or classroom delivery, with eLearning access provided for 12 months.
How will this course help my career?
This course enhances your ability to manage and lead change initiatives, demonstrating globally recognised expertise that increases employability, influence, and career progression opportunities.
Do I need prior knowledge of change management?
No prior experience is required, though familiarity with organisational processes and project management may be beneficial.
What is included in the course fee?
Training, exams, tutor support, and course materials are included. The study guide is included for live virtual classroom courses and optional for eLearning.
How is the course delivered online?
The live virtual classroom provides interactive instructor-led sessions, practical exercises, and case study analyses, delivering the engagement of a physical classroom in an online environment.
Can I complete the Practitioner exam without passing Foundation?
No, you must pass the Foundation exam before attempting the Practitioner exam.
What is the format of the Foundation exam?
The Foundation exam is multiple-choice, 50 questions, 40 minutes, closed book, pass mark 50%.
What is the format of the Practitioner exam?
The Practitioner exam is objective testing based on a case study, five sections of 16 marks each, two and a half hours duration, open book using the official study guide, pass mark 50%.
How do I apply for reasonable adjustments for exams?
You must contact ILX during the exam scheduling process, providing at least 15 working days’ notice for reasonable adjustments.
Are there any pre-course requirements?
Mandatory online pre-course work is required for the live virtual classroom option.
Can I access the official study guide digitally?
Yes, the digital Change Management v3 study guide is available once your exam voucher is redeemed via the APMG portal.
What optional extras are available?
Pass Protect exam insurance and the official study guide for eLearning courses can be added at checkout.
How will this course improve my organisational impact?
Participants gain skills to plan, communicate, and implement change effectively, engage stakeholders, and embed new practices to sustain organisational improvement.
What are the typical career outcomes and salary expectations?
Professionals with APMG International Change Management certification often progress to senior roles such as Change Manager, Organisational Development Manager, or Programme Manager. UK salaries typically range from £50,000 to £80,000 per year depending on experience and seniority.
Is travel required for the course?
No, the live virtual classroom allows full participation online.
What practical skills will I gain?
Participants will develop stakeholder management, facilitation, coaching, communication planning, value assessment, and change sustainability skills.
How are exams scheduled?
Exams are scheduled via APMG once vouchers are redeemed. Participants can select their preferred date and time.
What is the total duration of learning for eLearning?
The eLearning course provides approximately 27 hours of content, accessible over 12 months.
The Agile Scrum Foundation course provides a structured and practical introduction to two of the most widely adopted delivery approaches in modern organisations: Agile methodologies and the Scrum framework. Designed for project teams, IT professionals, business analysts, product specialists and anyone working in fast-moving environments, this course explains how Agile and Scrum drive speed, collaboration and adaptive delivery across all industries.
You will learn the core values and principles of Agile, how iterative planning improves responsiveness, and how Scrum provides a clear, lightweight structure for delivering value through defined roles, ceremonies and artefacts. Using scenario-based explanations, examples and practical walkthroughs of the full Sprint lifecycle, this course shows not only what Agile and Scrum are, but how they work in real project environments to improve productivity, transparency and customer outcomes.
By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared to sit the Agile Scrum Foundation exam, equipped with the knowledge, terminology and confidence to contribute effectively to Agile teams and support Scrum-based delivery within your organisation.
What’s Included
Agile Scrum Foundation accredited training
Agile Scrum Foundation certification exam
Simulation exam papers for self-assessment
12-month access to the full online course
Self-paced digital learning – approx. 3 hours total study
Comprehensive Agile and Scrum reference materials
Progress tracking and knowledge checks
Mobile and desktop-friendly learning environment
Full support from drtutor learning team
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by drtutor
Self-paced online learning with 12 months’ access, full digital content, interactive modules, practice questions and exam preparation tools.
From £315.00 + VAT
(Was £650.00)
There is no ILX virtual classroom or in-person option for this course. Agile Scrum Foundation is delivered exclusively online.
Explain Agile values, principles and methodologies
Understand Scrum roles: Product Owner, Scrum Master, Development Team
Apply Scrum ceremonies: Sprint Planning, Daily Scrum, Sprint Review, Retrospective
Manage and refine backlogs, user stories and acceptance criteria
Track progress through iterative delivery cycles
Foster collaboration, transparency and continuous improvement
Use Agile and Scrum to drive productivity and accelerate value delivery
Prepare confidently for the Agile Scrum Foundation certification exam
Key Facts
Certification: Agile Scrum Foundation (ASF)
Accreditation: EXIN
Duration: Approximately 3 hours (self-paced)
Access Period: 12 months
Study Method: eLearning only
Exam Format: 40 questions, multiple choice, 60 minutes, 65% pass mark
Prerequisites: Familiarity with IT, IT service management or project environments is recommended but not required
Who It’s For
Project Managers, Scrum Masters, Product Owners, Business Analysts, IT professionals, developers, testers, architects, process coaches and anyone working within Agile or hybrid project environments.
FAQs
Can I take the Agile Scrum Foundation exam online?
Yes. The ASF exam is taken online via a remote proctor after you complete your eLearning.
How long do I have access to the online course?
You will have full access for 12 months, allowing you to study at your own pace.
How long does the course take to complete?
The course is designed to take approximately 3 hours, depending on your familiarity with Agile concepts.
What are the benefits of achieving ASF certification?
ASF certification validates your understanding of Agile and Scrum, enhances your professional credibility, improves your ability to work in dynamic teams and supports career progression in Agile delivery environments.
Is there any pre-course work?
No. This course requires no pre-study.
Does this course include any optional extras?
No optional extras are required or offered — everything needed for your certification readiness is included.
The Agile Business Consortium Scrum Product Owner course, accredited by APMG-International, provides a comprehensive and in-depth understanding of the Product Owner role within Agile and Scrum frameworks. Designed for individuals aiming to lead and manage the product development process, this course equips learners with the knowledge, practical skills, and strategic insights required to maximise product value and drive business success. Participants will develop the ability to define a clear product vision, prioritise tasks effectively, manage and refine the product backlog, and ensure alignment between stakeholder expectations and the development team’s deliverables. Through scenario-based learning and interactive exercises, learners will explore how to facilitate effective sprint planning and review sessions, maintain transparency, and foster collaboration within Agile teams. By completing this course, professionals demonstrate competence in one of the most in-demand Agile roles, enhancing career progression opportunities, boosting organisational productivity, and contributing to high-performing project delivery. This course is suitable for IT professionals, project managers, business analysts, and anyone aspiring to play a pivotal role in Agile product development and value delivery.
What’s Included
Accredited Scrum Product Owner training
Scrum Product Owner exam
Tutor support throughout the course
Official digital course materials
Optional extras such as Pass Protect exam insurance
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approximately 10 hours of online content, with exam included. Price: £703 + VAT or £58.58 + VAT per month
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Interactive online instructor-led sessions, two days, with exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation. Duration: as scheduled, exam included. Price: £2,055 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, two days, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Duration: as scheduled, exam included. Price: £2,165 + VAT
Understand core Scrum concepts, roles, events, and artifacts
Develop and communicate the product goal effectively
Create, prioritise, and manage product backlog items
Ensure product backlog transparency and visibility
Maximise value delivery in Agile projects
Facilitate sprint planning, review, and retrospective sessions
Collaborate effectively with stakeholders and development teams
Apply practical techniques to resolve product development challenges
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation / Practitioner
- Certification: Scrum Product Owner
- Duration: 10 hours (eLearning)
- Exam Duration: 50 minutes
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for individuals wishing to develop expertise as a Scrum Product Owner. It is suitable for IT professionals, project managers, business analysts, and team members seeking to maximise value delivery and ensure alignment between business objectives and development activities.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 50 minutes
- Number of Questions: 50
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Delivery Method: Closed book, exam included
Pre-Course Requirements
No prior certifications, qualifications, or pre-course work are required.
FAQ
1. What is a Scrum Product Owner?
A Scrum Product Owner is responsible for maximising the value of products by prioritising work and acting as a bridge between stakeholders and development teams.
2. What study options are available?
The course is available as eLearning, Classroom, and Live Virtual Classroom.
3. What is a product backlog in Scrum?
A product backlog is an organised list of features, improvements, and tasks required to deliver a product vision. Items are prioritised to maximise value.
4. Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes, the exam is included, with optional Pass Protect insurance available.
5. How long does the eLearning course take?
Approximately 10 hours, which can be completed at your own pace over 12 months.
6. Are there prerequisites for this course?
No formal prerequisites are required.
7. How does this course benefit my career?
It demonstrates professional competence in the Scrum Product Owner role, enhances career prospects, and is highly valued in Agile environments.
8. Can I apply the knowledge immediately in my workplace?
Yes, the course provides practical skills to manage backlogs, plan sprints, and facilitate stakeholder collaboration.
9. What certification will I receive?
Scrum Product Owner certification accredited by APMG-International.
10. How is the live virtual classroom delivered?
Through interactive instructor-led online sessions with exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance.
11. Is the course suitable for beginners?
Yes, the course is designed to be accessible for those new to Scrum and Agile methodologies.
12. What learning materials are provided?
Official digital course materials and tutor support are included.
13. Are workshops included in the classroom option?
Yes, scenario-based exercises and workshops are part of the in-person training.
14. How are product backlog items prioritised?
The Product Owner ranks items by value, business need, and stakeholder priorities.
15. Will this course prepare me for Agile project challenges?
Yes, it equips learners with techniques to address real-world challenges in Agile project delivery.
16. Can I retake the exam if needed?
Yes, with optional Pass Protect exam insurance, a resit can be arranged at reduced cost.
17. How do I manage stakeholder expectations in Scrum?
The course provides strategies to communicate product goals, priorities, and progress effectively.
18. Will I understand sprint planning and reviews?
Yes, the course covers facilitation of sprint planning, review, and retrospective sessions.
19. Is tutor support available throughout the course?
Yes, learners have full access to tutor guidance for the duration of their study.
20. Does this course help with team collaboration?
Absolutely, it emphasises communication, collaboration, and alignment between stakeholders and development teams.
The Agile Business Consortium Scrum Essentials course provides a comprehensive introduction to Agile principles and Scrum practices, designed for professionals seeking to develop practical skills to work effectively within a Scrum team. This accredited programme equips learners with the knowledge to understand Scrum roles, events, artifacts, and core principles, allowing them to contribute confidently to Agile projects. Participants will explore real-world scenarios, gaining the ability to apply Scrum pillars and empirical product planning techniques while collaborating effectively with stakeholders. Upon completion, learners will have a solid foundation in Scrum, enabling them to manage sprints, refine backlogs, and support continuous improvement initiatives. The course is suitable for individuals entering Scrum roles, those supporting Agile projects, or anyone aiming to enhance their organisation’s Agile capability. Certification validates practical knowledge and demonstrates the ability to apply Scrum methodology in professional environments, enhancing career prospects and providing a strong starting point for further Agile and Scrum qualifications.
What’s Included
- Accredited Scrum Essentials training
- Scrum Essentials exam
- Scrum Essentials official manual
- Tutor support
- Optional Pass Protect exam insurance
- Optional extras available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approx 10 hours, with exam included. Price: £698 + VAT or £58.17 + VAT/Month
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Interactive online instructor-led sessions with exercises, 1 day, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: as published by ILX
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, 1 day, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: as published by ILX.
Recall and apply key Scrum concepts, roles, events, artifacts, and guidelines
Understand self-management and cross-functional teams
Define and create high-value increments
Apply Scrum pillars through Scrum events
Write clear and concise Product Backlog items
Use empirical product planning techniques
Collaborate effectively with stakeholders
Manage and contribute to Scrum-based projects
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Certification: Scrum Essentials
- Duration: 1 day (Classroom), approx 10 hours (eLearning)
- Exam Duration: 50 minutes
- Number of Questions: 50
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom (1 day)
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for professionals seeking to build their competence within Scrum teams, individuals preparing to take on Scrum roles, project team members, business analysts, and anyone looking to understand Agile principles in practical, real-world settings. It is suitable for participants across industries who want to contribute effectively to Agile projects and enhance team collaboration.
Exam Information
Multiple choice, closed book, 50 questions, 50 minutes duration, 60% pass mark. Exam is included in the course price.
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no mandatory pre-course requirements. No prior Agile or Scrum experience is needed to attend this course.
FAQ
What is Scrum Essentials?
Scrum Essentials is a foundational course that teaches Agile principles and Scrum practices, providing knowledge of Scrum roles, events, artifacts, and guidelines.
Who should attend Scrum Essentials?
Anyone looking to contribute to a Scrum team, understand Agile practices, or manage Scrum-based projects can benefit from this course.
How long does the eLearning take?
The self-paced eLearning course takes approximately 10 hours to complete, with a 12-month licence period.
Is the exam included?
Yes, the Scrum Essentials exam is included in the course price for all learning methods.
What is Pass Protect?
Pass Protect is optional exam insurance that allows you to retake your exam at a reduced cost if your first attempt is unsuccessful.
Can I take the course online?
Yes, the course is available as eLearning or Live Virtual Classroom, providing flexibility to suit different learning preferences.
What are the delivery methods for Scrum Essentials?
The course is available as eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, and in-person Classroom.
Are there prerequisites?
No formal prerequisites are required for this course.
What will I learn about the Scrum team?
You will learn the roles, responsibilities, and interactions of a Scrum team and how to work effectively within it.
What is a Product Backlog?
A Product Backlog is an organised list of tasks, features, and improvements required to achieve the product goal. The Scrum Product Owner prioritises these items based on value and business needs.
How is this course accredited?
This course is accredited by the Agile Business Consortium and APMG International, ensuring it meets industry-recognised standards.
Will I receive a certificate?
Yes, successful participants receive the Scrum Essentials certificate upon passing the exam.
Can I apply what I learn immediately?
Yes, the course focuses on practical application, enabling you to contribute to Scrum-based projects immediately.
Does this course prepare me for advanced Agile certifications?
Yes, it provides a solid foundation for further certifications such as Scrum Product Owner or Agile Scrum Master.
How are the exam questions structured?
The exam consists of 50 multiple-choice questions, closed book, with a 60% pass mark.
Are workshops included in Classroom training?
Yes, in-person sessions include interactive workshops and scenario-based exercises.
Can I collaborate with other participants in Live Virtual Classroom?
Yes, sessions include exercises, discussions, and interactive activities to promote collaboration.
What optional extras are available?
Pass Protect exam insurance and additional official manuals are available at checkout.
The Agile Scrum Master (ASM) course is an EXIN-accredited programme designed to provide comprehensive, practical training for professionals seeking to lead Scrum teams effectively. This course empowers participants with the knowledge and skills to manage Agile projects, coordinate cross-functional teams, and deliver high-value products in functional stages. Through this training, learners will gain a deep understanding of Agile principles, Scrum terminology, roles and responsibilities, and the practical application of Scrum artifacts and processes. Participants will also learn to facilitate daily stand-ups, sprint reviews, and implement distributed Scrum in multi-location teams. Successfully completing this course equips professionals to optimise project delivery, enhance collaboration, and confidently adopt Agile methodologies within their organisations, positioning them for career advancement in project management, product management, and leadership roles.
What’s Included
- Agile Scrum Master (ASM) training
- Agile Scrum Master (ASM) exam
- Two live Scrum projects to apply learned skills
- Four simulation test papers to test knowledge
- Tutor support
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approx 9 hours to complete, with exam included. Price: £652 + VAT or £54.33 + VAT per month
Understand Agile and Scrum terminology
Run daily scrums and create effective user stories
Conduct sprint reviews and retrospectives
Understand the roles of Agile and Scrum team members
Produce key Scrum artifacts
Implement distributed Scrum for multi-location teams
Set up and manage projects on a JIRA cloud site
Maximise value from projects delivered with Scrum
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation / Practitioner entry-level
- Certification: Agile Scrum Master (ASM)
- Duration: Approx 9-10 hours (eLearning)
- Exam Duration: 90 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: eLearning
Who It’s For
Project Managers, Product Managers, Scrum Masters, Scrum Product Owners, and other team leaders or managers seeking formal recognition of their Scrum skills and the ability to lead Agile teams effectively.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 90 minutes
- Number of Questions: 40
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Delivery Method: Online (remote proctored) or in-class as per delivery mode
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no mandatory prerequisites. The course is suitable for professionals new to Scrum as well as those with some Agile experience looking to formalise their knowledge.
FAQ
Who is the Agile Scrum Master course designed for?
Project managers, team leaders, Scrum Masters, Product Owners, and professionals involved in Agile projects.
What is the pass mark for the ASM certification?
65%
Is the Agile Scrum Master certification hard?
The course prepares you with both theory and practical exercises to ensure success.
What study options are available for the ASM course?
eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, and Classroom
How long is the eLearning course?
Approximately 9 hours
Does the course include practical exercises?
Yes, two live Scrum projects are included to apply learned skills.
Are exams included in the course price?
Yes, the exam is included.
How many simulation tests are provided?
Four simulation test papers are included to test knowledge.
Is there tutor support during the course?
Yes, tutor support is included.
Can this certification help career growth?
Yes, it demonstrates capability in leading Agile teams and project delivery.
What Scrum tools will I learn?
JIRA cloud site for project setup and management.
Can I implement Scrum in distributed teams after this course?
Yes, the course covers distributed Scrum practices.
Do I need prior Agile experience?
No prior experience is required.
Is this certification recognised internationally?
Yes, EXIN accreditation ensures global recognition.
How is the certification exam delivered?
Multiple choice, online remote proctored or in-class depending on delivery.
Can I combine this with Product Owner training?
Yes, it complements Scrum Product Owner certification for complete Agile knowledge.
The Agile Business Consortium Scrum Master course equips participants with comprehensive knowledge and practical skills to lead Agile teams effectively within the Scrum framework. Designed for individuals who wish to excel in project delivery and team facilitation, this course highlights the strategic value of Scrum Masters in modern organisations. Participants will learn to guide teams through iterative development cycles, align project outcomes with organisational goals, and foster a collaborative environment that maximises productivity and business value. Beyond theoretical understanding, learners develop actionable leadership skills to coach, mentor, and remove impediments, ensuring consistent delivery of high-quality products. By achieving Scrum Master certification, participants demonstrate their ability to apply Agile principles and Scrum methodologies across diverse industries, driving measurable improvements in project execution, operational efficiency, and stakeholder satisfaction. This certification also positions professionals to take on leadership roles, influence organisational change, and contribute to the adoption of Agile practices at scale.
What’s Included
- Accredited Scrum Master training
- Scrum Master exam
- Tutor support
- Further optional extras, including Pass Protect exam insurance
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12 hours, 12-month licence, with exam included. Price: £703 + VAT or £58.58 + VAT/Month
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Interactive online instructor-led sessions with exercises, two days, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2055 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, two days, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2165 + VAT
Understand the core concepts, roles, events, and artifacts used in Scrum
Help Scrum Product Owners shape and refine product backlogs
Enable Scrum development teams to self-organise and create high-value products
Guide organisations in adopting and embedding Scrum practices
Build accessible knowledge bases to improve team performance and quality of work
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation / Practitioner
- Certification: Scrum Master
- Duration: 12 hours eLearning / Live Virtual Classroom duration as per ILX
- Exam Duration: 50 minutes
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
Who It’s For
This qualification is designed for individuals preparing for a Scrum Master role or currently in one, as well as managers and team leaders responsible for teams adopting Scrum methodologies. It is suitable for professionals across industries who aim to lead Agile teams, improve project outcomes, and implement Scrum frameworks effectively.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 50 minutes
- Number of Questions: 40
- Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Delivery Method: Online via remote proctor
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no mandatory prerequisites for this course. Familiarity with Agile or Scrum concepts may be beneficial but is not required.
FAQ
What does a Scrum Master do?
The Scrum Master supports the Agile team, facilitates Scrum processes, resolves conflicts, removes barriers, and drives organisational change to deliver value successfully.
How do you become a Scrum Master?
Complete the accredited training course and pass the Scrum Master exam. ILX uses group discussions and practical exercises to embed Scrum knowledge effectively.
Do I need prior Agile or Scrum experience?
No prior experience is required, though familiarity with Agile or Scrum may help in understanding the course materials.
Will I get a certificate after completing the Scrum Master course?
Yes, successfully passing the exam grants an industry-recognised certification from APMG-International and the Agile Business Consortium.
What study options are available?
Three study options are offered: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, and Classroom, allowing learners to choose the method that suits their needs.
How do I apply for reasonable adjustments for the official exam?
Adjustments are coordinated with ILX during exam scheduling.
In today’s competitive business environment, success depends not only on creating awareness through marketing but also on converting interest into actual sales. The Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales equips learners with a comprehensive, end-to-end understanding of both marketing and sales processes.
This course blends modern marketing strategies with proven sales techniques, ensuring that you can attract, engage, and convert customers effectively. You will gain insights into brand building, digital marketing, social media strategy, lead generation, sales funnel management, negotiation, and closing deals. The programme is ideal for business owners, marketing managers, sales professionals, freelancers, and anyone seeking a holistic understanding of the full customer journey from first contact to conversion.
By completing this course, you will be able to design and execute strategies that generate measurable business results, optimise resources, and create sustainable growth. It equips you with practical tools, actionable frameworks, and international best practices that can be immediately applied in real-world business scenarios.
Design and implement a unified marketing & sales strategy aligned with business objectives.
-
Conduct market research and customer analysis to identify target segments and positioning.
-
Build brand awareness and craft compelling messaging that resonates with customers.
-
Create, manage and optimise digital and offline marketing campaigns across multiple channels.
-
Generate and qualify leads effectively, turning interest into sales opportunities.
-
Use proven sales techniques — lead nurturing, presentation, negotiation, closing — to convert prospects.
-
Manage the full sales cycle: prospecting → outreach → negotiation → closing → follow-up.
-
Develop and execute email marketing and CRM‑based follow‑up workflows to nurture customer relationships.
-
Analyse marketing and sales data to measure performance, monitor conversion rates, and refine strategies.
-
Optimise pricing, offers, funnels and customer journey to maximise revenue and profit.
-
Align the marketing funnel and sales pipeline to ensure smooth handoff and high conversion.
-
Plan and manage sales teams or personal sales efforts, setting targets, tracking performance and scaling operations.
-
Balance long‑term brand building with short‑term sales performance for sustainable growth.
Course Facts & Details
| Detail | Information |
|---|---|
| Format | 100% Online, Self-paced or scheduled live sessions |
| Duration | 12–24 hours (depending on pace & provider) |
| Estimated Completion | 3–6 Weeks (flexible) |
| Assessment | Exam, Assignments, case studies, and final project |
| Entry Requirements | None — suitable for beginners and professionals |
| Certification | Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales (globally recognised) |
| Application | Career advancement, business growth, freelance services, internal marketing teams |
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
1. Do I need prior experience in marketing or sales?
No — this course is designed for both beginners and experienced professionals, so you can start with confidence.
2. Can I study while working full-time?
Yes — the programme is 100% online, self-paced, with optional live sessions, making it ideal for busy professionals.
3. Will this diploma guarantee a job or promotion?
No guarantees — but the skills and internationally recognised certification significantly enhance employability and career growth.
4. Is the diploma recognised internationally?
Yes — the Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales is recognised across industries globally, adding credibility to your profile.
5. Can business owners benefit without hiring agencies?
Absolutely — you will gain the skills to plan, execute, and monitor both marketing and sales campaigns independently, saving costs and increasing control.
6. How long does it take to complete the course?
The typical completion time is 3–6 months, depending on your pace and time commitment.
7. What format is the course delivered in?
The course is fully online, combining self-paced modules, interactive assignments, and optional live sessions for deeper learning.
8. Are there assessments or exams?
Yes — you will complete practical assignments, case studies, and a final project or exam to demonstrate your skills.
9. Can I get a certificate after completion?
Yes — you will earn a Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales, recognised internationally and valuable for career advancement.
10. Will this course improve my business revenue?
Yes — by integrating marketing strategies with sales techniques, you will be able to attract high-quality leads and convert them into paying customers.
11. Is this suitable for freelancers?
Absolutely — freelancers can apply these skills to provide marketing and sales services to clients or grow their own businesses.
12. Can I apply the skills immediately?
Yes — every module is designed with practical, real-world applications so you can implement strategies from day one.
13. Does the course cover digital marketing tools?
Yes — you will learn key tools for analytics, social media management, CRM, email campaigns, and marketing automation.
14. Is this course suitable for SMEs and startups?
Yes — small and medium-sized businesses benefit by learning how to run marketing and sales effectively without depending on external agencies.
15. Are there opportunities to network with other learners?
Yes — the course provides forums, optional live sessions, and community interactions to share experiences and network with peers and instructors.
التواصل الفعال هو مهارة أساسية يجب على القادة تطويرها. ستعلمك هذه الدورة الاستراتيجيات والتقنيات اللازمة للتواصل بشكل فعال كقائد. ستتعلم كيفية نقل المعلومات بوضوح والاستماع بنشاط، وتكييف أسلوب اتصالك ليناسب المواقف والجماهير المختلفة، وإظهار التعاطف والتفاهم. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، ستتعلم كيفية تقديم ملاحظات بناءة وتشجيع التواصل المفتوح وردود الفعل من الآخرين.
التواصل اللفظي: سيتعلم المشاركون أهمية التواصل اللفظي الواضح والموجز. سيستكشفون تقنيات التحدث بثقة، والتعبير عن الأفكار بشكل فعال، والتواصل مع جمهورهم. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، سيكتسب المشاركون نظرة ثاقبة حول كيفية تجنب أخطاء الاتصال الشائعة مثل التحدث بسرعة كبيرة، واستخدام المصطلحات الفنية أو المصطلحات الفنية، والفشل في الاستماع بنشاط.
يعد التواصل غير اللفظي أيضًا أمرًا بالغ الأهمية للتواصل الفعال كقائد. في هذه الدورة، ستتعلم كيفية إدراك الإشارات غير اللفظية الخاصة بك وقراءة الإشارات غير اللفظية للآخرين. ستتعلم كيفية الحفاظ على التواصل البصري، واستخدام لغة الجسد الإيجابية، وتنويع نبرة صوتك، وإظهار التعاطف، والوعي بالاختلافات الثقافية في التواصل غير اللفظي.
الاستماع النشط هو عنصر حاسم آخر للتواصل والقيادة الفعالة. ستعلمك هذه الدورة كيفية الاستماع بنشاط إلى أعضاء فريقك، وتركيز انتباهك على المتحدث، واستخدام لغة الجسد الإيجابية، وإعادة صياغة الكلام، وطرح الأسئلة المفتوحة، وتجنب المقاطعة، وتلخيص المحادثة.
من خلال أخذ هذه الدورة، ستطور المهارات اللازمة للتواصل بشكل فعال كقائد، وبناء علاقات أقوى مع أعضاء فريقك، وخلق بيئة عمل إيجابية ومنتجة. ستتعلم أيضًا كيفية تجنب سوء الفهم والصراع وتحسين الفعالية العامة لفريقك.- المعلم: Jessica Frankianson
أهمية التواصل اللفظي الواضح والموجز للقيادة الفعالة
تقنيات التحدث بثقة، والتعبير عن الأفكار بفعالية، والتفاعل مع جمهورك
كيفية تجنب مخاطر التواصل الشائعة، مثل التحدث بسرعة كبيرة، واستخدام المصطلحات، والفشل في الاستماع بفعالية
دور التواصل غير اللفظي في القيادة الفعالة، بما في ذلك الحفاظ على التواصل البصري، واستخدام لغة الجسد الإيجابية، وتنوع نبرة الصوت، والوعي بالاختلافات الثقافية
أهمية الاستماع الفعال وكيفية استخدام لغة الجسد الإيجابية وإعادة الصياغة وطرح الأسئلة المفتوحة وتجنب المقاطعة وتلخيص المحادثات لتحسين التواصل
كيفية تكييف أسلوب الاتصال الخاص بك ليناسب المواقف والجماهير المختلفة
كيفية تقديم تعليقات بناءة وتشجيع التواصل المفتوح والتعليقات من الآخرين
كيفية بناء علاقات أقوى مع أعضاء فريقك وخلق بيئة عمل إيجابية ومثمرة
كيفية تجنب سوء الفهم والصراعات وتحسين الفعالية الشاملة لفريقك.
في عالم إدارة المشاريع سريع الخطى، يعد التواصل الفعال أمرًا أساسيًا للحفاظ على مشاريعك على المسار الصحيح وتوافق فريقك. تتعمق هذه الدورة التدريبية، "الاتصالات في إدارة المشاريع"، بقيادة أفضل المدربين وأكثرهم خبرة، في استراتيجيات الاتصال الأساسية التي يحتاج كل مدير مشروع إلى إتقانها. بدءًا من التعامل مع رسائل البريد الإلكتروني والمكالمات الهاتفية والوثائق وحتى إدارة الاجتماعات الفعالة وصياغة تقارير موجزة، تغطي هذه الدورة كل شيء.
ستتعلم كيفية تطوير خطة اتصال قوية تعزز التواصل ثنائي الاتجاه، وتشرك أصحاب المصلحة، وتزيد من مشاركة الفريق. سواء كنت تتعامل مع اتصالات رسمية أو غير رسمية، أو تدير أصحاب المصلحة التنفيذيين، أو تجيب على أسئلة صعبة، توفر هذه الدورة رؤى وتقنيات عملية لتعزيز مهارات الاتصال الخاصة بالمشروع.
بحلول نهاية هذه الدورة التدريبية، ستكون قادرًا على تعريف "الضوضاء" في الرسالة، واختيار أفضل طرق الاتصال للموضوعات المعقدة، وفهم الغرض من سجل أصحاب المصلحة، والتنقل في شبكة السلطة والمصالح. ستتعلم أيضًا كيفية التغلب على عوائق الاتصال الشائعة في الفرق متعددة الوظائف وتطبيق نهج SHARKS لتنظيم الاجتماعات بشكل فعال.
تحديد أفضل طريقة للتواصل لموضوع مشحون عاطفياً ومعقد.
أذكر الغرض من سجل أصحاب المصلحة.
قم بتسمية الأرباع الأربعة في شبكة القوة والفائدة.
التعرف على العوائق الأكثر شيوعًا للتواصل في الفرق متعددة الوظائف.
تطوير وتنفيذ خطة الاتصال.
التمييز بين الاتصال أحادي الاتجاه والاتصال ثنائي الاتجاه.
ممارسة تقنيات الاستماع النشط.
إدارة التواصل مع أصحاب المصلحة التنفيذيين.
فهم الغرض من اجتماعات المشروع وإدارتها.
قرر ما هي المعلومات التي يجب تضمينها في تقارير المشروع.
استخدم لغة واضحة ومخططات بسيطة لتوصيل المعلومات بشكل فعال.
سنغطي في هذه الدورة نظرة عامة على خطط الأعمال للشركات الجديدة والحالية.
مقدمة
هناك العديد من أنواع الشركات المختلفة، بأحجام مختلفة، تلك الجديدة وتلك الموجودة.
عندما يتم التفكير في فكرة عمل لأول مرة، لا يفكر المبادر في كثير من الأحيان في عملية تحويل هذه الفكرة إلى حقيقة.
غالبًا ما يفكرون من حيث النجاح والربح، ولكن بالنسبة لأفكار الأعمال الجديدة، من الضروري أن تكون هناك خطة عمل جاهزة للمساعدة في بدء التشغيل.
يمكن لخطة العمل السليمة أن تساعد في العديد من جوانب تقديم الأعمال الجديدة، وتوفير استراتيجية مكتوبة لدفع فكرة العمل إلى الأمام.
خطط العمل
الرؤية والرسالة والقيم
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على أنواع المخاطر المرتبطة بالأعمال التجارية وأيضًا كيفية قياس نجاح الأعمال. فضلا عن هذا سوف تنظر أيضا في التغلب على الفشل.
مقدمة
لا يستطيع رائد الأعمال تجنب المخاطر في شركة ناشئة، والجميع يعلم أن نسبة كبيرة من الشركات الجديدة تفشل في نهاية المطاف. الحيلة هي فهم المخاطر التي يتعرض لها عملك وتحديد ما إذا كانت هذه المخاطرة تستحق المخاطرة.
إذا كانت المخاطرة تؤتي ثمارها – عظيم!
إذا لم يكن الأمر كذلك، فكيف تتعامل معه وتستمر؟
يجب أن تدرك أنه إذا بدأت مشروعك التجاري الخاص، فإن الأمر ينطوي على قدر معين من المخاطر. إذا كان هذا شيئًا لست مستعدًا له أو لا يمكنك التعامل معه، فقد لا ينجح مشروعك التجاري. من الممكن أن تخاطر بأموالك الخاصة أو بسمعتك. مهما كانت المخاطر، عليك أن تكون مستعدًا للتعامل معها إذا كنت رائد أعمال.
مخاطرة
قياس نجاح الأعمال
نجاح الأعمال
التغلب على الفشل
ستنظر في هذه الدورة في عملية صنع القرار والتفويض وكيف يمكن تحسين هذه المهارات لمساعدتك في أن تصبح قائدًا عظيمًا. سوف تتعرف على أنواع مختلفة من القرارات التي يمكن اتخاذها وإيجابيات وسلبيات التفويض.
تطوير المهارات القيادية
سننظر في كيفية تطوير تلك المهارات في هذه الجلسة من خلال التركيز على اتخاذ القرار والتفويض.
تخيل أنك بدأت مشروعك التجاري الخاص، لديك كل شيء في مكانه، التمويل والمباني والمنتج. لقد قمت بالإعلان عن عملك وأنت جاهز لبدء التداول. لقد حصلت على أفضل الموردين لمنتجك. لقد قمت بتعيين وتعيين أفضل الموظفين للعمل في مشروعك التجاري، ولكن هل لديك المهارات اللازمة لقيادة الموظفين؟
باعتبارك رائد أعمال، سوف تريد الأفضل لعملك، ولكن من المهم مراقبة جميع جوانب العمل، بما في ذلك الموظفين. قد يكون الأمر صعبًا على رواد الأعمال، الذين يكونون في بعض الأحيان منشغلين جدًا بفكرتهم الرائعة لدرجة أنهم يعتقدون أن الناس سيتبعونهم تلقائيًا. لتحويل رؤيتك إلى شركة ناجحة، يجب على رواد الأعمال أن يكونوا قادة للناس.
تطوير المهارات القيادية
صناعة القرار
وفد.
ستتعلم في هذه الدورة كيفية تحديد احتياجات عملائك، وكذلك كيفية تلبية هذه الاحتياجات. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، ستتمكن أيضًا من استهداف عملائك فيما يتعلق بأعمالك وخدماتك.
مقدمة
في قلب كل منتج أو خدمة هناك حاجة العملاء. تولد معظم المنتجات من شخص يحتاج إلى حل لمشكلة ما. من الضروري للمؤسسات، مهما كان حجمها، تحديد ما يحتاجه عملاؤها ومحاولة تقديم منتج أو خدمة لتلبية تلك الحاجة.
يمكن التفكير في أفكار الأعمال على الفور أو تطويرها على مدى فترة طويلة من الزمن. بغض النظر عن المدة التي تستغرقها فكرة العمل لتطويرها، فمن الضروري أن توفر ما يحتاجه العميل.
تحديد احتياجات العملاء
تلبية احتياجات العملاء
استهداف العملاء
تعتمد الإدارة الفعالة للمشروع على متطلبات المشروع الواضحة والمدارة بشكل جيد. تزود هذه الدورة مديري المشاريع بالاستراتيجيات والمنهجيات الأساسية للتنقل بنجاح بين تعقيدات متطلبات المشروع. بقيادة المدربين الخبراء لدينا، سوف تستكشف عملية منهجية مكونة من 10 خطوات مصممة لإدارة متطلبات المشروع بشكل فعال، مما يضمن التوافق مع احتياجات العمل وأهداف المشروع.
يغطي مدربونا مجموعة شاملة من المواضيع بما في ذلك تحديد المعايير المعمول بها، وإعداد خطط الاستنباط، وتحديد أصحاب المصلحة، وجمع المتطلبات وتحليلها، وتقنيات تحديد الأولويات، وإنشاء حالة الاستخدام، والتوثيق، وإدارة طلبات التغيير. تعرف على كيفية الحصول على الموافقة على متطلبات المشروع والحفاظ على التوافق وسط نطاقات المشروع المتطورة.
عزز كفاءتك في إدارة متطلبات المشروع من خلال المهارات العملية والرؤى التي تمكنك من تقديم مشاريع ناجحة تتماشى مع الأهداف التنظيمية. اكتساب الخبرة اللازمة لإدارة التعقيدات وتعزيز التعاون بين أصحاب المصلحة وتحقيق نجاح المشروع من خلال الإدارة الفعالة للمتطلبات.
إدارة متطلبات المشروع بشكل مناسب طوال دورة حياة المشروع.
التفريق بين استراتيجيات استنباط المتطلبات والحفاظ على مشاركة أصحاب المصلحة.
تحديد المصطلحات والمفاهيم الأساسية الضرورية لتحليل أصحاب المصلحة.
حدد السمات العشر التي تحدد متطلبات المشروع.
تطبيق أساليب فعالة لتحديد أولويات متطلبات المشروع
تنفيذ استراتيجيات لتوثيق وتوصيل متطلبات المشروع بشكل فعال.
التغلب على التحديات في إدارة متطلبات التغيير مع الحفاظ على نطاق المشروع وأهدافه.
الاستفادة من أفضل الممارسات للحصول على موافقة أصحاب المصلحة.
يتطلب التنقل في تعقيدات إدارة المشاريع إتقان فن إدارة المخاطر. وبدون الإدارة السليمة، يمكن للمخاطر أن تعرض أهداف المشروع للخطر وتقوض نجاحه الشامل. في هذه الدورة الشاملة، يرشدك مؤلف PMP Bob McGannon عبر المبادئ الأساسية لتوقع مخاطر المشروع وتقييمها وإدارتها بفعالية، بغض النظر عن حجم المشروع أو نطاقه. يستكشف بوب أحدث الأفكار من الطبعة السابعة من PMBOK، مع التركيز على الدور المحوري لإدارة المخاطر في نجاح المشروع. تعرف على كيفية قياس مدى تحمل أصحاب المصلحة للمخاطر، ووضع خطة قوية لإدارة المخاطر، وإنشاء سجل مفصل للمخاطر، والحفاظ على استمرارية المشروع وسط التحديات غير المتوقعة.
طوال الدورة، سوف تتعمق في استراتيجيات دمج إدارة المخاطر في تخطيط المشروع، والتعامل مع الغموض، وتعزيز مشاركة أصحاب المصلحة. يغطي بوب أيضًا الأساليب الإستراتيجية لإدارة حالات عدم اليقين، وتحديد المحفزات المحتملة، وتنفيذ استجابات مخصصة لتحسين نتائج المشروع.
قم بتوسيع مهاراتك في توقع وتخفيف مخاطر المشروع، وتزويد نفسك بالأدوات والرؤى اللازمة لقيادة المشاريع الناجحة في بيئات ديناميكية. بحلول نهاية هذه الدورة، ستكون مستعدًا لإدارة المخاطر بشكل استباقي، وحماية أهداف المشروع، وتعزيز مرونة المشروع في مواجهة التحديات غير المتوقعة.
تطوير استراتيجيات لتخفيف وإدارة كل من التهديدات والفرص.
تنفيذ طرق لمواءمة الرغبة في تحمل المخاطر في المشروع مع التسامح التنظيمي.
التغلب على حالات عدم اليقين في متطلبات المشروع وعمليات النشر التكنولوجي.
توضيح استراتيجيات الاتصال الفعالة لنقل آثار المخاطر إلى أصحاب المصلحة.
استخدم أدوات تحليل المخاطر لتقييم تأثير واحتمالية المخاطر المحددة.
تعزيز ثقافة الوعي بالمخاطر وإدارة المخاطر الاستباقية داخل فرق المشروع.
دمج الدروس المستفادة من إدارة المخاطر في تخطيط المشاريع وتنفيذها في المستقبل.
تعد هذه الدورة مقدمة لمراقبة الأعمال عند بدء عمل تجاري جديد.
مقدمة
• باعتبارك رائد أعمال يبدأ مشروعًا تجاريًا جديدًا، فأنت بحاجة إلى متابعة أموالك واتخاذ الإجراءات التصحيحية عند الضرورة.
• من خلال الفشل في تقديم نظام الضوابط المالية المناسب، يمكن أن يتسبب ذلك في فشل العديد من الشركات الصغيرة. ومن خلال الفشل في مراقبة الأرقام، يفقدون السيطرة على الأعمال.
• مع وجود العديد من الأرقام التي يجب عليك متابعتها، ما هي أهمها؟
مراقبة الأعمال
الحفاظ على الزخم
لماذا يجب أن يتمتع رجل الأعمال بالشغف والقيادة والتركيز؟
مقدمة
- لكي تظل الأعمال التجارية قادرة على الاستمرار في عالمنا المتغير والسريع الخطى، من الضروري استخدام المعلومات الموثوقة في جميع مراحل عملية الأعمال.
- اليوم، نحن محاصرون وممطرون بالمعلومات من مصادر عديدة وعلينا أن نفهم هذه المعلومات إذا أردنا استخدامها لصالحنا.
- نحن نعتمد على العديد من المصادر ولكننا نحتاج إلى التأكد من أن هذه المصادر ستساعدنا في المهمة التي نقوم بها.
- يجب أن نتعلم كيفية استخدام المصادر التي ستساعدنا في بيئة الأعمال الحالية وتسمح للأعمال بالمضي قدمًا.
- المعلم: Jessica Frankianson
مصادر المعلومات
موثوقية المعلومات
العوامل المحلية
العوامل الوطنية
مقدمة
• يتم تنظيم المنظمات بعدة طرق، اعتمادًا على أهدافها وثقافتها. سيحدد هيكل المنظمة الطريقة التي تعمل بها وأدائها.
• يسمح الهيكل بتخصيص المسؤوليات الخاصة بالوظائف والعمليات المختلفة بشكل واضح لمختلف الأقسام والموظفين. الهيكل التنظيمي الخاطئ سيعيق نجاح العمل.
• يجب أن تهدف الهياكل التنظيمية إلى تعظيم كفاءة ونجاح المنظمة. إن الهيكل التنظيمي الفعال سيسهل علاقات العمل بين مختلف أقسام المنظمة. سيحتفظ بالنظام والقيادة مع تعزيز المرونة والإبداع.
أنواع هيكل الأعمال
الأعمال ووظائفها
الاعتبارات القانونية
أتقن فن إنشاء جداول المشروع التي تضمن إكمال المشروع في الوقت المناسب وبتكلفة مناسبة للميزانية، كل ذلك مع الحفاظ على المرونة اللازمة للتكيف مع التغييرات غير المتوقعة. توفر لك هذه الدورة التدريبية، "إدارة جدول المشروعات"، التي يقودها خبير متمرس، التقنيات الأساسية لإدارة الجداول الزمنية للمشروع بشكل استباقي.
خلال هذه الدورة، ستتعلم كيفية صياغة خطة مفصلة لإدارة الجدول الزمني تتوافق مع أهداف وغايات مشروعك. سوف تكتشف كيفية تحديد الأنشطة والمعالم الرئيسية التي تعتبر حاسمة لنجاح مشروعك. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، ستكتسب الخبرة في تقدير تكاليف المشروع بدقة، مما يضمن بقاء ميزانيتك على المسار الصحيح.
يعتبر تخصيص الموارد والتفاوض من المهارات الحاسمة التي تغطيها هذه الدورة. سوف تتعلم كيفية تخصيص الموارد بكفاءة، وموازنة متغيرات التعيين، واستبدال الموارد العامة بموظفين محددين. تتناول الدورة أيضًا تعقيدات العمل مع فرق العمل بدوام جزئي وعن بعد، مما يضمن قدرتك على إدارة الموارد بفعالية في بيئات العمل المختلفة.
وتؤكد الدورة على الإدارة المستمرة للجدول الزمني وتحسينه. سوف تستكشف تقنيات الكشف عن تعارضات الجدول الزمني وحلها، وإدارة المسار الحرج، وضبط مستوى العمل بمرور الوقت. سوف تتعلم أيضًا تضمين وقت الطوارئ في الجدول الزمني، وتحديد الجدول الزمني الأساسي، وتحسينه لتلبية توقعات أصحاب المصلحة.
علاوة على ذلك، تقدم الدورة استراتيجيات لتقصير الأطر الزمنية للمشروع، وخفض التكاليف، وتحسين كفاءة الجدول الزمني بشكل عام. بحلول نهاية الدورة، ستكون قد اكتسبت المهارات اللازمة لإدارة جداول المشروع بشكل استباقي، والتكيف مع التغييرات عند ظهورها، وضمان نتائج المشروع الناجحة.
ملاحظة: تتوافق هذه الدورة مع أفضل الممارسات الواردة في دليل الدليل المعرفي لإدارة المشاريع (دليل PMBOK®) - الإصدار السادس، الذي نشره معهد إدارة المشاريع®.
تحديد الأنواع المناسبة من جداول المشروع لمختلف السيناريوهات.
تطبيق الأساليب الفعالة لتقدير أنشطة المشروع.
استخدم التبعيات لتسلسل أنشطة المشروع بشكل منطقي.
فهم المتغيرات المشاركة في تعيينات الموارد.
تنفيذ استراتيجيات للتعامل مع الركود السلبي في الجداول الزمنية للمشروع.
اضبط الجداول الزمنية لتقليل تكاليف المشروع مع الحفاظ على الكفاءة.
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على التمويل والتوظيف والتدريب (التعلم والتطوير) داخل الأعمال التجارية والشركة. ستغطي هذه الدورة مجموعة من المواضيع التي ستساعدك عند بدء مشروع تجاري، بدءًا من تكاليف البدء وكيفية توظيف الموظفين المناسبين.
مقدمة
قبل البدء في أي عمل تجاري جديد، يجب أن يكون لدى رائد الأعمال فهم قوي لتمويل الشركات الناشئة ومن أين سيأتي. سيكون هناك العديد من العوامل التي يجب مراعاتها قبل الشروع في خطتهم. إنهم بحاجة إلى تحديد مقدار الأموال التي سيحتاجونها للمضي قدمًا بمشروعهم ومصدر تلك الأموال.
إذا كنت ستبدأ مشروعًا تجاريًا للتعلم الرقمي، فما مقدار المال الذي تعتقد أنك ستحتاجه من أجل ذلك؟
أول 3-6 أشهر ؟ أو أول 6-12 شهرًا؟!
أود أن أقترح عليك البحث على الإنترنت لمعرفة تكلفة هذه الأشياء والمبلغ الذي تعتقد أنك قد تحتاجه لمدة 3 أشهر من الإمدادات.
الاعتبارات المالية عند بدء الأعمال التجارية
مصادر تمويل البدء
كيفية توظيف الأشخاص المناسبين
تدريب الموظفين والخطط.
التواصل الجيد مهم لجميع العلاقات. سنحدد أفضل الطرق لتحسين مهارات الاتصال لديك. يتضمن توزيع الرسائل بشكل واضح وموجز، بطريقة تتواصل مع الجمهور. التواصل الجيد يدور حول فهم التعليمات واكتساب مهارات جديدة وتقديم الطلبات وطرح الأسئلة ونقل المعلومات بسهولة.
مقدمة
ستجد أن جزءًا كبيرًا من نجاح ريادة الأعمال يعتمد على القدرة على التواصل على مستويات مختلفة. قد تكون لديك خبرة عمل ممتازة وفكرة رائعة، ولكن إذا لم تتواصل بشكل فعال، فقد تلحق الضرر بعملك.
يحتاج رائد الأعمال إلى فهم كيفية التواصل واستخدام طرق الاتصال الأكثر فعالية لجمهوره.
اتصال شخصي
أهمية التواصل الجيد
أنواع الاتصالات
التواصل الفعال
In this course you will learn about different business types, from micro businesses to start-ups and existing businesses. You will also look into the advantages and disadvantages of each of these types of business.
Introduction
Due to the economic climate over the past few years, it has changed the shape and nature of how businesses are set up and sustained.
With the move away from traditional high street businesses to more internet based businesses, organisations that used to employ hundreds of people can now be staffed with less people but still provide the same level of service.
There are still large business organisations, and these also have a valid place in the business world. You are going to look at different sizes of business and how they operate.
الشركات الصغيرة
SME's - الشركات الصغيرة والمتوسطة
الشركات الكبيرة
الشركات الناشئة والشركات القائمة
مقدمة
سوف تكتشف ما هو رجل الأعمال، "الشخص الذي يبدأ مشروعه الخاص، خاصة عندما يتضمن ذلك رؤية فرصة جديدة"
بداية، ما رأيك في الإجابات على هذه الأسئلة؟ هل هم صادقون أم كاذبون؟ هل يجب أن تكون غنياً لتكون رجل أعمال؟ عليك أن تخترع شيئا لتكون رجل أعمال؟ هل يجب أن تظهر في Dragon's Den لتكون رائد أعمال؟ الإجابات: ؟؟؟
ليس من الضروري أن تكون ثريًا، أو تخترع شيئًا ما، أو تظهر في برامج مثل Dragon's Den لتصبح رائد أعمال. يمكن لأي شخص أن يصبح رائد أعمال إذا أراد ذلك!
ما هو رجل الأعمال
مهارات تنظيم المشاريع
الأهداف
مهارات تنظيم المشاريع
المهارات العملية والتقنية
نموذج النمو
أهداف ذكية
يعد فهم ديناميكيات فرق المشروع أمرًا ضروريًا لتحقيق النجاح في أي بيئة مشروع. توفر هذه الدورة رؤى لا تقدر بثمن حول الأدوات والتقنيات المختلفة التي يمكن لمديري المشاريع استخدامها لتعزيز تماسك الفريق وإنتاجيته. بقيادة المدربين الخبراء لدينا، سوف تستكشف المنهجيات الرائدة لفهم السمات الشخصية لأعضاء الفريق وتعزيز تطوير الفريق.
يغطي مدربونا مجموعة من التقييمات بما في ذلك مؤشر نوع مايرز بريجز، وملف تعريف شخصية ديسك، وأداة اكتشاف القوة، وتقييمات الذكاء العاطفي. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، سوف تتعمق في نماذج مثل نموذج تطوير فريق Tuckman، وقيادة المشروع الظرفية، واستراتيجيات إدارة تغيير المشروع والانتقالات. تعرف على كيفية تطبيق هذه الأدوات لإدارة ديناميكيات الفريق بشكل فعال وتعزيز التعاون وإنشاء بيئة مواتية لنجاح الفريق.
عزز قدرتك على إدارة وقيادة فرق المشروع بفعالية من خلال الاستفادة من هذه الأدوات والمنهجيات لتكوين بيئة فريق متماسكة وعالية الأداء. اكتسب مهارات عملية ستمكنك من التنقل بين ديناميكيات الفريق بثقة وتحقيق نجاح المشروع.
قم بتقييم وتطبيق الرؤى من مؤشر نوع مايرز بريجز لتعزيز التواصل والتعاون بين الفريق.
استخدم تقييم أساليب عمل Tates لتحديد أساليب العمل المتنوعة والاستفادة منها داخل فرق المشروع.
تعزيز فهمك للذكاء العاطفي وتأثيره على ديناميكيات الفريق والأداء.
تنفيذ نموذج القيادة الظرفية لمعالجة احتياجات ومواقف الموظفين المختلفة بشكل فعال.
تطبيق نموذج Lencioni لتشخيص ومعالجة الخلل الوظيفي داخل فرق المشروع.
توظيف استراتيجيات لإدارة المشاريع في المنظمات المصفوفية لتحسين أداء الفريق وكفاءته.
تعزيز بيئة الفريق التعاونية التي تزيد من نقاط القوة الفردية وتقلل من الاختلالات الوظيفية للفريق.
الاستفادة من أدوات التقييم لتصميم مناهج القيادة واستراتيجيات الاتصال.
نظرة عامة على الترويج لعملك الجديد من خلال التواصل.
مقدمة
لكي تصبح رائد أعمال عظيمًا، يجب أن تكون قادرًا على تقديم فكرة عملك بشكل فعال حتى يصبح الناس مهتمين بها. يتضمن هذا غالبًا تقديم مفهومك بطريقة تجذب الانتباه وتثير الفضول، حتى في المواقف التي قد تشعر فيها بعدم الارتياح أو أنك خارج عنصرك.
ستتعلم في هذه الدورة التقنيات الأساسية لتقديم فكرة عملك بثقة للمستثمرين والعملاء والشركاء المحتملين. سنستكشف استراتيجيات لصياغة عرض تقديمي مقنع وإشراك جمهورك ونقل قيمة منتجك أو خدمتك بوضوح وحماس.
بالإضافة إلى ذلك، يعد تعزيز مهاراتك ونقاط قوتك جانبًا مهمًا لنجاح ريادة الأعمال. على الرغم من كوننا أمة غالبًا ما تكافح من أجل الترويج الذاتي، فإن هذه الدورة ستعلمك كيفية التغلب على هذا التحدي. سوف تكتشف كيفية تسليط الضوء على قدراتك وإنجازاتك الفريدة دون الشعور بالتفاخر، و"النفخ بالبوق الخاص بك" بشكل فعال بطريقة تلقى صدى لدى الآخرين وتبني علامتك التجارية الشخصية.
تقديم نفسك للعملاء والعملاء وغيرهم
الشبكات
ستبدأ في هذه الدورة في تطوير مهاراتك القيادية من خلال النظر في التفاوض وتحديد الأولويات. سوف تتعلم كيفية استخدام هذه المهارات وتطويرها لمساعدتك في أن تصبح قائدًا عظيمًا في مكان العمل وداخل عملك.
تطوير المهارات القيادية
من المهم جدًا أن يعرف القادة الأنواع المختلفة للقيادة، وسننظر في كيفية تطوير تلك المهارات في هذه الجلسة من خلال التركيز على التفاوض وتحديد الأولويات.
تخيل أنك بدأت مشروعك التجاري الخاص، لديك كل شيء في مكانه، التمويل والمباني والمنتج. لقد قمت بالإعلان عن عملك وأنت جاهز لبدء التداول. لقد حصلت على أفضل الموردين لمنتجك. لقد قمت بتعيين وتعيين أفضل الموظفين للعمل في مشروعك التجاري، ولكن هل لديك المهارات اللازمة لقيادة الموظفين؟
باعتبارك رائد أعمال، سوف تريد الأفضل لعملك، ولكن من المهم مراقبة جميع جوانب العمل، بما في ذلك الموظفين. قد يكون الأمر صعبًا على رواد الأعمال، الذين ينشغلون أحيانًا بفكرتهم الرائعة لدرجة أنهم يعتقدون أن الناس سيتبعونهم تلقائيًا. لتحويل رؤيتك إلى شركة ناجحة، يجب على رواد الأعمال أن يكونوا قادة للناس.
تطوير المهارات القيادية
تفاوض
ترتيب الاولويات
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على الاعتبارات القانونية التي يجب عليك مراعاتها عند بدء مشروع تجاري. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، ستنظر أيضًا في التكاليف والتدفق النقدي للشركة.
مقدمة
عند بدء عمل تجاري جديد، من المهم فهم الجوانب القانونية التي يمكن أن تؤثر على العمل. يمكن أن تكون الجوانب القانونية لإنشاء مشروع تجاري جديد معقدة، وسيكون من المفيد طلب المشورة من المنظمات التي تقدم الدعم للشركات الناشئة مثل Business Gateway، بما في ذلك المسائل القانونية التي تحيط بهيكل الأعمال والملكية الفكرية والضرائب والتأمين الوطني والتوظيف. طاقم عمل.
يمكن أن تكون الآثار المترتبة على ارتكاب خطأ ما خطيرة بالنسبة للشركة وقد تؤدي إلى غرامات باهظة أو فقدان السمعة أو الملاحقة القضائية أو السجن.
هناك عدد من الخيارات المتاحة للشركات الناشئة عند تحديد الهيكل القانوني الذي سيتم وضعه للشركة:
- التاجر الوحيد
- شراكة
- الامتياز التجاري
- شركة محدودة
إذا تم اختيار مسار الشركة المحدودة، فيجب تسجيل الشركة لدى Companies House.
سوف تتعلم
- أنواع هيكل الأعمال
- وظائف العمل
- الاعتبارات القانونية
تعرف على التسويق والدور الذي يمكن أن يلعبه داخل الأعمال التجارية والأساليب المختلفة المستخدمة. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، سوف تبحث في الغرض من التسويق والعناصر السبعة
مقدمة
يدور التسويق حول محاولة إرضاء العملاء حتى يعودوا ويقوموا بمزيد من عمليات الشراء. إنها عملية الإدارة التي تتضمن معرفة ما يريده المستهلكون وتلبية متطلبات المستهلك بشكل مربح.
يمكن القيام بذلك بعدة طرق، مثل إجراء بحث لمعرفة المنتجات التي يريدها العملاء أو البحث عن المنتجات وتطويرها للسوق. من المهم أيضًا أن تقرر الشركة التغليف المناسب للمنتجات، بالإضافة إلى تحديد مكان بيع المنتجات.
من المهم جدًا أن تقوم المنظمة بتحديد سعر مناسب للمنتجات حتى يتم تحقيق الربح ويتم الإعلان عنها والترويج لها وبيعها بشكل فعال.
كيف يؤثر التسويق على الأعمال، بما في ذلك:
الغرض من التسويق
7 ف للتسويق
طرق التسويق
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على الأداء الشخصي والاستعداد لبدء الأعمال التجارية
مقدمة
يجب على كل رائد أعمال أن يفهم صفاته الشخصية وأن يستخدم هذه الصفات الشخصية لبناء أعماله. من المهم أن تنظر إلى نفسك بموضوعية وتقيس نقاطك الجيدة ونقاطك السيئة. يمكنك إعداد قائمة بما تعتقد أنه صفاتك الشخصية، ولكن غالبًا ما يكون من الأسهل استخدام تحليل "SWOT".
تحليل SWOT يرمز إلى: نقاط القوة، ونقاط الضعف ، والفرص، والتهديدات.
سوف تكتشف أن تحليل SWOT هو أداة تطوير تستخدم لتحديد صفاتك الشخصية وسيساعدك على رؤية المجالات التي يمكنك البناء عليها والمجالات التي تفتقر إلى المعرفة فيها. والفكرة هي أن تمر عبر كل فئة وتدرج احتياجاتك الصفات الشخصية أو عدم وجودها، ضد هذه الفئات.
تحليل كدح الشخصية
التفكير في الأداء الشخصي
ضغط
هل أنت مستعد لأن تصبح رجل أعمال – دراسة حالة
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على المتطلبات عند اختيار مقر العمل مثل التكلفة والمخزون والمعدات والآلات.
مقدمة
- تتضمن فكرة العمل العديد من الأجزاء التي يجب تجميعها معًا لإنجاحها. سيكون المالك أو رجل الأعمال قد بحث في كل مجال من مجالات العمل للبدء به ووضع كل شيء في مكانه الصحيح.
- بغض النظر عن مقدار البحث الذي تم إجراؤه، فمن الضروري أن يفهم المبادر الموارد المطلوبة لإنجاح الفكرة. يمكن أن تكون المباني حيوية لنجاح المنظمة وتجعل الموظفين يشعرون بالأمان والأمان.
- يحتاج العمل إلى العديد من العناصر حتى يعمل بنجاح.
- بمجرد التفكير في فكرة العمل، فإنها تحتاج إلى خطة للموارد اللازمة لجعل هذه الفكرة تعمل كعمل تجاري قابل للحياة. قد يكون من الصعب التخطيط ووضع المواد والمعدات المناسبة لبدء العمل. خاصة عندما يجب على صاحب العمل تقدير المستويات في البداية.
- غالبًا ما يكون الأمر مجرد تخمين بشأن مقدار المخزون والأشياء المتنوعة التي ستحتاجها الأعمال الجديدة.
الموارد، مع التركيز على أماكن العمل
الاعتبارات الواجب اتخاذها
اختيار وتكلفة المباني
التخطيط للمواد المناسبة
متطلبات المخزون
متطلبات المعدات
الات
تعرف على عملية الشراء والتسليم عند إنشاء مشروع تجاري.
مقدمة
- عندما يتم إنشاء منظمة ما، يجب اتخاذ القرارات بشأن جوانب عديدة من تلك المنظمة. ستؤثر هذه القرارات على كيفية عمل هذه المنظمة وأدائها لسنوات قادمة وتشكلها.
- بعد اتخاذ القرار بشأن المنتج أو الخدمة، يجب تحديد العناصر التي سيتم تصنيعها محليًا وأي العناصر سيتم الاستعانة بمصادر خارجية مع شخص آخر لتصنيعها.
- تقرر بعض المنظمات تصنيع المنتج بالكامل أو أجزاء منه فقط.
قرار التصنيع أو الشراء
متى يتم ذلك داخل المنظمة؟
في الداخل أو الاستعانة بمصادر خارجية؟
التمويل والجودة
وسائل التسليم - الإنترنت فقط والامتياز
مقدمة
تشتمل القيادة على العديد من المهارات والصفات المتنوعة، وبالنسبة للعديد من الأشخاص لا تأتي هذه الأمور بشكل طبيعي، فنحن نشارك في المواقف القيادية. في بعض الحالات، قد يقودنا آخرون مثل آبائنا أو إخوتنا الأكبر سنًا أو أقراننا. بينما في مواقف أخرى قد نقوم بالقيادة.
يمكن تعريف القيادة بأنها القدرة على ممارسة التأثير على الآخرين. نفس الوضع موجود مع رواد الأعمال - على الرغم من أن تركيزهم ينصب على الحصول على الأفضل من الموظفين، إلا أنه يجب عليهم العمل مع الموظفين للحصول على أفضل النتائج.
فكر في أي موقف كنت فيه قائداً. ماذا كنت جيدة في؟ ما الذي لم تكن جيدًا فيه؟ إذا لم تكن قائدًا من قبل، ففكر في شخص أصبح كذلك.
مهارات القيادة
أساليب القيادة
في هذه الدورة سوف نتعلم عن مختلف أصحاب المصلحة وكيفية ارتباطهم بالأعمال التجارية. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، ستنظر في الفرق بين أصحاب المصلحة الداخليين والخارجيين بالإضافة إلى أي شكل من أشكال الصراع الذي قد يحدث بسبب أصحاب المصلحة هؤلاء.
مقدمة
يجب على كل رجل أعمال أن يفهم أنه سيكون هناك أفراد ومنظمات مهتمة بأعمالهم. يهتم هؤلاء "أصحاب المصلحة" بكيفية أداء الأعمال وما تأثيرها عليهم.
يمكن تعريف أصحاب المصلحة بأنهم أشخاص أو منظمات أو مجموعات مصالح أو هيئات أخرى لها مصلحة في ما تفعله المنظمة وكيفية أدائها. يجب أن تكون المنظمات على دراية بمن هم أصحاب المصلحة الرئيسيين، وما هي اهتماماتهم في العمل ومستوى التأثير الذي يتمتعون به.
من المرجح أن يكون أصحاب المصلحة الأقوى هم الأشخاص الذين قاموا بتمويل الأعمال. يأتي أصحاب المصلحة بأشكال عديدة، وسنركز على المنافسين والموردين والعملاء.
المالكون
داخلي
خارجي
المنافسون كأصحاب مصلحة.
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على الاتجاهات والأفكار وكيف يمكنك العمل مع هذه الاتجاهات لإفادة عملك وأي منها يمكن أن يؤثر على عملك. ستعرف أيضًا كيفية توليد الأفكار والأفكار التجارية.
مقدمة
يمكن تعريف الاتجاه بأنه "الاتجاه العام الذي يتطور أو يتغير فيه شيء ما". لقد حدثت تغيرات كثيرة في العالم كان لها تأثير مباشر على عاداتنا الشرائية. لقد أصبحنا الآن أكثر وعيًا بكيفية تصنيع منتجاتنا ومصادرها، وهذا ما يشكل كيفية تنفيذ الأعمال. لقد تغير تكوين الأسرة التقليدية، مما يؤثر في نهاية المطاف على أنماط الشراء لدينا.
هناك أربعة أنواع رئيسية من الاتجاه
- اتجاهات التكنولوجيا
- الاتجاهات البيئية
- الاتجاهات الأخلاقية
- اتجاهات اجتماعية
سوف تتعلم
- الاتجاهات التي تؤثر على الأعمال
- التعرف على اتجاهات الأعمال
- توليد الأفكار
- أفكار تجارية
- التأثيرات التجارية
في هذه الجلسة ستغطي وتتعرف على أنواع مختلفة من الأعمال. سوف تقوم أيضًا بتغطية مزايا وعيوب هذه الأنواع المختلفة من الأعمال.
مقدمة• هناك العديد من أنواع الأعمال المختلفة.
• يقوم العديد من رواد الأعمال بتأسيس أعمال تجارية خاصة بهم ويديرونها بأنفسهم.
• هناك أيضًا منظمات يديرها عدد قليل من الأشخاص، وتعمل كشراكة.
• مهما كان حجم الشركة أو شكلها، فإنها تحتاج إلى فريق الإدارة المناسب لإنجاحها.
سوف تتعلم:
- التاجر الوحيد
- الشراكه
- الشركات الخاصة المحدودة (المحدودة)
- الشركات العامة المحدودة (ش.م.ع)
The course explores the scope and application of MAR, including the definition of market abuse and the types of behavior that constitute market manipulation and insider trading. Participants will learn about the FCA's role in enforcing MAR, including the regulatory framework, supervisory practices, and enforcement mechanisms.
The course covers key aspects of MAR such as the requirements for disclosure of inside information, the prohibition of market manipulation, and the obligations for issuers and firms. It also delves into the compliance measures and reporting requirements necessary to adhere to MAR.
Through a combination of theoretical insights and practical examples, including case studies of market abuse incidents, participants will gain a thorough understanding of how MAR is applied in practice and how firms can ensure they are compliant. The course also addresses the penalties and sanctions that may be imposed for MAR violations and the procedures for challenging enforcement actions.
By the end of the course, participants will be equipped with the knowledge needed to navigate MAR effectively, understand the regulatory expectations, and implement robust compliance frameworks to prevent market abuse.
Overview of Market Abuse Regulation (MAR) and its objectives
Definition and types of market abuse, including insider trading and market manipulation
FCA’s role in enforcing MAR and the regulatory framework involved
Requirements for disclosure of inside information and prohibition of market manipulation
Compliance obligations for firms under MAR
Reporting requirements and procedures for adhering to MAR
Analysis of case studies involving market abuse
Penalties and sanctions for MAR violations and processes for challenging enforcement actions
The "FCA Technology and AI in Financial Services" course explores the integration of technology and artificial intelligence (AI) within the framework of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) regulatory oversight. As financial services increasingly leverage advanced technologies, understanding how these innovations interact with regulatory requirements is crucial for maintaining compliance and ensuring market integrity.
The course examines the FCA's approach to regulating technological advancements and AI applications in financial services. It covers key topics such as the impact of technology on regulatory compliance, the FCA's guidelines on the use of AI, and how emerging technologies are reshaping the financial landscape. Participants will gain insights into the regulatory challenges and opportunities presented by these technologies, including issues related to data privacy, algorithmic trading, and automated decision-making.
The course also addresses the FCA's strategies for supervising and enforcing compliance in a technology-driven environment. It includes discussions on the regulatory framework for digital transformation, the role of technology in enhancing market transparency, and the FCA’s expectations for firms adopting new technologies. Case studies and practical examples will illustrate how firms can navigate regulatory requirements while leveraging technological advancements.
By the end of the course, participants will have a comprehensive understanding of the intersection between FCA regulation, technology, and AI, as well as the skills needed to ensure that technological innovations comply with regulatory standards.
Overview of FCA’s regulatory approach to technology and AI in financial services
Impact of technology and AI on regulatory compliance and market integrity
FCA guidelines and expectations for the use of AI in financial services
Challenges related to data privacy, algorithmic trading, and automated decision-making
Regulatory framework for digital transformation in financial services
Role of technology in enhancing market transparency and regulatory oversight
Case studies of technology and AI applications in financial services
Strategies for ensuring compliance with FCA regulations while adopting new technologies
Through interactive case studies and real-world examples, attendees will learn how to implement and maintain effective AML policies and procedures. The course also covers the role of compliance officers and senior managers in ensuring their firms meet FCA requirements for financial crime prevention. Upon completion, participants will be well-prepared to safeguard their organizations against financial crime and remain compliant with the FCA’s regulatory expectations.
This course is ideal for compliance officers, risk managers, AML specialists, and legal professionals in financial services.
Understanding the legal and regulatory framework for financial crime prevention.
Implementing and maintaining effective Anti-Money Laundering (AML) programs.
Identifying, reporting, and preventing suspicious activities related to money laundering and fraud.
The role of compliance officers and senior managers in preventing financial crime.
Complying with the FCA's financial crime and AML regulations.
Conducting customer due diligence and Know Your Customer (KYC) processes.
Developing internal controls and monitoring systems to detect financial crime.
Responding to FCA inquiries and financial crime investigations.
This course offers a comprehensive understanding of the regulatory framework set by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) in the UK. It is designed for professionals in the financial services industry who need to ensure that their organizations comply with FCA rules and guidelines. Participants will gain practical insights into the role of the FCA, the regulatory obligations of firms, and the best practices for maintaining compliance in a rapidly changing regulatory landscape.
The course covers essential topics such as navigating the FCA Handbook, implementing the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SMCR), and understanding key aspects of consumer protection, financial crime prevention, and regulatory reporting. Through real-world case studies, participants will learn how to apply these concepts to their own organizations, ensuring they meet all regulatory standards while fostering a culture of accountability and integrity.
This program is ideal for compliance officers, risk managers, legal advisors, and senior managers responsible for regulatory oversight within their firms. Upon completion, participants will be equipped with the skills and knowledge needed to effectively manage compliance and mitigate regulatory risk.
Understanding the role and structure of the FCA and its regulatory objectives.
Navigating the FCA Handbook and applying its principles to your organization.
Implementing the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SMCR) for accountability.
Regulatory reporting requirements and FCA supervision processes.
Ensuring consumer protection and handling customer complaints.
Complying with Anti-Money Laundering (AML) and financial crime prevention.
Evaluating the effectiveness of compliance programs using data insights.
Adapting to regulatory changes and implementing best practices for compliance.
This course focuses on the key components of risk management and regulatory reporting under the FCA's regulatory framework. It is designed for financial services professionals responsible for risk oversight, reporting, and compliance within their firms. Participants will learn how to implement effective risk management strategies, ensure accurate and timely regulatory reporting, and navigate the FCA's supervisory expectations.
The course covers the role of the FCA in supervising firms' risk management processes, regulatory reporting obligations, and the consequences of non-compliance. Through interactive sessions and case studies, participants will gain a clear understanding of how to identify, assess, and mitigate risks while maintaining compliance with FCA regulations. By the end of the course, attendees will be able to build strong risk management frameworks and ensure that their firm's reporting processes align with FCA requirements.
This program is ideal for risk managers, compliance officers, finance professionals, and senior leaders who oversee risk and regulatory functions.
Key principles of risk management under FCA regulations.
Implementing effective risk management frameworks within financial firms.
Regulatory reporting requirements, including deadlines and key metrics.
Best practices for identifying, assessing, and mitigating risks.
The FCA's supervisory approach to risk and compliance.
Techniques for ensuring accurate and timely regulatory reporting.
Consequences of non-compliance with FCA reporting obligations.
How to respond to FCA inquiries and manage regulatory inspections.
The "FCA Supervision and Enforcement" course offers a detailed exploration of the Financial Conduct Authority's (FCA) frameworks and strategies for supervising and enforcing regulatory compliance within the financial services industry. It is designed to provide participants with an in-depth understanding of how the FCA monitors firms' adherence to regulatory standards, manages risks, and takes enforcement actions when necessary.
The course covers the FCA’s approach to supervision, including its risk-based methodology, which focuses on identifying and mitigating potential risks to consumers and the financial market. Participants will learn about the different supervisory tools and techniques employed by the FCA, including routine inspections, thematic reviews, and data analysis.
In addition, the course delves into the enforcement process, highlighting how the FCA investigates breaches of regulations, determines appropriate sanctions, and implements corrective measures. Key topics include the regulatory framework that governs supervision and enforcement, the types of enforcement actions that can be taken, and the principles behind penalty determinations.
Through case studies and real-world examples, learners will gain insights into the practical application of FCA supervision and enforcement strategies. The course also covers the processes for challenging FCA decisions and the mechanisms available for appeal or review.
By the end of the course, participants will have a thorough understanding of the FCA’s role in maintaining market integrity and consumer protection, as well as the skills needed to navigate the regulatory landscape effectively.
Overview of FCA supervision principles and methodologies
Detailed procedures of FCA enforcement actions
Key regulations and guidelines for FCA supervision
Risk-based approach to evaluating and prioritizing regulatory risks
Analysis of real-world FCA enforcement case studies
Compliance obligations and expectations for regulated firms
Types of sanctions and penalties imposed by the FCA
Processes for appealing or reviewing FCA enforcement decisions
انطلق في رحلة تحويلية إلى عالم إتقان القيادة عالية الجودة. تم تصميم هذه الدورة بدقة لتمكين المتعلمين بالمعرفة والمهارات الأساسية المطلوبة للقيادة بفعالية في سياقات إدارة الجودة.
مقدمة لقيادة الجودة: اكتساب فهم عميق للمبادئ التي تقوم عليها قيادة الجودة. استكشاف المفاهيم والنظريات الأساسية التي تحدد دور قائد الجودة داخل المنظمة. اكتشف كيف يمكن للقيادة الفعالة أن تؤثر وتدفع التحسين المستمر في معايير الجودة.
المهارات الأساسية لقادة الجودة: تطوير المهارات الحاسمة اللازمة لقيادة الجودة الناجحة. تعزيز قدرات الاتصال لديك لنقل الرؤى والاستراتيجيات لتحسين الجودة بشكل فعال. شحذ تقنيات حل المشكلات لديك لمواجهة التحديات ببراعة وتحسين العمليات. اكتساب القدرة على إلهام وتحفيز الفرق نحو تحقيق أهداف الجودة.
العوامل الرئيسية لقيادة الجودة الناجحة: التعمق في العوامل الحاسمة التي تساهم في تحقيق التميز في قيادة الجودة واستدامته. تعلم استراتيجيات لتعزيز ثقافة الجودة داخل مؤسستك. استكشف أفضل الممارسات للاستفادة من التكنولوجيا والرؤى المستندة إلى البيانات لدفع مبادرات التحسين المستمر. فهم أهمية القيادة الأخلاقية وأثرها على النزاهة التنظيمية والسمعة.
تم تصميم هذه الدورة للقادة والمديرين والمهنيين الطموحين الذين يسعون إلى رفع قدراتهم في إدارة الجودة. سواء كنت تتطلع إلى تطوير حياتك المهنية أو تعزيز تأثيرك التنظيمي، فإن "إتقان قيادة الجودة" يزودك بالأدوات والرؤى اللازمة للنجاح في بيئات العمل الديناميكية.
مقدمة لقيادة الجودة
المهارات الأساسية لقادة الجودة
العوامل الرئيسية لقيادة الجودة الناجحة
يقدم هذا المقرر استكشافًا متعمقًا للقيادة الإستراتيجية، مع التركيز على المهارات والصفات اللازمة لتوجيه المؤسسات نحو النجاح على المدى الطويل. سوف يتعلم الطلاب كيفية تطوير رؤية استراتيجية، وإلهام وتحفيز الفرق، وتنمية السمات الرئيسية للفرق الناجحة. تغطي الدورة:
تعريف القيادة الاستراتيجية
فهم ماهية القيادة الإستراتيجية وكيف تختلف عن أساليب القيادة الأخرى مثل القيادة المعاملاتية والتحويلية.
الصفات والمهارات الرئيسية
التأكيد على التفكير النقدي والاستراتيجي والتواصل الفعال والتحفيز الملهم. سوف يتعلم الطلاب كيفية تحليل المواقف بموضوعية، واتخاذ قرارات مستنيرة، وتوقع الاتجاهات المستقبلية.
تطوير الرؤية والخطة الإستراتيجية
تقنيات تحديد أهداف واضحة وقابلة للقياس، والتواصل الفعال مع الفرق، وتحديد المبادرات الرئيسية، وتكييف الخطط حسب الحاجة.
زراعة الفرق الناجحة
استراتيجيات تحديد أدوار ومسؤوليات واضحة، وتوفير الدعم والموارد اللازمة، وتعزيز ثقافة الفريق الإيجابية والتعاونية.
استدامة النجاح والتحسين المستمر
أساليب رصد وتقييم التقدم، والاحتفال بالنجاحات، وتعزيز ثقافة التعلم والنمو، والاستجابة للتحديات والفرص الجديدة.
الحفاظ على التركيز والزخم وسط التغيير
مناهج للحفاظ على القدرة على التكيف والمرونة، والبقاء على اطلاع باتجاهات الصناعة، وإعادة تقييم الأولويات بانتظام للحفاظ على توافق المنظمة مع الأهداف طويلة المدى.
ومن خلال مجموعة من المحاضرات ودراسات الحالة والتمارين العملية، سيكتسب الطلاب الأدوات والأفكار اللازمة ليصبحوا قادة استراتيجيين فعالين قادرين على توجيه مؤسساتهم عبر بيئات معقدة ومتغيرة.
تعريف القيادة الإستراتيجية ومقارنتها بأنواع القيادة الأخرى.
الصفات والمهارات الأساسية اللازمة للقيادة الإستراتيجية الفعالة، بما في ذلك التفكير النقدي والاستراتيجي، وكيفية إلهام وتحفيز الفرق لتحقيق الأهداف.
كيفية تطوير رؤية وخطة استراتيجية من خلال تحديد أهداف واضحة وقابلة للقياس، والتواصل الفعال مع الفريق، وتحديد المبادرات الرئيسية، والتكيف حسب الحاجة.
السمات الرئيسية للفرق الناجحة وكيفية تنمية هذه السمات في فريقك، بما في ذلك تحديد أدوار ومسؤوليات واضحة، وتوفير الدعم والموارد، وتعزيز ثقافة الفريق الإيجابية.
كيفية الحفاظ على النجاح والتحسين المستمر من خلال رصد وتقييم التقدم، والاحتفال بالنجاحات، وتعزيز ثقافة التعلم والنمو، والاستجابة للتحديات والفرص الجديدة.
أهمية الحفاظ على التركيز والزخم في مواجهة التغيير وكيفية تحقيق ذلك من خلال التكيف والمحور حسب الحاجة.
القيادة المبتكرة: قيادة التغيير والإبداع هي دورة تدريبية شاملة توفر فهمًا عمليًا ونظريًا لما يلزم لقيادة مؤسسة في مشهد الأعمال سريع التغير اليوم. تم تصميم هذه الدورة للأفراد الذين يتطلعون إلى أن يصبحوا قادة مبتكرين ويقودون التغيير داخل مؤسساتهم.
تغطي الدورة خمسة مواضيع رئيسية، تم تصميم كل منها لتزويد المشاركين بالمعرفة والمهارات والمواقف اللازمة لقيادة الابتكار والإبداع. وتشمل المواضيع تعريف القيادة المبتكرة، وبناء ثقافة الابتكار، وتعزيز التعاون والتنسيق، وتطوير رؤية استراتيجية، وتبني التغيير.
في نهاية هذه الدورة، سيكون لدى المشاركين فهم عميق لما يتطلبه الأمر ليصبحوا قادة مبتكرين وكيفية قيادة التغيير والإبداع داخل مؤسساتهم. ستتاح للمشاركين أيضًا الفرصة لوضع معارفهم الجديدة موضع التنفيذ من خلال التمارين العملية ودراسات الحالة.
- المعلم: Jessica Frankianson
كيفية تحديد وفهم القيادة المبتكرة، والصفات والمهارات الأساسية اللازمة لتكون قائداً فعالاً.
كيفية بناء ثقافة الابتكار داخل مؤسستك، وأهمية تعزيز بيئة داعمة وشاملة.
كيفية تعزيز التعاون والتنسيق بين الموظفين، وفوائد الاستفادة من الإبداع الجماعي لفريقك.
عملية تطوير رؤية استراتيجية، بما في ذلك كيفية إجراء البحوث، وتحليل البيانات، وتوصيل رؤيتك لفريقك بشكل فعال.
كيفية تبني التغيير وإدارة مقاومة التغيير بشكل فعال، بما في ذلك أهمية تحمل المخاطر المحسوبة والتعلم من الفشل
مقدمة
ستتغير أسئلة وأساليب المقابلة مع كل مقابلة تذهب إليها. سيكون بعضها رسميًا والبعض الآخر قد يكون أكثر استرخاءً. ومع ذلك، هناك أسئلة يتم طرحها عادة في العديد من المقابلات.
ومن المفيد أن تأخذ الوقت الكافي للنظر في مجموعة من الأسئلة التي قد تطرح عليك، ومن خلال التفكير فيها مسبقًا، سيمنحك ذلك المزيد من الثقة في يوم المقابلة.
إذن لماذا تُطرح عليك هذه الأسئلة؟· لمعرفة ما إذا كان لديك المهارات والخبرة اللازمة للقيام بهذه المهمة
· للتحقق من حماسك وتحفيزك واهتمامك بالوظيفة - لماذا اخترت التقديم؟
· لمعرفة ما إذا كنت ستناسب بيئة العمل والموظفين.
لماذا يتم طرح الأسئلة عليك
مجموعة من الأسئلة الشائعة وكيف يمكنك الإجابة عليها
أسئلة المقابلة غير عادية
أسئلة يجب أن تفكر في طرحها على صاحب العمل المستقبلي
مقدمة
هناك إحصائيات مختلفة حول متوسط عدد المتقدمين لكل وظيفة، وتختلف هذه الإحصائيات بشكل كبير. يقول البعض أن هناك 115 متقدمًا لكل وظيفة شاغرة، والبعض الآخر يقول ما يصل إلى 270 متقدمًا.
يتلقى مديرو التوظيف مئات الطلبات لكل منصب مفتوح. سيختلف هذا وفقًا للمنظمات والصناعة التي تهتم بها. النقطة الأساسية هي أنك ستواجه الكثير من المنافسة.
هذه في النهاية لعبة أرقام - كم عدد الطلبات التي تقدمها، وكم عدد الأشخاص الذين تقابلهم في مجال عملك، وكم عدد مقابلات العمل التي أجريتها؟ إذا كانت الإجابة على هذا السؤال "ليست كثيرة"، فأنت لست وحدك.
قد تعتقد أنك المرشح المثالي لوظيفة معينة، ولكن هناك عددًا من الأسباب التي قد تجعل مديري التوظيف لا يتصلون بك لإجراء المقابلات.احتمالات الحصول على مقابلة
مراجعة طلباتك
أنظمة تتبع التوظيف
اتباع التعليمات
التهجئة والقواعد اللغوية
الشبكات
الملف الشخصي / البيان الشخصي
أفضل طريقة للتعامل مع المقابلة هي الاستعداد. ستغطي هذه الدورة طرق الاستعداد لتحقيق نتيجة ناجحة.
مقدمة
إذا تمت دعوتك لإجراء مقابلة، فيجب عليك قضاء بعض الوقت في البحث عن المنظمة؛ سيعطيك هذا الثقة إذا تم طرح أي أسئلة عليك حول ما يفعلونه.
فيما يلي بعض الطرق التي يمكنك من خلالها جمع معلومات عن الشركة:· المنشورات التجارية أو مقالات المجلات
· البحث على الإنترنت – هل لديهم موقع على شبكة الإنترنت؟
· وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي – هل لديهم صفحة على الفيسبوك؟ هل هم على LinkedIn؟
· يمكنك الاتصال هاتفيًا وطلب حزمة معلومات إذا كان ذلك مناسبًا
سوف تتعلم
- البحث في المنظمة
- التخطيط لرحلتك
- خلق الصورة الصحيحة
سنغطي في هذه الدورة تحديات ما يجب القيام به بعد المقابلة والأشياء التي يجب مراعاتها بغض النظر عن نتيجة المقابلة.
مقدمة
لقد أكملت مقابلتك، رائع! إن الوصول إلى الجانب الآخر يخفف التوتر حقًا، لكن تذكر أنه لا يزال لديك المزيد لتفكر فيه وتفعله. ستحتاج إلى التفكير فيما يجب عليك فعله إذا لم تكن ناجحًا، أو حتى إذا كنت كذلك، فهل الوظيفة مناسبة لك؟
مهما كانت النتيجة، أثناء انتظارك من المهم الاستمرار في التقدم للحصول على فرص عمل أخرى.
سوف تتعلم
- التواصل مع صاحب العمل بعد المقابلة
- ماذا تفعل إذا كنت ناجحا
- ماذا تفعل إذا لم تنجح
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على يوم المقابلة، وأحسنت إذا كنت قد وصلت إلى يوم المقابلة. ستساعد هذه الجلسة المليئة بالتلميحات والنصائح في جعل التجربة برمتها أقل إرهاقًا.
مقابلات العمل مرهقة وغير عصبية. للحد من هذا التوتر والقلق من المهم أن تشعر بالاستعداد. يتراوح الإعداد من ممارسة العرض التقديمي الخاص بك إلى التأكد من أنك تأكل وتشرب بشكل مناسب.
في يوم المقابلة، حاول أن تكون مسترخيًا ومستعدًا. سنستكشف خلال هذه الجلسة طرقًا لضمان إجراء مقابلة سلسة.
القائمون على المقابلة
التحضير في اليوم
افعل ولا تفعل في المقابلة
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على معنى التواجد على وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي وسبب أهميته في بحثك عن وظيفة. هذه الدورة مناسبة للجميع.
مقدمة
إن تواجدك على وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي هو كيفية نشر المحتوى والتفاعل مع الآخرين على الإنترنت. يتضمن ذلك عدد مرات النشر ونوع المحتوى المنشور ومستويات التفاعل على حسابات الوسائط الاجتماعية الخاصة بك.
سواء كان لديك تواجد على وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي أم لا، ومهما كان شعورك حيال ذلك، فإن وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي موجودة لتبقى وقد أثرت على سوق التوظيف.
ماذا يعني لك التواجد على وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي؟ اكتب أفكارك. توفر لك وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي فرصة للإعلان عن نفسك، وتساعدك في العثور على فرص عمل، وتسمح لأصحاب العمل برؤية ما هو أبعد من سيرتك الذاتية، وتوفر لك فرصة للتعرف على الشركات واتجاهات الصناعة.
سوف تتعلم
- افهم أهمية التواجد على وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي عند البحث عن وظيفة
- التعرف على بعض منصات التواصل الاجتماعي المختلفة
- فهم كيفية استخدام وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على سوق العمل الخفي وكيفية جعله مناسبًا لك أثناء بحثك عن عمل. هذه الدورة مناسبة للجميع.
مقدمة
يُستخدم مصطلح "سوق العمل الخفي" لوصف الوظائف التي لا يتم نشرها عبر الإنترنت أو الإعلان عنها. يمكن لأصحاب العمل اختيار الامتناع عن نشر الوظائف لأسباب مختلفة. على سبيل المثال، قد لا يكون لديهم المال اللازم للإعلان أو قد يرغبون في جذب المرشحين من خلال جهات الاتصال في قطاعهم.
وعلى الرغم من وصفها بالمخفية، إلا أنه لا يزال من الممكن التعرف على هذه الوظائف. يتم اكتشاف العديد من الفرص من خلال التواصل مع الآخرين بدلاً من طرق التوظيف التقليدية.
سوف تتعلم
- فهم ما هو سوق العمل الخفي
- تعرف على كيفية الوصول إلى سوق العمل الخفي
- اعرف كيف يمكن لسوق العمل المخفي أن يناسبك
مقدمة
دعونا معرفة ما هي المهارات التي لديك. ما هي المعدات التي يمكنك استخدامها، مثل الكمبيوتر أو أدوات اللحام؟ ما هي طرق العمل التي تجيدها، مثل التحدث مع الآخرين أو التخطيط أو تعدد المهام؟جميع المهارات مفيدة عند البحث عن وظيفة جديدة، ولكن بعض المهارات تحظى بتقدير كبير من قبل أصحاب العمل. فيما يلي بعض المعلومات الإضافية حول مجموعات المهارات الأكثر طلبًا.
التواصل : الاستماع والتحدث والكتابة. يريد أصحاب العمل أشخاصًا يمكنهم تفسير ما يقوله الآخرون بدقة وتنظيم أفكارهم والتعبير عنها بوضوح.
العمل بروح الفريق الواحد: تتضمن العديد من الوظائف العمل في مجموعة واحدة أو أكثر. يريد أصحاب العمل شخصًا يمكنه إبراز أفضل ما في الآخرين.
مهارات حل المشكلات: يريد أصحاب العمل أشخاصًا يمكنهم استخدام الإبداع والتفكير والخبرات السابقة لتحديد المشكلات وحلها بفعالية.
ادارة شخصية: القدرة على تخطيط وإدارة المهام والمهام المتعددة وتحديد الأولويات والتكيف مع الظروف المتغيرة ومهام العمل.
فعالية التعامل مع الآخرين: عادةً ما يلاحظ أصحاب العمل ما إذا كان الموظف يمكنه التواصل مع زملاء العمل وبناء علاقات مع الآخرين في المنظمة.
محو الأمية الحاسوبية أو التقنية: على الرغم من أن أصحاب العمل يتوقعون توفير التدريب على البرامج الخاصة بالوظيفة، إلا أنهم يتوقعون أيضًا أن يتقن الموظفون مهارات الكمبيوتر الأساسية.
القيادة أو الإدارة: تعد القدرة على تحمل المسؤولية وإدارة زملائك في العمل، إذا لزم الأمر، سمة مرحب بها. يبحث معظم أصحاب العمل عن علامات الصفات القيادية.
الكفاءة في القراءة والرياضيات: تتطلب جميع الوظائف تقريبًا القدرة على قراءة التعليمات وفهمها وإجراء العمليات الحسابية الأساسية.
سوف تتعلم
- تعرف على كيفية تحديد المهارات التي لديك
- فهم المهارات القابلة للتحويل
- معرفة كيفية استخدام المهارات القابلة للتحويل في الممارسة العملية
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة التدريبية على ماهية لوحة الوظائف عبر الإنترنت وكيف يمكن أن تكون مفيدة لك في عملية البحث عن وظيفة. هذه الدورة مناسبة للجميع.
مقدمة
لوحة الوظائف هي موقع ويب يتعامل بشكل خاص مع التوظيف أو الوظائف. ربما سمعتهم يطلق عليهم مواقع العمل، أو بوابات العمل، أو مواقع العمل، أو مواقع التوظيف. يمكن لأصحاب العمل نشر عروض العمل عندما يكون لديهم منصب يحتاج إلى شغله. يمكن للباحثين عن عمل البحث في هذه المواقع للعثور على وظيفة يتم الإعلان عنها والتقدم إليها.
يمكن أن تكون لوحات الوظائف، وهي نسخة إلكترونية من إعلانات الوظائف المنتشرة في الصحف، أداة ممتازة للبحث عن الوظائف. من لوحات الوظائف الوطنية الضخمة إلى لوحات الوظائف المتخصصة التي تديرها المنشورات الصناعية، يمكن أن تساعدك لوحات الوظائف في الوصول إلى الآلاف من أصحاب العمل والقائمين بالتوظيف.
تعرف على ما هي لوحة الوظائف عبر الإنترنت
تعرف على فوائد استخدام لوحة الوظائف عبر الإنترنت
فهم كيفية استخدام لوحة الوظائف عبر الإنترنت
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على أنواع مختلفة من السيرة الذاتية وكيفية جعلها مناسبة لك، بالإضافة إلى نصائح للمقابلة. هذه الدورة مناسبة للجميع.
مقدمة
اكتب أفكارك. يمكنك تضمين الأسباب التي تجعلك تمتلك سيرة ذاتية، أو بعض الأشياء التي قد تتوقع تضمينها في سيرتك الذاتية.
يمكن للسيرة الذاتية أن تجعلك تفكر في الكثير من الأشياء، لأنها وثيقة مهمة بالنسبة لك في بحثك عن وظيفة. كان بإمكانك أن تكتب الكثير من الأشياء. بعض الكلمات التي ربما تكون قد كتبتها يمكن أن تشمل؛· الدور الوظيفي
· تمرين
· تاريخ العمل
· تفاصيلي
· عنوان
· قصتي
· تعليم
· اسم
· خبرة
· الانطباع الأول
سوف تتعلم
- فهم الأنواع المختلفة من السيرة الذاتية
- تعرف على كيفية جعل السيرة الذاتية مناسبة لك
- تعرف على كيفية الاستعداد للمقابلة
ترتبط الإدارة الجيدة للموظفين بانخفاض معدل دوران الموظفين وزيادة الإنتاجية ونجاح الأعمال.
يعرف المديرون الفعالون كيفية تحفيز موظفيهم والتواصل معهم. كما أنهم يفهمون التزاماتهم القانونية ويتعاملون بسرعة مع أي مشاكل تنشأ في مكان العمل.
يعد التواصل مع موظفيك جزءًا مهمًا من دورك كمدير. يمكن أن يساعد التواصل الواضح الموظفين على فهم واجباتهم وتوقعاتك. الموظفون المتحمسون ضروريون لنجاح الأعمال التجارية. هناك عدد من الالتزامات القانونية التي يتعين عليك الالتزام بها كمدير أو صاحب عمل.
يمكن أن تكون المشاكل المتعلقة بالموظفين معقدة. أنت بحاجة إلى مهارات تواصل ومهارات شخصية قوية لتحديد المشكلة ومناقشتها وحلها.
ستساعدك هذه الدورة على تطوير مهاراتك الإدارية في كل مجال من هذه المجالات الرئيسية، حتى تتمكن من بناء فريق عالي الأداء ومساعدة عملك على تحقيق أهدافه.
تتضمن هذه الدورة الموارد التالية التي يمكنك تنزيلها
- دليل صاحب العمل لحل المشكلات في مكان العمل
- دليل أفضل ممارسات العمل العادل لأمين المظالم
- إنشاء رؤية عمل (حكومة كوينزلاند)
التواصل الفعال
لماذا يهم الدافع
الإمتثال لقوانين مكان العمل
كيفية إدارة المشاكل الشائعة
التوظيف هو قرار مهم لعملك. النهج الصحيح يمكن أن يفيد مكان عملك ويوفر لك الوقت والمال.
التوظيف ليس حدثًا واحدًا، بل هو عملية. سيساعدك فهم كل خطوة في العملية على الحصول على أفضل النتائج لعملك.
ستزودك هذه الدورة بإرشادات عامة حول عملية التخطيط واختيار أفضل المتقدمين وتثبيت الموظف الجديد. للحصول على مشورة ومساعدة محددة، اتصل بجمعية أصحاب العمل أو المستشار القانوني.
تتضمن هذه الدورة التدريبية الموارد والقوالب والروابط المجانية عبر الإنترنت لمزيد من المعلومات التي يمكنك تنزيلها.
- نموذج الوصف الوظيفي
- نموذج إعلان عن وظيفة
- نموذج فحص الهاتف
- نموذج التحقق من المرجع
- رسالة إلى المتقدمين غير الناجحين
- قائمة التحقق التعريفي
- نموذج اتفاقية الأداء
قد تؤثر التغييرات في قانون العمل العادل المتعلقة بالموظفين العرضيين على هذه الدورة. نحن نقوم بمراجعة المعلومات الواردة في هذه الدورة في ضوء هذه التغييرات. نحن نشجعك على التحقق مرة أخرى هنا للحصول على التحديثات.
فهم خطوات عملية التوظيف
قرر ما إذا كان تعيين موظف جديد هو الخيار الأفضل بالنسبة لك
فهم استحقاقات الموظف والتزاماتك
استقطاب أفضل المتقدمين وإجراء المقابلات
اختر المرشح الأنسب وقدم له عرض عمل
استقطاب الموظفين وتطوير مهاراتهم والتمسك بالأداء القوي
تعني المرونة في مكان العمل أن يقوم أصحاب العمل والموظفين باتخاذ الترتيبات التي تناسبهم. وهذا يساعد الموظفين على الحفاظ على التوازن بين العمل والحياة ويمكنهم تحسين إنتاجية العمل وكفاءته.
هناك أنواع عديدة من ترتيبات العمل المرنة. وقد تنطوي على تغييرات في متى وأين وكيف يتم العمل. وقد تكون مؤقتة أو مستمرة أو لفترة محددة.
ستساعدك هذه الدورة على فهم الأسباب التي تجعل ترتيبات العمل المرنة مفيدة لشركتك. فهو يوضح التزاماتك القانونية ويوضح لك كيفية التفاوض وإدارة المرونة بحيث تناسبك أنت وموظفيك.
هناك العديد من الأمثلة على أدوار العمل المجدولة المرنة، وتشمل بعض الحالات ما يلي:
- منح الموظفين القدرة على تصميم قوائمهم الخاصة مع إمكانية الوصول عن بعد من خلال تطبيقات إعداد القوائم ومبادلة المناوبات
- أوقات البدء والانتهاء مرنة
- الجمع بين الأدوار ومشاركتها، على سبيل المثال: أربعة أيام في دور تنفيذي ويوم واحد في دور يسمح بالعمل عن بعد.
تتضمن هذه الدورة روابط إلى الموارد التالية
ملصق المرونة في مكان العمل
نموذج طلب/استجابة المرونة
دليل أفضل الممارسات - ترتيبات العمل المرنة
دليل أفضل الممارسات - استخدام اتفاقيات المرونة الفردية
دليل تطوير حالة الأعمال لتحقيق المرونة (Wgea)
مجموعة أدوات مرونة المدير (Wgea)
تطوير سياسة ترتيبات العمل المرنة (Wgea)
- المعلم: Stewart Tea
تعلم ما هي المرونة
من يستطيع أن يطلب المرونة؟
أنواع ترتيبات العمل المرنة
فائدة المرونة للأعمال
باعتبارك مستشار أعمال (على سبيل المثال: محاسب، أو محاسب، أو متخصص في كشوف المرتبات، أو مستشار في مكان العمل)، فإنك لا تحتاج إلى أن تكون خبيرًا في العلاقات في مكان العمل لإضافة قيمة لعملائك - ولكن عليك أن تكون على دراية بالقضايا المشتركة ومعرفة أين تجد المعلومات الصحيحة.
امنح العملاء النصيحة الصحيحة بشأن الأجور وحفظ السجلات وغيرها من المشكلات الشائعة في مكان العمل.
ابحث عن موارد مجانية عبر الإنترنت لك ولعملائك
تحديد ومناقشة المشاكل مع العملاء
مساعدة العملاء في الاستجابة للتدقيق أو التحقيق
إدارة المخاطر الخاصة بك والمسؤولية.
توفر هذه الدورة إرشادات عامة حول قوانين مكان العمل لأصحاب الامتياز.
باعتبارك صاحب حق الامتياز، من الضروري أن يكون لديك فهم للإجراءات التي يمكنك اتخاذها لتشجيع الامتثال في شبكتك للمساعدة في حماية أعمالك وإدارتها.
تهدف هذه الدورة إلى مساعدتك على فهم التزاماتك في مكان العمل والامتثال لها باعتبارك صاحب الامتياز. ومع ذلك، فإن إكمال هذه الدورة لا يضمن أنك تفي بجميع التزاماتك. قد ترغب في الحصول على مشورة قانونية مستقلة أو مشورة متخصصة أخرى لضمان الامتثال لقانون العمل العادل.تعلم وافهم التزاماتك بموجب قوانين مكان العمل ومدونة قواعد سلوك الامتياز
حدد الحالات التي قد تكون فيها مسؤولاً عن مخالفات صاحب الامتياز
حدد الإجراءات المحددة التي يمكنك اتخاذها لتعزيز الامتثال لقوانين مكان العمل في شبكة الامتياز الخاصة بك
تعرف على كيفية استخدام الموارد المجانية عبر الإنترنت لك ولأصحاب الامتياز
قم بإنتاج "خطة عمل" أفضل لشركتك لمساعدة شبكتك على تحسين ممارساتها في مكان العمل.
توفر هذه الدورة إرشادات عامة حول أساسيات مكان العمل لأصحاب الامتياز.
من المهم أن يكون كل من أصحاب الامتياز وأصحاب الامتياز على دراية بالتزاماتهم تجاه الموظفين. نحن هنا لمساعدتك على فهم التزاماتك وتزويدك بالمعلومات والموارد التي يمكنك استخدامها للقيام بذلك بشكل صحيح.
باعتبارك شركة حاصلة على الامتياز، يجب أن تكون على دراية بالتزاماتك في مكان العمل وأين يمكنك طلب الدعم المتاح لك، للمساعدة في حماية أعمالك وإدارتها.
تتضمن هذه الدورة التدريبية الموارد المجانية عبر الإنترنت التي يمكنك تنزيلها وتقييم الممارسات مجهولة المصدر في مكان عملك الحالي وإنشاء إمكانية الوصول إلى الدعم المتاح لك باعتبارك أصحاب الامتياز والشركات.
افهم التزاماتك بموجب قوانين مكان العمل
التعرف على مخاطر عدم الامتثال لعملك
حدد الإجراءات المحددة التي يمكنك اتخاذها للمساعدة في ضمان التزامك بقوانين مكان العمل
قم بتكييف "خطة العمل" لشركتك للمساعدة في تحسينها إذا تم تحديد الثغرات
يمكن أن يكون بدء عمل جديد وقتًا مثيرًا. ويمكن أيضًا أن يكون الأمر مثيرًا للأعصاب قليلاً.
يتمتع جميع الموظفين في النظام الوطني لعلاقات مكان العمل بالحماية بموجب حقوق قانونية معينة. وهي تغطي أشياء مثل:
الساعات التي تعمل فيها
الأجر الذي تحصل عليه
فترات الراحة والإجازة التي يمكنك أخذها
الطريقة التي تعامل بها في العمل.
من غير القانوني أن يمنحك صاحب العمل أقل من الحد الأدنى من حقوقك - حتى لو كنت قد وقعت عقد عمل يوافق على أقل من ذلك.
ستساعدك هذه الدورة القصيرة على الانطلاق بأفضل بداية ممكنة في العمل. سوف تساعدك على فهم:
ما هي حقوقك
ما هي الأسئلة التي يجب طرحها
أنواع السلوك المتوقع في مكان العمل.
ستوفر لك هذه الدورة إرشادات عامة حول بدء وظيفة جديدة. للحصول على مشورة ومساعدة محددة، اتصل بـ Fair Work Ombudsman أو نقابتك.
أشياء يجب أن تسألها عن وظيفتك الجديدة
اعرف حقوقك في العمل
تعرف على ما هو متوقع
مكان العمل المتنوع والشامل مفيد للأعمال. يمكن أن يساعدك على تحسين الإنتاجية وتقليل معدل الدوران وتوفير المال. كما أنه يقلل من خطر حدوث التمييز.
ستوضح لك هذه الدورة كيفية جعل عملك مكانًا يتم فيه تقدير الاختلافات مثل العمر والجنس والعرق بشكل حقيقي. فهو يوضح التزاماتك القانونية لمنع التمييز ويقدم النصائح حول كيفية التعامل مع الشكاوى بشكل مناسب في حالة ظهورها.
القوى العاملة المتنوعة هي التي توظف جميع أنواع الناس. يمكن أن تكون جميع الشركات متنوعة، بغض النظر عن الصناعة التي تعمل فيها أو نوع العمل الذي تقوم به.
يشير التنوع في مكان العمل إلى تنوع الاختلافات بين موظفيك.
- التعرف على الاختلافات بين موظفيك في العمر والجنس والعرق واللغة والتعليم والدين والجنسية والهوية الثقافية والحالة العائلية والتوجه الجنسي والإعاقة
- فهم وجهات النظر والأساليب والمواهب المتنوعة التي تجلبها هذه الاختلافات إلى مكان عملك.
تتضمن هذه الدورة الموارد التالية التي يمكنك تنزيلها:
ملصق التنوع والشمول
قالب سياسة التمييز والتحرش في مكان العمل
إرشادات الممارسات الجيدة لعمليات الشكاوى الداخلية
دليل أفضل ممارسات العمل العادل لأمين المظالم.
ما هو التنوع والشمول؟
فوائد مكان العمل المتنوع والشامل
كيفية تعزيز التنوع والشمول
ستزودك هذه الدورة بالإرشادات حول تعزيز الأداء الجيد في مكان عملك، ومعالجة ضعف الأداء في حالة حدوثه. للحصول على مشورة ومساعدة محددة، اتصل بجمعية أصحاب العمل أو المستشار القانوني. على الرغم من عدم وجود التزام تشريعي بإدارة الأداء في مكان العمل بطريقة معينة، فإن هذه الدورة ستقدم خطوات عملية لمساعدتك في الحصول على أفضل ما لدى موظفيك.
هناك العديد من الأسباب وراء ضعف أداء الموظف. تشمل الأسباب الشائعة ما يلي: عدم فهم ما هو متوقع، أو عدم وجود ردود فعل على الأداء، أو نقص المعرفة أو المهارات المطلوبة للقيام بالمهمة، أو الافتقار إلى الحافز الشخصي أو الثقة، أو انخفاض الروح المعنوية في مكان العمل، أو الاختلافات بين الأشخاص، أو سوء الفهم الثقافي. القضايا الشخصية مثل الضغوط الأسرية، والقضايا الصحية أو مشاكل المخدرات أو الكحول.
الروابط والموارد:
سيتم تزويدك بمجموعة أدوات توفر لك الموارد والروابط لمساعدتك في إدارة الأداء في مكان عملك، وهناك 12 مصدرًا يمكنك تنزيلها.
- قائمة مرجعية لتطبيق نظام الأداء
- نموذج اتفاقية الأداء
- نموذج خطة مناقشة مراجعة الأداء
- إدارة الأداء الضعيف – القائمة المرجعية للخطوات الأولية
- إدارة الأداء الضعيف - القائمة المرجعية للخطوات الرسمية
- نموذج خطة تحسين الأداء
- نموذج خطة اجتماع الأداء الضعيف
- نموذج خطاب الإنذار الأول/الثاني
- نموذج رسالة إنذار نهائي
- رمز الاستبعاد من معرض الأعمال الصغيرة وقائمة المراجعة
- نموذج إنهاء خطاب التوظيف
- نموذج خطاب إنهاء العمل - سوء سلوك جسيم.
تعزيز الأداء الجيد
معالجة ضعف الأداء
فهم القضايا القانونية ذات الصلة
تطلب السلطات من صاحب العمل أن يقوم بإعداد والاحتفاظ بسجلات معينة للموظفين تتعلق بالأجور وساعات العمل واستحقاقات الإجازة لمدة سبع سنوات.
يجب على أصحاب العمل الاحتفاظ بسجلات لساعات العمل لجميع الموظفين، بما في ذلك العمال بالقطعة.
إن اعتماد أفضل ممارسات حفظ السجلات يجعل من السهل تتبع تفاصيل الموظف وتحديد أخطاء الرواتب والحفاظ على سير العمل بكفاءة. كما أنه يساعد على تجنب الغرامات لفعل الشيء الخطأ.
للموظفين الحاليين والسابقين الحق في الوصول إلى سجلاتهم الخاصة. ويجب أيضًا السماح للمفتشين بالوصول إلى سجلات الموظفين، ويجوز لمسؤولي النقابات أيضًا الوصول إلى السجلات والمعلومات الشخصية في ظروف معينة.
ما هي التزامات حفظ السجلات؟
ما هي المعلومات التي يجب تقديمها والاحتفاظ بها في سجلات الموظفين؟
ما هي التزامات قسيمة الدفع والمعلومات المضمنة؟
المبادئ التوجيهية لأفضل الممارسات لالتزامات حفظ السجلات
الأدوات المتاحة لمساعدتك على الوفاء بالتزاماتك
يتمتع معظم المديرين بعلاقات جيدة في العمل. ومع ذلك، حتى في أفضل أماكن العمل، يمكن أن تحدث خلافات. عندما يحدث هذا، فمن الأفضل معالجة المشكلة مبكرًا والتحدث عنها مع مديرك أو مشرفك.
ستساعد هذه الدورة المديرين على إعدادك لمحادثة صعبة في مكان العمل، وستقدم لك النصائح حول كيفية التعامل مع المحادثة بشكل جيد.
تذكر أنه إذا كان هناك خطأ ما، فإن معظم المديرين يفضلون حله بسرعة حتى يتمكن كل منكما من مواصلة العمل.
تتضمن هذه الدورة الأدلة والموارد التالية التي يمكنك تنزيلها. المحادثات الصعبة في مكان العمل - دورة المدير
خطوط إرشاد
لماذا لديك محادثة صعبة؟
كيفية الاستعداد لمحادثة صعبة
كيفية التعامل مع محادثة صعبة
إدارة عواطفك
بعد المحادثة
بعد أن غادرت مكان العمل
موارد
خطة المحادثة الخاصة بك
المحادثات الصعبة - الدليل الكامل.
يستعد للمحادثة
يشرح الوضع بوضوح
يستمع ويأخذ في الاعتبار وجهة نظر موظفه
يدير عواطفك وعواطف الموظف
يتفق على كيفية المضي قدما
إغلاق وتوثيق المحادثة.
يتمتع معظم الموظفين بعلاقات جيدة في العمل. ومع ذلك، حتى في أفضل أماكن العمل، يمكن أن تحدث خلافات. عندما يحدث هذا، فمن الأفضل معالجة المشكلة مبكرًا والتحدث عنها مع مديرك أو مشرفك.
ستساعد هذه الدورة الموظف على إعدادك لمحادثة صعبة في مكان العمل، وستقدم لك النصائح حول كيفية التعامل مع المحادثة بشكل جيد.
تذكر أنه إذا كان هناك خطأ ما، فإن معظم المديرين يفضلون حله بسرعة حتى يتمكن كل منكما من مواصلة العمل.
تتضمن هذه الدورة الأدلة والموارد التالية التي يمكنك تنزيلها.
خطوط إرشاد
لماذا لديك محادثة صعبة؟
كيفية الاستعداد لمحادثة صعبة
كيفية التعامل مع محادثة صعبة
إدارة عواطفك
بعد المحادثة
بعد أن غادرت مكان العمل
موارد
خطة المحادثة الخاصة بك
المحادثات الصعبة - الدليل الكامل.
الاستعداد للمحادثة
اشرح الوضع بوضوح
استمع وأخذ وجهة نظر مديرك بعين الاعتبار
إدارة عواطفك
الاتفاق على كيفية المضي قدما
أغلق المحادثة.
أساسيات قابلية التوظيف - التكيف مع التغيير: ستفهم لماذا تعد القدرة على التكيف مع التغيير مهارة توظيف أساسية.
أساسيات قابلية التوظيف - التفكير النقدي والإبداعي: إن كونك مفكرًا نقديًا ومبدعًا أمر ضروري في مكان العمل اليوم. كما أنه أمر بالغ الأهمية لنجاح حياتك المهنية، بغض النظر عن مجالك أو منصبك. يبحث أصحاب العمل عن موظفين يمكنهم حل المشكلات بطريقة إبداعية للعثور على الإجابات الأفضل لكل من الموظفين والشركة.
نموذج التغيير - كيفية التغيير: يفكر المتعلمون في مواقفهم الخاصة تجاه التغيير ويدرجونها بالترتيب الذي قد يواجهونها به. وفي تمرين منفصل، قاموا بتحديد أولويات الإجراءات التي قد تتخذها المجموعة عندما تواجه التغيير في مكان العمل.
التعامل مع التغيير: سيتعرف المتعلم على طرق التعامل مع الضغوط المرتبطة بالتغيير.
تعلم التقنيات والقدرة المستخدمة للتكيف مع تغيير مهارات التوظيف
تعلم طرق التفكير النقدي والإبداعي
فهم الأساليب التي استخدمها المتعلمون للتفكير في مواقفهم تجاه التغيير.
فهم أهمية تحديد طرق التعامل مع الضغوط المرتبطة بالتغيير.
فهم العقبات التي تسبب المشاكل والتغييرات
تعلم تقنيات التفكير النقدي والإبداعي
السلامة في مكان العمل: سيفهم المتعلم أهمية السلامة في مكان العمل وطرق إنشاء بيئة عمل آمنة والحفاظ عليها.
تقرير الحادث: يكتب المتعلمون وصفًا لحادث في مكان العمل ويقيمون البيانات من حيث الموضوعية.
معدات الحماية الشخصية (PPE): استكشف الأنواع المختلفة من معدات الحماية الشخصية، التي تحميك من المخاطر في مكان العمل
الدليل التنظيمي: لاحظ عدم التنظيم في بيئة المكتب واختر الحلول للمشاكل كما لو كنت تلعب لعبة اللوحة "الفكرة".
استخدام طفايات الحريق: بنهاية هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستعرف كيفية فهم الأنواع المختلفة من طفايات الحريق واستخدامها وصيانتها.
اختيار طفاية الحريق المناسبة: اكتشف أنواع الحرائق المختلفة وطفايات الحريق المستخدمة لكل نوع.
اتباع التعليمات: سيفهم المتعلم أهمية اتباع التعليمات.
فهم أهمية السلامة في مكان العمل
فهم العقبات التي تسبب مشاكل تتعلق بالسلامة
تعلم كيفية كتابة تقرير حادث مكان العمل
التعرف على عملية إعداد المكتب واختيار الحلول للمشكلات
اكتشف الأنواع المختلفة لمعدات الحماية الشخصية
فهم واستكشاف الاستخدام/الاختيار، وصيانة أنواع مختلفة من طفايات الحريق.
فهم أهمية اتباع التعليمات.
يشير التنوع إلى حقيقة واضحة في حياة الإنسان، وهي أن هناك العديد من الأنواع المختلفة من الناس، ويشير معنى التنوع إلى وجود خصائص مختلفة في مكان عمل الأشخاص، وفكرة أن هذا التنوع يحفز الحيوية الثقافية والاقتصادية والاجتماعية ويحفز النشاط والحيوية. ابتكار. هذه الخصائص تجعل القوى العاملة فريدة من نوعها، مثل مهاراتنا وسلوكنا وسماتنا.
يتعين على المنظمات تنفيذ سياسات التنوع لإلهام واحترام ورفع جودة القوى العاملة.
الصور النمطية: في هذا النشاط التعليمي، سيفهم المستخدم كيف يمكن للإيمان بالقوالب النمطية الشائعة واستخدامها أن يعيق العمل معًا.
يختبر المتعلمون معرفتهم بالتركيبة السكانية في الولايات المتحدة والعالم. يتم توفير ردود فعل فورية.
تعلم التقنيات المطلوبة من المتعلمين لتنفيذ سياسات التنوع
فهم أهمية وجود خصائص مختلفة في مكان عمل الأشخاص
افهم كيف أن الإيمان بالقوالب النمطية واستخدامها يمكن أن يعيق العمل معًا.
فهم أهمية التنوع لإلهام واحترام ورفع جودة القوى العاملة.
مقدمة إلى الأخلاقيات : سيتعرف المتعلم على الأنواع الثلاثة العامة للأخلاقيات.
مدونة الأخلاقيات: في هذا الكائن التفاعلي، يحدد المتعلمون المشاعر والقيم التي تحفزهم والآخرين على تحمل مسؤولية تحسين الأخلاقيات في مكان العمل.
هذه الدورة سوف تأتي مع التطبيق
أفضل ممارسات أخلاقيات مكان العمل : سيتمكن المتعلم من التعرف على أفضل الممارسات المتعلقة بالأخلاقيات في مكان العمل.
قرارات المعضلة الأخلاقية: سوف يفهم المتعلم ماهية المعضلة الأخلاقية وكيفية اتخاذ القرار الأفضل عندما يواجه مجموعة من الخيارات التي قد لا تكون مقبولة أخلاقياً.
أخلاقيات مكان العمل (إنفاذ القواعد): سيساعد دليل الدراسة التفاعلي هذا الطلاب على تحديد العمليات الموصى بها لفرض القواعد على فريق العمل.
الأخلاقيات في مكان العمل: المجموعة 1: سيتعرف المتعلم على السلوك غير الأخلاقي في مكان العمل.
الأخلاقيات في مكان العمل: المجموعة 2: سيقوم المتعلم بتقييم سيناريوهات مكان العمل وتحديد السلوك الأخلاقي.
الأخلاقيات في بيئة التصنيع: سيكون المتعلم قادرًا على التعرف بدقة على القضايا الأخلاقية المطبقة الخاصة ببيئة التصنيع. تم توضيح معظم هذه القضايا في مدونات قواعد السلوك في مجال الأعمال والصناعة العامة.
يتضمن تطوير وعي تجاري أفضل فهم البيئة الخارجية ومكانة مؤسستك فيها. ومع ذلك، فإن هذه الدورة التدريبية المجانية، *الوعي التجاري*، تشجعك على النظر داخل مؤسستك والدور الخاص بك داخلها. ومن خلال اكتساب وجهات نظر مختلفة وتوسيع نطاق وجهات نظرك الحالية، يمكنك تعزيز وعيك التجاري بشكل كبير.
تركز هذه الدورة على البيئة الداخلية لمؤسستك، حيث تنظر إليها ككيان معقد مليء بالعلاقات والتفاعلات المتبادلة. سوف تقوم بالبناء على - وتقييم نقدي - لمفهوم "سلسلة القيمة" داخل مؤسستك. في حين أن "القيمة" أمر بالغ الأهمية للوعي التجاري، إلا أنها يتم إنشاؤها من خلال شبكة متصلة من الوكلاء بدلاً من سلسلة خطية بسيطة. ويعمل هؤلاء الوكلاء معًا على توليد القيمة المضافة للمؤسسة.
طوال الدورة، سوف تقوم بتطوير خرائط لمؤسستك وشبكة الاتصالات الخاصة بك، مما يساعدك على تحديد موقع نفسك ضمن هذه الصورة المعقدة. قد يمثل هذا التعقيد تحديات وعوائق أمام تطوير الوعي التجاري، ولكنه سيوفر أيضًا فهمًا أكثر ثراءً لمؤسستك. بحلول نهاية الدورة، سيكون لديك تقدير أفضل للقيمة التي يولدها عملك والمساهمات التي تقدمها لهذه القيمة، مما يضعك في حالة أكثر وعيًا تجاريًا.
- المعلم: Open University Open Learn
توضيح ما تقوم به المنظمة: القيمة التي تخلقها
تقدير الوضع الشخصي داخل المنظمة وكيفية ارتباط الآخرين به
ربط مفهوم سلسلة القيمة بسياق العمل الشخصي، مع الاعتراف بالعلاقات المتبادلة الأكثر تعقيدًا داخل المنظمة.
تركز هذه الدورة التدريبية عبر الإنترنت على تزويد المشرفين والمديرين وكبار القادة بالمهارات الأساسية لإدارة الفرق البعيدة بشكل فعال. سيتعلم المشاركون كيفية إنشاء فرق بعيدة، وتحديد توقعات واضحة، وتحسين استراتيجيات الاتصال، والحفاظ على الإنتاجية والتحفيز. إنه مصمم لأي شخص يدير فرقًا، سواء كانوا يعملون من المنزل، أو مكان عملهم المعتاد، أو عن بعد من مواقع مختلفة.
تعريف الفريق البعيد
اعتبارات عند إدارة فريق بعيد
إدارة الفرق البعيدة
الإنتاجية والتحفيز
Explore some of the things that you and others consider as British culture. You will look at how influences from around the world come together in many ways to make Britain's culture unique and varied..
Introduction
Although a small country today, Britain has in its history had links with other cultures from all over the world, in roles both as leaders and followers. This varied past gives Britain a diverse culture that has a wide range of different influences. Many of the traditions that are often considered to be British have their origins in other parts of the world. The list of things that make up British culture is infinitely long, and although there are definitely some iconic aspects to British life there cannot ever be a definitive list of everything. This is in itself an important part of being British, as it relates to the British value that everyone’s beliefs and preferences are a valid way to celebrate being British. We will explore some different ideas that people may associate with being typically British to learn where they come from and what part they play in modern British life.
تعرف على مجموعة من الأمثلة على الثقافة البريطانية
تعرف على المصطلحات المستخدمة للإشارة إلى أجزاء الجزر البريطانية
افهم عدد الثقافات الأخرى التي تجعل الثقافة البريطانية على ما هي عليه الآن
تعرف في هذه الدورة على قانون المساواة لعام 2010 وكيف يمنع التمييز. سوف تتعلم عن أنواع التمييز المختلفة التي يمكن أن تحدث وكيفية تحدي التمييز الذي تواجهه.
مقدمة
تم إنشاء قانون المساواة ليجمع بين العديد من التشريعات الموجودة مسبقًا والتي تم تصميمها لحماية الأشخاص من سوء المعاملة.
الغرض من قانون المساواة هو ضمان عدم تعرض الأشخاص للتمييز. إنه يحمي على وجه التحديد من تسع خصائص محمية، وهي الأشياء التي سيمتلكها جميع الناس بعضها أو كلهم.
يعد قانون المساواة أساسيًا لدعم القيم البريطانية المتمثلة في التسامح والاحترام المتبادل، فضلاً عن سيادة القانون والحرية الفردية.
سوف تتعلم
- فهم الغرض من قانون المساواة لعام 2010
- فهم الأنواع الرئيسية للتمييز
- تعرف على الخصائص التسع المحمية لقانون المساواة لعام 2010
- تعرف على أهمية تحدي التمييز
في هذه الدورة، ستتعرف على سيادة القانون، بدءًا من أصوله في الماجنا كارتا وحتى النظام القانوني الحالي. سوف تنظر في كيفية تطبيق سيادة القانون عليك.
مقدمة؛
المبدأ الأساسي لسيادة القانون هو أنه لا يوجد فرد أو منظمة فوق القانون. الجميع مسؤول عن الالتزام بالقواعد. هذا هو المبدأ الذي يحكمنا على المستوى الوطني ولكن يمكن رؤيته أيضًا على المستويات المحلية وحتى داخل مجموعات أصغر مثل المدرسة أو داخل فريق كرة القدم. عندما تلتزم بسيادة القانون فإنك توافق على أنك والجميع سوف يتبعون قواعد الدولة أو المؤسسة. في المملكة المتحدة، لدينا شبكة من الخدمات العامة التي تدعم سيادة القانون، بما في ذلك الشرطة والمحاكم والقضاة.وهذا يعني أن هناك عملية وإجراءات واضحة تمر بها أي جريمة أو شكوى حتى يتم دعم القانون. التظلم هو نزاع قام به فرد أو مجموعة، وعادةً ما يتم تحويله إلى شكوى رسمية.
وفي حين يمكن مساءلة الشرطة والجيش من قبل البرلمان، فإن المحاكم تعمل فوق ذلك لضمان امتثال الحكومة للقانون. هناك العديد من مستويات المحاكم في المملكة المتحدة، كل منها متاح لاستئناف قرارات المحاكم الأدنى منها. وهذا يحمي النظام من الخطأ.
فهم ما هي سيادة القانون
شرح المبادئ الأساسية لسيادة القانون
تعرف بشكل مختصر على كيفية عمل نظام المحاكم في المملكة المتحدة
اعرف لماذا يهمك
في هذه الدورة، تعرف على ما يجب فعله عندما لا يتم اتباع القيم البريطانية. سوف تستكشف الإبلاغ عن الجرائم، والاتصال بالجمعيات الخيرية للحصول على الدعم والحملات من أجل التغيير.
مقدمة
إن القيم البريطانية هي أساس الحياة اليومية في بريطانيا، وعندما يتبعها الجميع يمكننا جميعًا الاستمتاع بحياة منتجة وسعيدة. ومع ذلك، قد تصادف مواقف تقابل فيها أشخاصًا لا يتبعون القيم البريطانية ويسبب ذلك مشاكل لك أو لشخص تعرفه.
وفي أحيان أخرى قد تصادف أشخاصًا يقولون أو يفعلون أشياء لا تتفق معهم، لأنك تعتقد أنهم مخطئون أو ضارون.
تغطي هذه الدورة بعض الأشياء التي يمكنك القيام بها لمعالجة المشكلات التي قد تنشأ في مثل هذه المواقف، من خلال أساليب مثل التواصل مع الجمعيات الخيرية أو الهيئات الحكومية، أو من خلال النشاط السلمي والمثمر.
سوف تتعلم
- اعرف ما يجب عليك فعله إذا كنت تتعرض للتمييز أو المضايقة
- افهم كيفية الإبلاغ عن الجريمة إذا شاهدتها
- تعرف على ما هو النشاط وما يمكن استخدامه من أجله
- فهم أهمية الخلاف المحترم
في هذه الدورة، استكشف ماهية الخدمات العامة، مع النظر بشكل خاص في أمثلة مثل خدمات الطوارئ والخدمات الصحية الوطنية. سوف تفهم دورهم المهم في مجتمع المملكة المتحدة.
مقدمة
الخدمة العامة هي منظمة تمول من أموال دافعي الضرائب، وتقدم المساعدة للمواطنين في العديد من القطاعات المختلفة. الضريبة هي نظام تقوم فيه الدولة بجمع جزء من أجور جميع مواطنيها، عادة لإعادة استثمارها في فوائد الدولة.
يوجد في المملكة المتحدة العديد من هذه المنظمات، بما في ذلك هيئة الخدمات الصحية الوطنية، وخدمات الطوارئ، والمدارس والكليات، ومراكز العمل والاستشارات.
ونحن نشير بشكل جماعي إلى القطاع الذي توجد فيه الخدمات العامة باسم القطاع العام. وتقع معظم الإدارات والوظائف الحكومية في القطاع العام حيث يتم تمويلها من أموال دافعي الضرائب لصالح الجميع.
سوف تتعلم
- تعرف على بعض الخدمات العامة المختلفة في المملكة المتحدة
- فهم الدور الذي تلعبه الخدمات العامة في مجتمع المملكة المتحدة
- تعرف على سبب أهمية الخدمات العامة في المملكة المتحدة
- اعرف كيف يمكنك دعم عمل الخدمات العامة في المملكة المتحدة
في هذه الدورة سوف تستكشف الاحترام المتبادل والتسامح من خلال دراسة معنى التنوع وسبب أهميته لبريطانيا الحديثة. سوف تفهم سبب أهمية التسامح والاحترام بالنسبة لك وللجميع.
مقدمة
كل شخص مختلف، مع مجموعة من المعتقدات والآراء المختلفة التي تجعلنا ما نحن عليه. هناك عدد قليل جدًا من الأشخاص في العالم لديهم أفكار متطابقة حول كل شيء، وهذا جزء مما يخلق ثراء وحيوية المجتمع العالمي.
الاحترام المتبادل والتسامح يعني فهم أننا لا نشترك جميعًا في نفس المعتقدات والقيم. ويعني أيضًا السماح للجميع بالحصول على أفكارهم الخاصة دون محاولة فرض أفكارك على أي شخص آخر. إن القدرة على احترام أفكار الآخرين أمر مهم في بناء الصدق والثقة والتواصل والرحمة.
سوف تتعلم
- تعرف على معنى الاحترام المتبادل والتسامح
- فهم بعض الطرق التي تتنوع بها المملكة المتحدة
- تعرف على ماهية الهجرة وكيف تساهم في التنوع في المملكة المتحدة
- افهم أهمية الاحترام والتسامح
في هذه الدورة، اكتشف كيف يمكنك إحداث فرق في مجتمعك من خلال إجراءات مثل جمع التبرعات والحملات والعمل التطوعي.
مقدمة
إن إحداث فرق في مدرستك أو كليتك أو مجتمعك هو ببساطة التصرف بطريقة تعود بالنفع على من حولك.
يمكن أن يكون هذا أمرًا أساسيًا مثل تقديم مثال جيد للأنشطة الأكثر تعقيدًا مثل تنظيم الأحداث الخيرية. وقد يعني ذلك أيضًا التبرع بوقتك أو أموالك أو بضائعك لدعم قضية جيدة.
يمكن أن يكون إحداث الفرق عملاً لمرة واحدة، أو شيئًا تفعله بانتظام. كل عمل إيجابي، مهما كان صغيرا، يساعد على إحداث فرق.
سوف تتعلم
- تعرف على معنى إحداث الفرق
- افهم بعض الأشياء التي يمكنك القيام بها لدعم مجتمعك
- تعرف على كيفية العثور على فرص التطوع القريبة منك
تعد هذه الدورة بمثابة مقدمة للقيم البريطانية الأربع الرئيسية وكيفية ارتباطها بك في حياتك اليومية.
مقدمة
القيم هي مبادئ أو معايير أو صفات يحظى باحترام كبير لدى فرد أو مجموعة من الأشخاص.
هذه القيم توجه الطريقة التي نعيش بها حياتنا والقرارات التي نتخذها. يمكن تعريف القيمة على أنها شيء نعتز به، تلك الأشياء أو الصفات التي نعتبرها ذات قيمة.
تتشكل "القيمة" عادةً من اعتقاد معين يرتبط بقيمة فكرة أو نوع من السلوك. قد يرى بعض الناس قيمة كبيرة في إنقاذ الغابات المطيرة في العالم. ومع ذلك، فإن الشخص الذي يعتمد على قطع الأشجار في الغابة في وظيفته، لا يجوز له أن يضع نفس القيمة على الغابة مثل الشخص الذي يريد حفظها.
سوف تتعلم
- افهم ما هي القيم وحدد بعض القيم التي تمتلكها
- تعرف على معنى مصطلح "القيم البريطانية".
- حدد ما هي القيم البريطانية الأساسية
- تعرف على ما تعنيه القيم البريطانية بالنسبة لك
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على الحرية الفردية، مع التركيز بشكل خاص على قانون حقوق الإنسان لعام 1998 وكيف يحمي مجموعة واسعة من الحريات للجميع في المملكة المتحدة.
مقدمة
الحرية الفردية هي الحق في الاعتقاد والتصرف والتعبير عن نفسك بحرية طالما أنك تفعل ذلك في إطار القانون. وهذا يعني أنه بالنسبة لأي شيء لا يحكمه القانون، يمكنك اتخاذ خياراتك الخاصة بشأن الحياة.
على سبيل المثال، لا يمكنك اختيار السرقة من متجر أو مهاجمة شخص ما في الشارع، لأن هذه الأفعال ستكون غير قانونية. ومع ذلك، يمكنك اختيار ما ترتديه كل يوم، والموسيقى التي تحب الاستماع إليها، والمتاجر التي ترغب في التسوق فيها، والأطعمة التي ترغب في تناولها.
تتعلق الحرية الفردية بحماية حقوق الإنسان الأساسية للجميع حتى يتمكنوا من الاستمتاع بحياتهم بالطرق التي يرغبون فيها. الأمر كله يتعلق بالاختيار الحر.
سوف تتعلم
- فهم ما هي الحرية الفردية
- اشرح ما هو قانون حقوق الإنسان لعام 1998
- أعط أمثلة على الحريات التي تحميها الحرية الفردية
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على ماهية الديمقراطية وكيف تعمل في المملكة المتحدة. سوف تستكشف أنظمة الحكم المختلفة وتكتشف مدى أهمية الديمقراطية بالنسبة لك.
مقدمة
كلمة الديمقراطية تأتي من كلمتين يونانيتين؛ ديموس تعني عامة الناس و كراتوس تعني القوة.
تعريف الديمقراطية هو: "نظام حكم يضم جميع السكان أو جميع الأعضاء المؤهلين في الدولة". وهذا يعني أنه في ظل الديمقراطية، لديك الحق والمسؤولية في تقرير كيفية إدارة بلدك، وما هي القرارات التي يتم اتخاذها. في المجموعات الصغيرة، قد يعني هذا أن كل شخص لديه دور مباشر يلعبه في عملية صنع القرار. في مجموعة أكبر، مثل دولة ما، غالبًا ما يعني ذلك أن الناس ينتخبون ممثلين لهم للتحدث واتخاذ القرارات نيابة عنهم.
هناك طرق عديدة للحكم أو إدارة مجموعة من الناس. وبشكل عام، يمكن تعريفها جميعًا على أنها واحدة من خمسة أنواع. في بعض الأحيان، يأخذ نظام الحكم عناصر من أكثر من واحدة من هذه المجموعات لإنشاء نماذج هجينة، مثل الجمهورية الديمقراطية.
سوف تتعلم
- شرح أنظمة الحكم المختلفة
- تعرف على ما هي الديمقراطية
- فهم كيف تعمل الديمقراطية في المملكة المتحدة
- تعرف على سبب أهمية الديمقراطية بالنسبة لك
تم تصميم دورة القيادة الذكية عاطفيًا لمساعدة القادة والمهنيين على تحسين قدرتهم على التعامل مع التفاعلات في بيئة العمل بشكل فعال من خلال الاستفادة من الذكاء العاطفي (EI). من خلال سلسلة من السيناريوهات الواقعية، سيطور المشاركون مهارات أساسية في الذكاء العاطفي، بما في ذلك الوعي الذاتي، وإدارة الذات، والوعي الاجتماعي، وإدارة العلاقات.
توفر هذه الدورة تجربة تعليمية تفاعلية للغاية، حيث يشارك المتعلمون في تمارين اتخاذ القرار التي تحاكي تحديات مكان العمل. تتضمن هذه التمارين التعامل مع شخصيات مختلفة، وحل النزاعات، وتقديم ملاحظات بنّاءة، وتعزيز ثقافة الفريق الشاملة. سيكتسب المشاركون رؤى حول أسلوب قيادتهم وكيف تؤثر استجاباتهم العاطفية على ديناميكيات الفريق والإنتاجية والمعنويات العامة.
من خلال ممارسة الاستجابات الذكية عاطفيًا في سيناريوهات منظمة، سيتمكن المتعلمون من تحسين قدرتهم على التعامل مع المحادثات الصعبة، وبناء علاقات مهنية قوية، وتعزيز فعالية قيادتهم. تقدم الدورة أيضًا استراتيجيات لتعزيز الأمان النفسي، وتشجيع التعاون بين الفريق، والحفاظ على بيئة عمل إيجابية، سواء كان العمل عن بُعد أو في المكتب.
في نهاية الدورة، سيكون المشاركون مجهزين بأدوات وتقنيات عملية للقيادة بتعاطف، واتخاذ قرارات مستنيرة، وإلهام فرقهم لتحقيق أفضل أداء. هذه الدورة مثالية للمديرين وقادة الفرق والمتخصصين في الموارد البشرية وأي شخص يسعى إلى تعزيز مهاراته الشخصية والقيادية من خلال قوة الذكاء العاطفي.
فهم أهمية الذكاء العاطفي في القيادة.
تطوير الوعي الذاتي للتعرف على المشاعر وإدارتها في المواقف الصعبة.
تحسين مهارات إدارة الذات للحفاظ على الهدوء والفعالية تحت الضغط.
تعزيز الوعي الاجتماعي لفهم مشاعر أعضاء الفريق والتفاعل معها بفعالية.
تقوية مهارات إدارة العلاقات لبناء الثقة وتحقيق التواصل الفعّال داخل الفرق.
تطبيق الذكاء العاطفي في سيناريوهات العمل التي تتطلب حل النزاعات.
اتخاذ قرارات قائمة على الذكاء العاطفي عند التعامل مع مشكلات الأداء.
تعزيز الشعور بالانتماء والمشاركة بين أعضاء الفريق سواء في المكتب أو عن بعد.
تحسين استراتيجيات الاتصال القيادي لدعم احتياجات الفرق المتنوعة.
تحقيق توازن بين التعاطف والمساءلة عند إدارة توقعات الفريق.
استخدام تقنيات الذكاء العاطفي لتقديم ملاحظات بناءة وتوجيه الأداء.
تحسين عملية اتخاذ القرار من خلال مراعاة التفكير المنطقي والتأثير العاطفي.
بناء استراتيجيات لدعم أعضاء الفريق الذين يواجهون التوتر أو قلة الحماس.
تشجيع التعاون وتعزيز بيئة آمنة نفسيًا داخل الفرق.
تطوير خطط عمل للتحسين المستمر في الذكاء العاطفي.
سنستكشف في هذه الدورة كيف يمكن لعمليات إدارة الأداء أن توفر فرصة لتعزيز ممارسة إدارة الأداء الإضافي.
سوف تتعلم كيفية إنشاء ثقافة عالية الأداء في مؤسستك والتي تتطلب مستويات أعلى من الثقة والتواصل وعلاقات العمل المثمرة بين المشرفين والموظفين. أنت بحاجة إلى إنشاء نظام لإدارة الأداء لدمج مشاركة الموظفين في إدارة الأداء، وهو ما نسميه "إدارة الأداء الإضافي".
توفر لك دورة إدارة الأداء الفرصة لتطوير الثقة المتبادلة التي تحتاجها للحفاظ على ثقافة الأداء العالي من خلالها
• محادثات متكررة
• الصدق في الاتصالات
• الالتزام بنجاح الموظف
تساعد المبادئ الأساسية لإدارة الأداء على بناء علاقات عمل قوية وموثوقة وحقيقية. وسوف نتعلم ضرورة التأكد وفهم أهمية إنشاء وتغذية العلاقة بين المشرفين والموظفين، حتى قبل البدء في عمليات إدارة الأداء.
هذه الدورة هي أكثر من مجرد توقيع خطط الأداء أو استكمال التقييمات في نهاية العام. إنها تبدأ فعليًا في اليوم الأول، في اللحظة التي يبدأ فيها الموظف الجديد صعوده إلى الطائرة، وهي عملية متواصلة. عندما يقوم المشرفون والموظفين ببناء علاقات قوية وموثوقة، فإن بقية إدارة الأداء تأتي بشكل طبيعي. تدعمك المبادئ الأساسية للدورة في إنشاء علاقات العمل الإيجابية والحفاظ عليها، وتلهمك لاستخدام عمليات إدارة الأداء كخريطة طريق طوال الدورة لمناقشة العلاقات الحيوية لنجاح PM Plus.
سندعمك أيضًا لتحديد الفرص التي يتم فيها استخدام إدارة الأداء لإنشاء بيئة عمل تدعم نجاح كل من الموظف والمؤسسة.
سيغطي الدرس الأول إدارة الأداء وكيف يمكن تطبيق مبادئها الأساسية على مدار العام، باستخدام دورة إدارة الأداء كخارطة طريق.
يوفر لك الدرس 2 الفرصة لممارسة إدارة الأداء في بيئة عمل محاكاة، ومعرفة المزيد حول التعرف على فرص المشاركة وبناء علاقات الثقة داخل مكان العمل.
تحديد وشرح دور الموظفين والمشرفين في إدارة الأداء.
إشراك المناقشات طوال دورة إدارة الأداء لتعزيز فهم التوقعات والأهداف.
دعم تطوير الموظفين ونجاحهم.
الثقة المتبادلة بين الموظف والمشرف.
توصيل واضح للتقييم السنوي وفهم كيفية استخلاصه.
تأثير مكافأة الأداء بشكل فعال.
يدعم نجاح كل من الموظف والمنظمة.
يعزز الثقة بين المشرف والموظف والتفاعلات الإيجابية.
ستتعلم في هذه الدورة أن حل النزاع هو الطريقة التي يعمل من خلالها طرفان أو أكثر على حل مشكلة ما. يعمل أعضاء الأطراف الملتزمون معًا لتحقيق حل يحل المشكلة بطريقة مثمرة.
تحاول الأطراف الملتزمة حل النزاعات من خلال توصيل المعلومات حول دوافعها أو أفكارها المتضاربة إلى بقية المجموعة. في عملك، قد تحتاج إلى المشاركة في حل النزاعات مع عميل أو عضو في الفريق. في المنظمات، من المتوقع وجود صراع، وهناك حاجة إلى أدوات جيدة لإدارة الصراع للنجاح في التوصل إلى أفضل حل يحل المشكلة.
ثلاث نصائح لحل أفضل للنزاعات: تعلم ثلاث طرق للمساعدة في حل النزاعات.
أربعة أنواع من التواصل في حالات النزاع: في هذا النشاط، سوف تتدرب على اختيار الاستجابات الحازمة للصراع.
الأسباب الخمسة: سوف يستكشف المتعلم التقنيات المستخدمة لتحديد علاقات السبب والنتيجة لمشكلة معينة.
نموذج لبدء حل النزاعات: ستحدد وتكتب عبارات "أنا" حازمة تركز على BCF (السلوك والعواقب والمشاعر).
فهم أهمية التواصل في الصراع
تعلم التقنيات المستخدمة لتحديد سبب مشكلة معينة
تعلم ثلاث طرق للمساعدة في حل النزاعات.
الحفاظ على التحفيز (أهدافك): سوف يستكشف المتعلم التحديات التي يواجهها عادة مع الحفاظ على التحفيز وتحديد العقبات التي تسبب فقدان الحافز.
الدافع مهم في تحقيق أهدافك، فهو يوفر لك أهدافًا تعمل على تحقيقها، ويساعدك على حل المشكلات، ويساعدك على تغيير السلوكيات غير المهنية.
إن تحقيق الأهداف يتطلب أكثر بكثير من مجرد العمل الجاد والتفاني. ولذلك، فإن تعلم كيفية تحقيق الأهداف أمر مهم. عندما تحدد هدفًا، عليك أولاً تقييم أهميته العاطفية. ثم يقوم بتقييم مستوى الجهد الذي سيستغرقه للوصول إلى هناك. أنت بحاجة إلى إعطاء الأولوية للأهداف التي تعني لك الكثير، تلك التي تركز عليها كل طاقتك.
في الجزء الثالث من هذه الدورة سوف تستكشف تقنيات حل المشكلات بين الفرق والأفراد: سيحدد المتعلم استخدامات الفرق في حل المشكلات وخصائصها.
تعرف على خطوات تحديد الأهداف وتحقيقها
التعرف على عملية تحقيق الأهداف
فهم العقبات التي تسبب فقدان الحافز
إدارة وقتك عنصر أساسي في بيئة عمل ناجحة. توضح لك هذه الدورة كيف يمكنك تنظيم الوقت المتاح لديك بشكل أفضل وتحفيز نفسك على استخدامه بحكمة. باستخدام مخطط زمني فعال عالي الجودة وقائمة رئيسية، يمكنك تحقيق هدفك. أدوات وإجراءات إدارة الوقت النموذجية التي يجب عليك استخدامها لتحقيق أقصى قدر من الإنتاجية والتنظيم الجيد.
ستتعلم في هذه الدورة أن إدارة الوقت هي عملية تنظيم وتخطيط كيفية تقسيم وقتك بين الأنشطة المختلفة. إدارة الوقت هي القدرة على استخدام وقتك بشكل منتج وفعال.
إدارة الوقت: سيقوم المتعلم بتقييم استراتيجياته في إدارة الوقت وعادات الدراسة.
مصفوفة إدارة الوقت: اكتشف ماهية إدارة الوقت، وكيفية استخدام مصفوفة الوقت، وكيفية تجميعها معًا واستخدام مهاراتنا الجديدة في إدارة الوقت لإنجاز المزيد خلال أيامك.
تعرف على ما هي إدارة الوقت
التعرف على مهارات إدارة الوقت الجديدة
فهم كيفية استخدام مصفوفة الوقت
إدارة سلسلة التوريد هي تحسين إنشاء المنتج وتدفقه من مصادر المواد الخام إلى الإنتاج والخدمات اللوجستية والتسليم إلى العميل النهائي.
الغرض من إدارة سلسلة التوريد هو تشغيل جميع أنشطة سلسلة التوريد بكفاءة ومهنية، مما يمكن أن يدعم الشركات أيضًا في الحفاظ على عمليات أفضل وزيادة النتيجة النهائية.
النقل والتكامل
عمليات
شراء
توزيع
حل المشكلات هو إجراء تحديد المشكلة؛ تحديد سبب المشكلة؛ إيجاد وترتيب الأولويات واختيار إمكانية أخرى للحل؛ وتنفيذ الحل.
تعد مهارات حل المشكلات أمرًا حيويًا عمليًا في أي دور متقدم يمكنك التفكير فيه. سوف تتعلم كيفية تطوير وتأسيس مهاراتك في حل المشكلات، وبالتالي يجب على القيادة توجيه موظفيها وتطوير تقنيات حل المشكلات. يمكن العثور على حل مناسب للمخاوف من خلال اتباع الخطوات الأساسية لعملية حل المشكلات والمنهجية الموضحة أدناه.
حل المشكلات - وصف المشكلة: سيفهم المتعلم كيفية قياس المشكلة بمرور الوقت باستخدام مخطط تشغيل مشترك لتصور الفجوة بين الأداء السابق والأهداف المستقبلية.
حل المشكلات - العثور على السبب الجذري: سيفهم المتعلم كيفية استخدام مخطط السبب والنتيجة للعثور على السبب الجذري للمشكلة.
طريقة Go Team لحل المشكلات للفرق: سيقوم المتعلم بتطبيق طريقة GO TEAM في بيئة جماعية لحل المشكلة.
تعلم التقنيات المستخدمة لتحديد سبب مشكلة معينة
تعلم طرق وصف المشكلة
فهم التقنيات المستخدمة لحل المشكلة
فهم أهمية استخدام مخطط التشغيل لتصور الفجوة بين الأداء السابق والأهداف المستقبلية.
حل المشكلات هو إجراء تحديد المشكلة؛ تحديد سبب المشكلة؛ إيجاد وترتيب الأولويات واختيار إمكانية أخرى للحل؛ وتنفيذ الحل.
تعد مهارات حل المشكلات أمرًا حيويًا عمليًا في أي دور متقدم يمكنك التفكير فيه. سوف تتعلم كيفية تطوير وتأسيس مهاراتك في حل المشكلات، وبالتالي يجب على القيادة توجيه موظفيها وتطوير تقنيات حل المشكلات. يمكن العثور على حل مناسب للمخاوف من خلال اتباع الخطوات الأساسية لعملية حل المشكلات والمنهجية الموضحة أدناه.
حل المشكلات: استخدام مصفوفة القرار: سيفهم المتعلم كيفية استخدام العصف الذهني ومصفوفة القرار للعثور على أفضل حل للمشكلة.
حل المشكلات: استخدام مخطط التدفق: سوف تتعلم كيفية استخدام مخطط التدفق لوصف إجراءات العملية والقرارات لإيجاد حل.
حل المشكلات: استخدام مخطط التشغيل: ستفهم كيفية استخدام مخطط التشغيل لوصف مشكلة التصنيع.
- المعلم: Jessica Frankianson
تعلم التقنيات المستخدمة لتحديد واستخدام العصف الذهني ومصفوفة القرار.
تعلم طرق وصف المشكلة وإيجاد حل لها
فهم التقنيات المستخدمة لحل المشكلة
فهم أهمية استخدام مخطط التدفق، ومخطط التشغيل، ومصفوفة القرار
تشير النزاهة في مكان العمل إلى وجود سمات شخصية صادقة وأخلاقيات العمل والأخلاق والموثوقية والجدارة بالثقة. التعريف المعروف هو: النزاهة هي أن تفعل الشيء الصحيح عندما لا يراقبك أحد.
عندما تتمتع المنظمة بثقافة النزاهة الصحيحة، فهذا يعني أن الموظفين يأخذون التزاماتهم على محمل الجد، وفي النهاية، يصبحون مسؤولين عن نتائجهم.
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على الفريق الذي تنتمي إليه، وستتعرف على خصائص كل فريق لبناء فريق أقوى. إذا كنت تعتقد أنك مشارك في فريق مجزأ أو متضارب أو يعمل بسلاسة؟ تعلم خصائص كل منها لبناء فريق أقوى.
النزاهة في مكان العمل: سوف يتعرف المتعلم على صفات الشخص الذي يتمتع بالنزاهة وأهمية النزاهة داخل فريق العمل.
تتضمن الدورة اختبار تطبيق العمل الجماعي حيث سيتعرف المتعلم على سلوكيات الفريق الإيجابية بما في ذلك الاحترام والموثوقية والمسؤولية والعزيمة.
تعلم تقنيات الخصائص لبناء فريق أقوى
التعرف على سلوكيات الفريق الإيجابية
فهم أهمية النزاهة داخل فريق العمل
فهم أهمية وجود خصائص مختلفة في مكان عمل الأشخاص
هناك طرق مختلفة للاتصالات المختلفة. وهذا يشمل التواصل اللفظي، والتواصل غير اللفظي.
في مكان العمل، من المهم أن تتمتع بمهارات تواصل جيدة، وستبحث العديد من الشركات عن المتقدمين الذين يتمتعون بمهارات تواصل عالية الجودة. هناك العديد من طرق الاتصال المختلفة، التي يجب على الموظفين مراعاتها واستخدامها في اتصالات عملهم اليومية. العملية والمنهجية الموضحة أدناه.
التواصل بين الثقافات (الإيماءات): سوف يتعرف المتعلم على الإيماءات الشائعة ويحدد المعاني المرتبطة بتلك الإيماءات.
وصف وضع اتصالات المعاملات: في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستقوم بمراجعة التعريفات ثم مطابقة عنصر نموذج اتصالات المعاملات مع التعريف أو المثال.
الإدراك - فهم العالم من حولك: تعرف على تعريف الإدراك وعمليته وكيف يؤثر على التواصل
*الاتصالات الدولية: ستكتشف في هذا النشاط التعليمي أساليب تواصل مختلفة من جميع أنحاء العالم.
* التواصل غير اللفظي: يقرأ المتعلمون عن التواصل غير اللفظي. وفي تمرين السحب والإفلات، يقومون بتقييم صور الأشخاص المتفاعلين وتحديد ما إذا كانت السلوكيات المعروضة تتعارض مع التواصل أو تعززه.
تعلم تقنيات الإيماءات والمعاني الشائعة
التعرف على سلوكيات الفريق الإيجابية
فهم وضع الاتصالات المعاملات.
التعرف على أهمية التواصل في مكان العمل
فهم أنماط الاتصال المختلفة
يعد الاستماع الفعال أمرًا أساسيًا في أي مكان عمل عندما نحتاج إلى التواصل بشكل جيد مع الموظفين والعملاء والمجتمعات وكسب إيمانهم واحترامهم.
العوائق التي تحول دون الاستماع النشط يمكن أن تسبب مشاكل خطيرة لأي منظمة. كلما عرفت المزيد عن العوائق، كلما تمكنت من معرفة كيفية إزالتها.
تصف هذه الدورة التدريبية أنواع العوائق التي تحول دون الاستماع النشط والاستماع غير الفعال. كما يلاحظ بعض العوائق وعادات الاستماع السيئة، مما يمكنك من معالجتها. وسوف يدعمك أنت وفريقك لتعلم الاستماع بشكل أكثر فعالية، وبالتالي زيادة جودة حياتك المهنية والشخصية.
سبعة عوائق أمام الاستماع: سيحدد المتعلم العوائق الشائعة أمام الاستماع الفعال.
التواصل في مكان العمل: قارن السلوكيات والمواقف التي تتعارض مع التواصل الفعال في مكان العمل مع تلك التي تعزز مهارات الاستماع والأداء الوظيفي.
فهم كيفية تعزيز مهارات الاستماع والأداء الوظيفي
فهم العوائق التي تؤثر على التواصل
تحديد العوائق الشائعة أمام الاستماع الفعال
إدارة الوقت هي تنظيم المسؤوليات والأنشطة لتعظيم فعالية جهود الفريق والموظفين. في الأساس، الغرض من إدارة الوقت هو تمكين الفرق من الحصول على فعالية أفضل للفريق وتحسين جودة العمل في وقت أقل.
ومع ذلك، فإن فعالية الفريق هي قدرة فريقك، عادةً بمهارات تكميلية، على العمل معًا لتحقيق أفضل النتائج، وبالتالي فإن الفرق القوية الفعالة قادرة على إلهام بعضها البعض والعمل معًا لحل المشكلات، مما يؤدي إلى نتائج أفضل.
ستكتشف في هذه الدورة أن "الوقت هو المال" الذي يشيع استخدامه في الأعمال والصناعة. تعد إدارة وقتك بكفاءة وفعالية أمرًا بالغ الأهمية لأداء عملك ورضاك الشخصي. ومن المهم أيضًا لصاحب العمل وعملائك. لن يدفع العملاء مبلغًا إضافيًا مقابل وقتك الضائع ولن يبقيك رئيسك في العمل لفترة طويلة جدًا إذا كنت لا تستخدم وقتك بحكمة. سيحدد المتعلم الأدوار الفردية التي تساعد الفرق على تحقيق الأهداف وتحسين مهارات إدارة الوقت واستعادة المزيد من الوقت لك.
تعلم التقنيات والقدرة المستخدمة لإدارة وقتك بكفاءة وفعالية
فهم العوائق التي تؤثر على الأداء
فهم الأدوار الفردية التي تساعد الفرق على تحقيق الأهداف.
فهم كيفية تعزيز إدارة وقت فريقك وفعاليته
هناك العديد من العوائق التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي، ويمكن تقسيم هذه العوائق إلى أربع فئات أساسية
- تواصل
- كونك إنسانا
- العوائق المتعلقة بالناس
- أخطاء في الحكم
في هذا الجزء الأول من الدورة، سوف نقوم بدراسة عوائق التفكير النقدي والتغلب على عوائق التفكير النقدي (أن تكون إنسانًا)
سوف يستكشف المتعلم القيود البشرية الأساسية التي تخلق حواجز أمام التفكير النقدي بما في ذلك التفكير الانتقائي والذكريات الكاذبة والقيود الإدراكية.
سيحدد المتعلم طرقًا للتغلب على العوائق التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي وحل المشكلات بما في ذلك الذكريات الكاذبة والتحيزات الشخصية والأحكام المسبقة والعوائق الجسدية والعاطفية.
فهم العوائق المتعلقة بالمشاكل
فهم العقبات التي تسبب حواجز أمام التفكير النقدي
فهم أهمية حل المشكلات
هناك العديد من العوائق التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي، ويمكن تقسيم هذه العوائق إلى أربع فئات أساسية
- تواصل
- كونك إنسانا
- العوائق المتعلقة بالناس
- أخطاء في الحكم
في هذه الدورة، الجزء الثاني، سوف نقوم بدراسة العوائق المرتبطة بالأشخاص والتغلب على العوائق التي تعترض التفكير النقدي: العوائق المرتبطة بالأشخاص:
العوائق المتعلقة بالأشخاص: سيحدد المتعلم عوائق التفكير النقدي المتعلقة بالعوامل الداخلية والخارجية بعد عرض السيناريوهات.
التغلب على عوائق التفكير النقدي_ العوائق المتعلقة بالأشخاص: سيحدد المتعلم التقنيات التي سيتم استخدامها للتغلب على العوائق المتعلقة بالأشخاص التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي.
فهم العوائق التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي
فهم العوائق التي تعترض العوامل الداخلية والخارجية
اكتشف كيفية التغلب على عوائق التفكير النقدي
هناك العديد من العوائق التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي، ويمكن تقسيم هذه العوائق إلى أربع فئات أساسية
- تواصل
- كونك إنسانا
- العوائق المتعلقة بالناس
- أخطاء في الحكم
في هذا الجزء الثالث من الدورة سوف ندرس التواصل والأخطاء في الحكم.
سيتناول النشاط الأول التواصل: العديد من العوائق المرتبطة بمشاكل التواصل.
النشاط الثاني سوف يدرس الأخطاء في الحكم: سوف يستكشف المتعلمون الأخطاء في الحكم: العوائق التي تحول دون التفكير النقدي وكيف تؤثر على عمليات صنع القرار.
فهم العقبات التي تسبب حواجز أمام التفكير النقدي
فهم أهمية عمليات صنع القرار
اكتشف ما هي الأخطاء في الحكم
في بيئة العمل الديناميكية اليوم، قد لا تكون أساليب العمل الجماعي التقليدية كافية دائمًا. تم تصميم "العمل الجماعي خارج الصندوق" لتزويدك باستراتيجيات مبتكرة لتعزيز التعاون والإنتاجية ضمن فرق متنوعة. يستكشف هذا المقرر الأساليب غير التقليدية لتعزيز الإبداع والقدرة على التكيف والتآزر بين أعضاء الفريق. ومن خلال تحدي الوضع الراهن، سوف تتعلم كيفية الاستفادة من وجهات النظر المختلفة، ودفع الابتكار، وتحقيق نتائج باهرة. سواء كنت قائد فريق أو عضوًا في الفريق، ستزودك هذه الدورة بالأدوات اللازمة للتفكير بشكل إبداعي والعمل بفعالية في أي بيئة فريق.
تقنيات التعاون المبتكرة
تعزيز إبداع الفريق
الاستفادة من وجهات النظر المتنوعة
استراتيجيات حل المشكلات التكيفية
بناء التآزر والتماسك
سوف يتعرف المتعلم على ثمانية مبادئ للقيادة التعاونية لبناء فريق يجد فيه الأعضاء الرضا والمكافأة في عملهم.
سيتم تعريف المتعلم بالمبادئ الثمانية للفرق بلا قيادة ويتعلم كيف يمكن تطبيق هذه المبادئ لخلق بيئة عمل إيجابية.
تتضمن هذه الدورة طريقة فعالة لاختبار البطاقات التعليمية.
ما هو الفريق بلا قيادة؟
فهم المبدأ الثامن للفريق بلا قائد.
تنفيذ المبدأ الثامن للفريق بلا قائد.
في بيئة الأعمال الديناميكية اليوم، غالبًا ما تتشابك أدوار القيادة والإدارة ولكنها تختلف بشكل واضح. تم تصميم هذه الدورة التدريبية، "تمييز القيادة والإدارة"، لمساعدة المهنيين على فهم الصفات والوظائف الفريدة لكل دور. سوف يستكشف المشاركون الجوانب النظرية والعملية للقيادة والإدارة، ويتعلمون كيفية التنقل بفعالية بين الجانبين لتحقيق النجاح التنظيمي. بحلول نهاية الدورة، سوف تفهم ما هو القائد مقابل ما هو المدير، وكذلك ما تستلزمه القيادة مقارنة بالإدارة. ومن خلال المناقشات التفاعلية ودراسات الحالة والتمارين العملية، سيكتسب الحضور رؤى حول كيفية تحقيق التوازن والاستفادة من نقاط القوة في القيادة والإدارة داخل فرقهم ومؤسساتهم.
الاختلافات الرئيسية بين القيادة والإدارة
وظائف دور القادة والمديرين
فهم القائد مقابل المدير الديناميكي
نظرة شاملة في القيادة والإدارة
تعزيز قدرات واستراتيجيات اتخاذ القرار
تقنيات الاستماع النشط.
بناء الثقة والتعاطف.
الحد من سوء الفهم والصراعات.
التواصل الفعال هو حجر الزاوية في العلاقات الناجحة، ومع ذلك فإن الكثير منا يواجه صعوبة في الاستماع. "مشكلة مزدوجة في الاستماع" هي دورة شاملة مصممة لمعالجة التحديات الشائعة المرتبطة بالاستماع. ستتعمق هذه الدورة في العوائق التي تعيق الاستماع الفعال وتقدم حلول عملية للتغلب عليها. من خلال الجلسات التفاعلية وسيناريوهات الحياة الواقعية، سوف تتعلم كيفية تعزيز مهارات الاستماع لديك، وتحسين قدرتك على فهم المعلومات والاحتفاظ بها، وتعزيز التواصل بشكل أفضل في كل من الإعدادات الشخصية والمهنية. استعد لتغيير عادات الاستماع لديك وتقليل سوء الفهم.
تحديد عوائق الاستماع
تقنيات لتحسين الاستماع
تعزيز الاحتفاظ بالمعلومات
استراتيجيات التواصل الفعال
التغلب على سوء الفهم
إن فهم الفرق بين الاحتياجات والرغبات أمر بالغ الأهمية لاتخاذ القرارات الفعالة وإدارة الموارد. "الاحتياجات مقابل الرغبات" هي دورة مصممة لمساعدتك على التمييز بين الاحتياجات الأساسية والرغبات المرغوبة في مختلف جوانب الحياة، من الشؤون المالية الشخصية إلى استراتيجية الأعمال. ستوجهك هذه الدورة التدريبية عبر مبادئ تحديد الأولويات وتخصيص الموارد، مما يضمن أنه يمكنك اتخاذ خيارات مستنيرة تتوافق مع أهدافك وقيمك. ومن خلال التمارين العملية ودراسات الحالة، سوف تتعلم كيفية تطبيق هذه المفاهيم في سيناريوهات العالم الحقيقي، مما يؤدي إلى نتائج أكثر استراتيجية وإرضاءً.
التمييز بين الاحتياجات والرغبات
مبادئ تحديد الأولويات
التخصيص الفعال للموارد
صنع القرار الاستراتيجي
تطبيق المفاهيم في سيناريوهات العالم الحقيقي
شهدت العقود الأخيرة مجموعة من القصص الإخبارية حيث أدت إخفاقات إدارة المخاطر إلى تقويض المنظمة وإضعاف مصداقية إدارتها. وقد أدت هذه الإخفاقات إلى زوال بعض الشركات - على سبيل المثال ليمان براذرز، وورلد كوم، وإنرون. والأسوأ من ذلك أن هذه الإخفاقات أدت في كثير من الحالات إلى وقوع وفيات وإصابات ــ كما حدث مع كارثة منصة بايبر ألفا النفطية في بحر الشمال في عام 1988 أو انفجار شركة بريتيش بتروليوم ديب ووتر هورايزون والتسرب النفطي في عام 2010.
تدمج المنظمات الناجحة ثقافة إدارة المخاطر في جميع مجالات أنشطتها. ولتحقيق ذلك يتطلب التعليم الفعال والعملي لإدارة المخاطر. وتفيد الدورة بشكل خاص جميع العاملين كمديري المخاطر، وأولئك الذين يسعون إلى تطوير قدراتهم في إدارة المخاطر، وأولئك، مثل أعضاء مجلس الإدارة، الذين يتحملون المسؤولية النهائية عن المخاطر داخل مؤسساتهم. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، سيستفيد جميع من لديهم أو يسعون للحصول على وظيفة في الإدارة في أي منظمة من فهم المخاطر وكيفية إدارتها.
تتناول هذه الدورة المكونة من ثماني جلسات كيفية ممارسة التحليل الجيد للمخاطر ومن ثم تطبيق العمليات الناجحة لإدارتها. يتم دعم الدورة من خلال دراسات الحالة والمواد السمعية والبصرية للمساعدة في شرح ممارسات إدارة المخاطر المتنوعة والمعقدة في كثير من الأحيان المستخدمة في رولز رويس وعلى نطاق واسع في أماكن أخرى.
وهذه الدورة هي نتيجة للتعاون بين الجامعة المفتوحة وشركة رولز رويس بي إل سي. وقد ضمن هذا التعاون استكشاف النظريات المعاصرة حول إدارة المخاطر في سياق شركة دولية مطلوب منها تطبيق هذه النظريات في ممارساتها التجارية.
- المعلم: Open University Open Learn
تحديد وفهم المخاطر التي تواجه المنظمات
معرفة كيفية تقييم وقياس تأثير المخاطر على المنظمات
فهم الطرق المختلفة التي يمكن من خلالها إدارة المخاطر أو التخفيف منها
فهم كيف يمكن للمؤسسات تطبيق "إدارة المخاطر المؤسسية"
فهم أهمية المراقبة الفعالة والإبلاغ عن المخاطر.
https://media-podcast.open.ac.uk/feeds/4396/20191008T142725_rm_1_socialmeadiateaser_wboards.mp4
تلعب مواقفنا دورًا كبيرًا في حياتنا اليومية والعملية ويمكن أن تؤثر على كيفية تطور حياتنا في المستقبل. بتمتعك بسلوك جيد، ستكون شخصًا أخلاقيًا يعمل بجد، وستعيش الحياة اللطيفة التي يسعى إليها الكثيرون.
ستتعلم في هذه الدورة التدريبية كيفية تعزيز سلوكك: سيحدد المتعلمون ما إذا كانوا راضين عن مواقفهم ثم يقومون بترتيب النصائح لاستعادة التصرف الإيجابي في مكان العمل.
استخدم أسلوب التعلم الخاص بك لتعزيز إنتاجيتك: سيحدد المتعلمون أساليب التعلم الخاصة بهم وسيمارسون طرقًا للاحتفاظ بالمعلومات في الفصل وفي العمل.
فهم أهمية استعادة التصرف الإيجابي في مكان العمل
تعرف على كيفية تحديد أساليب التعلم وممارستها لتعزيز إنتاجيتك
فهم المواقف في مكان العمل
منذ أوائل العقد الأول من القرن الحادي والعشرين، دخلت لغة جديدة إلى عالم الإدارة الإستراتيجية. في حين أن هذا المجال كان يتحدث في المقام الأول من حيث عروض القيمة، والاستراتيجيات العامة والميزة التنافسية، فقد تم في الآونة الأخيرة استبدال هذه الأفكار أو ربما استيعابها ضمن لغة جديدة لنماذج الأعمال.
مدفوعة بقوى مثل اقتصاد المعرفة، ونمو وانتشار الإنترنت، وظهور تقنيات الهاتف المحمول الجديدة والقوية مثل الهواتف الذكية، يتعين على المؤسسات إعادة التفكير في الطريقة التي تنظم بها مؤسساتها، وتجذب العملاء، وتسعى إلى تحقيق ميزة في السوق. ويحدث هذا بوتيرة محمومة حيث يتعرض اللاعبون الراسخون والمهيمنون سابقًا في الصناعة بشكل متزايد للتحديات والتعطيل، وفي كثير من الحالات، للهزيمة من قبل الشركات الناشئة الصغيرة التي تظهر على ما يبدو من العدم.
في هذه الدورة التدريبية المجانية، نماذج الأعمال في الإدارة الإستراتيجية، سيتم تعريفك بنظرية وممارسة نماذج الأعمال كما تطورت في الأدبيات الإستراتيجية. على وجه الخصوص، سوف تستكشف ظهور فكرة نموذج الأعمال، وأنواع نماذج الأعمال بما في ذلك تلك التي تستخدم الإنترنت (نماذج الأعمال الإلكترونية) وكيف يمكن تصميم نماذج الأعمال.
تتأصل في هذه الدورة فكرة أنه على الرغم من استخدامها بشكل متكرر في الأعمال التجارية، إلا أن نماذج الأعمال لا تقتصر على سياق الأعمال. كما أنها ليست مخصصة للتخطيط الاستراتيجي في المنظمات فقط. بل قد يكون لها تطبيقات أوسع في حياتنا. على سبيل المثال، يمكنك تطبيقها لبناء استراتيجيات التطوير المهني والنمو الوظيفي.
- المعلم: Open University Open Learn
ظهور مفهوم نموذج الأعمال
أنواع نماذج الأعمال
نماذج الأعمال الإلكترونية
تصميم نماذج الأعمال
تطبيقات نماذج الأعمال خارج نطاق الأعمال
التخطيط الاستراتيجي باستخدام نماذج الأعمال
تطبيق نماذج الأعمال على التطوير المهني والنمو الوظيفي
- عملي (ما مدى نجاحه؟ هل حقق الهدف؟)
- سياسي (من الرابح؟ من الخاسر؟)
- الأخلاقية (هل هذا صحيح؟ أم خطأ؟).
أريد منكم أن تسألوا، وأن تجدوا أجوبة لهذه الأنواع من الأسئلة حول "جودة" إدارة التطوير. ويرجع ذلك إلى أن "خير" - أو غير ذلك - إدارة التنمية أمر مهم. إنه مهم، في بعض الحالات، من حيث الحياة والموت. لكنها مهمة دائمًا من حيث رفاهية أولئك الذين يتأثرون بها. لذا فإن الأسئلة تستحق أن نطرحها. والسعي لاكتشاف إدارة التنمية "الجيدة" هو أمر يستحق الاضطلاع به.
- المعلم: Open University Open Learn
اكتب تعريفًا عمليًا لإدارة التطوير
تطبيق إطار التعقيد والظهور والاختلاف (CoDE) على حالات مختارة لإدارة التطوير
تطوير بعض الأحكام الأولية لإدارة التطوير "الجيدة".
تعتبر مهارات الكتابة عالية الجودة أمرًا حيويًا لأي شخص في مجال الأعمال. أنت في حاجة إليها للتواصل بكفاءة مع العملاء والفرق والمديرين ولبيع أي أفكار أو منتجات أو خدمات تقدمها.
في هذه الدورة التعليمية سوف تقوم بمراجعة كيفية كتابة بيانات الأهداف الفعالة.
سوف يميز المتعلم بين الأساليب الفعالة وغير الفعالة في كتابة التعليمات.
سوف يدرس المتعلم بريدًا إلكترونيًا فعالاً في مكان العمل يتم كتابته بينما يشرح الراوي العملية خطوة بخطوة. سوف يميز المتعلم الفرق بين رسائل البريد الإلكتروني المكتوبة بشكل سيئ والمكتوبة بشكل فعال.
كتابة رسائل البريد الإلكتروني التجارية الفعالة
كتابة أهداف فعالة لتحفيز الموظفين
كتابة التعليمات الفعالة
أن يتعرف المتعلم على الخطوات الثلاث في عملية الكتابة والعناصر الموجودة في كل خطوة.
يُظهر الطلاب أيضًا فهمًا للكتابة التلخيصية من خلال قراءة التعليمات خطوة بخطوة ثم تلخيص الفقرات القصيرة. يتم تضمين أمثلة على الملخصات التي تمت كتابتها بشكل سيئ، وكذلك تلك التي تمت كتابتها بشكل جيد.
اختبار التطبيق: التواصل الكتابي في مكان العمل
سوف يتعرف المتعلم على الكتابة المناسبة للاتصالات التجارية.
تعلم ثلاث خطوات في عملية الكتابة
فهم الكتابة الموجزة
فهم الكتابة والصياغة والتحرير
تهدف هذه الدورة إلى مساعدتك على تحديد سرعة القراءة الحالية لديك وتقديم أداة القراءة السريعة Spreeder، وهي قارئ إلكتروني سريع مجاني عبر الإنترنت مصمم لتحسين سرعة القراءة لديك.
مقدمة
Spreeder هي أداة مجانية للقراءة الإلكترونية السريعة عبر الإنترنت تم تصميمها لتحسين سرعة القراءة لديك وبالتالي تحسين فهمك، لتتمكن من تحسين سرعة القراءة لديك وإزالة العادات السيئة وتحسين الاستيعاب لديك.
سوف تتعلم
- سرعة القراءة الحالية ومستوى الفهم
- كيفية استخدام سبيدر
- كيفية إنشاء تطبيق Spreeder المرجعي
- ما هو الحد الأمثل للسرعة لديك؟
- كيفية الانتشار أثناء التنقل
- قارن كفاءتك في القراءة
في هذه الدورة، يقدم دليل المبتدئين للمراجع.
مقدمة
إذا لم تكن قد قمت بالرجوع إليها من قبل أو ربما مر وقت طويل، فإن هذه الدورة التدريبية الخاصة بالمراجع ستتضمن شيئًا للجميع؛ بغض النظر عن المستوى. فهو يوفر دليلاً للمبتدئين في مجال المراجع، بالإضافة إلى أمثلة متعمقة لاستخدام أسلوب المراجع في جامعة هارفارد لمجموعة متنوعة من مصادر المعلومات. يتضمن الدرس أيضًا نصائح وتوصيات لمساعدتك في القيام بذلك بطريقة سهلة.
سوف تتعلم
- شرح الغرض من المرجعية في العمل الأكاديمي
- تطبيق أسلوب هارفارد المرجعي على مجموعة متنوعة من السياقات
- استخدم الأدوات والتقنيات لتحسين دقة المراجع
ستساعدك هذه الدورة على البدء في إنشاء أو تطوير ملف شخصي رائع على LinkedIn. سوف تتعلم أيضًا كيفية التواصل مع الآخرين استعدادًا للبحث عن فرص عمل.
مقدمة
LinkedIn عبارة عن شبكة اجتماعية، مثل Facebook و Twitter و Google ، مخصصة لحياتك المهنية، وتعمل على إنشاء هويتك المهنية. إنها سيرتك الذاتية عبر الإنترنت وتحتاج إلى التطور مع حصولك على مهارات ومؤهلات ووظائف جديدة. LinkedIn هو نقطة الاتصال الأولى لأكثر من 80% من مسؤولي التوظيف.
سوف تتعلم
- ما هو لينكد إن؟
- لماذا يجب أن أستخدمه؟
- كيفية إنشاء ملف شخصي على لينكد إن
- كيفية إجراء اتصالات
- كيفية المطالبة بعنوان URL الفريد الخاص بك
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على كيفية الاستفادة من الخصومات المتاحة بالإضافة إلى الوصول المجاني إلى الأدوات والعروض المختلفة.
مقدمة
كونك طالبًا يأتي مع فوائد، مثل الخصومات مع أفضل بائعي التجزئة والمطاعم، بالإضافة إلى الوصول المجاني إلى جميع تطبيقات Office لسطح المكتب للاستخدام المنزلي، بما في ذلك Word وPowerPoint وExcel. في هذه الدورة، سنأخذك عبر جميع مواقع الويب والتطبيقات التي تحتاجها في مجموعة أدوات الطالب الخاصة بك.
سوف تتعلم
- كيفية الوصول إلى العروض والخصومات الخاصة بالطلاب
- كيفية تثبيت أدوات Office مجانًا
- كيف تكون طالبا رئيسيا
- يجب أن يكون لديك الوظائف الإضافية والتطبيقات
مقدمة
إذا كنت ستقضي ساعات طويلة في العمل على جهاز الكمبيوتر، فيجب أن تعرف كيفية تغيير بعض الإعدادات للتأكد من سهولة قراءة كل شيء على الشاشة.إذا كنت تفضل قراءة النص بصوت عالٍ، أو تفضل التحدث بدلاً من الكتابة، فلدينا بعض الأدوات التي قد تجدها مفيدة.
إنها فكرة جيدة أن تحدد طريقتك المفضلة للعمل في وقت مبكر لأنها ستجعل إكمال مهامك أسهل وأكثر راحة.
سوف تتعلم؟
سوف تتعلم؟
- كيفية إيقاف الضوضاء والمشتتات لتحسين وقت الدراسة بنقرة واحدة في MS Edge
- كيفية تحسين مهاراتك في القراءة والكتابة باستخدام القارئ الشامل
- كيفية تخصيص تجربتك مع إعدادات Windows 10
- كيفية التحدث بدلاً من الكتابة باستخدام أداة الإملاء
- كيفية الاحتفاظ بملاحظاتك الورقية/السبورة البيضاء في جيبك باستخدام Office Lens
ستدعمك هذه الدورة للتفكير في كيفية استخدامك للتكنولوجيا، وكيف يمكنك أن تكون لديك علاقة متوازنة معها.
مقدمة
هل تشعر أنك مسيطر على التكنولوجيا، أم أن التكنولوجيا هي المسيطرة عليك؟نستخدم جميعًا التكنولوجيا كل يوم كجزء من حياتنا، ولكن بالنسبة للبعض منا، يمكن أن يسيطر ذلك على حياتنا. في بعض الحالات، يمكن أن يصبح مسببًا للإدمان ويضر برفاهيتك ورفاهية الآخرين.
سوف تتعلم؟
سوف تتعلم؟
ما هي الرفاهية الرقمية؟
كيف يمكن أن تؤثر التكنولوجيا على رفاهيتك وعلى الآخرين
كيفية التعامل مع الحمل الزائد للتكنولوجيا
تعرف على كيف أعرف أن بياناتي آمنة؟ كيف أحافظ على أمان البيانات؟ البيانات موجودة في كل مكان حولك؛ لا مفر منه!. هذه الدورة مثالية للمبتدئين.
مقدمة
ستساعدك هذه الدورة التدريبية على معرفة إجابات السؤالين أعلاه وستمنحك أيضًا أفكارًا حول كيفية أن تصبح مسؤولاً رقميًا حتى تحافظ على أمان بياناتك وبيانات الآخرين.
ماذا سأتعلم؟
ماذا سأتعلم؟
ما هو أمن البيانات؟
المشاكل الشائعة مع الأمن
كيف تحافظ على سلامتك أثناء استخدام التكنولوجيا
مقدمة لجائزة IDEA
مقدمة
دعامات السقف الخشبية عبارة عن إطار هيكلي مصمم لتغطية المساحة فوق الغرفة ولتوفير الدعم للسقف.يتم إنشاء الجمالونات على فترات منتظمة، ويتم ربطها معًا بأخشاب طولية مثل المدادات. المسافة بين كل الجمالون تسمى خليج. الجمالون يشبه المثلث أو القوس الذي يخلق الشكل الجانبي للسقف. يتم ربط الجمالونات معًا عن طريق مسامير يتم تمريرها من خلال ألواح مسننة ويتم ربطها معًا.
إن فوائد القدرة على توحيد صفات وميزات المنتج النهائي ستؤدي دائمًا إلى زيادة الكفاءة في استخدام المواد وتكاليفها.
سوف تتعلم
- أسطح ثلاثية
- بناء العوارض الخشبية المربوطة
في هذه الدورة، ستتعرف على هياكل السقف المسطح والبناء.
مقدمة
مع سقف مسطح، يتم دائمًا دعم العزل المائي من خلال سطح هيكلي. عادة ما يكون هذا عبارة عن لوح خشبي من نوع ما، والذي بدوره مدعوم على روافد. عادة ما يتم تثبيت السقف، إن وجد، مباشرة على الجانب السفلي من الروافد.قد تكون الكراجات غير معزولة، ولكن معظم الأسطح فوق الجزء الصالح للسكن من المنزل معزولة لتتوافق مع لوائح البناء.
في المنازل، يتم أحيانًا وضع العزل مباشرة فوق السقف (وتحت سطح السقف)، أو فوق سطح السطح (تحت الغطاء المضاد للماء).
يوفر خيارا التصميم هذين الأساس للأسطح الدافئة والباردة.
سوف تتعلم
- العناصر الرئيسية للسقف المسطح
- القوة والاستقرار
- البناء النموذجي
- مشاكل مع الأسطح المسطحة
في هذه الدورة، ستتعرف على هياكل السقف المسطح والبناء.
مقدمة
الأسقف المسطحة هي أبسط أنواع بناء الأسطح وأرخصها في البناء. ومع ذلك، فإن هذه المزايا لها أيضًا بعض العيوب، لأنها تميل إلى التسرب وتحتاج إلى صيانة أكثر بكثير من الأسقف المائلة.على الرغم من الاسم، فإن السقف المسطح ليس مسطحًا، فقد تم بناؤه بميل بسيط، ويمتد من أعلى مستوى، وغالبًا ما يكون متاخمًا لجزء آخر من المبنى، بعيدًا إلى الطرف السفلي، حيث يتم جمع المياه الجارية في المزاريب.
تبلغ زاوية السقف المسطح حوالي 10 درجات وهذا يترجم إلى نسبة انحدار تبلغ تقريبًا. من 1:60 إلى 1:80 أي كل 60 سم من طول الجري يكون الانخفاض 1 سم.
سوف تتعلم
- العناصر الرئيسية للسقف المسطح
- القوة والاستقرار
- البناء النموذجي
- مشاكل مع الأسطح المسطحة
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على فهم بناء السقف.
مقدمة
الظروف المناخية يمكن أن تكون متنوعة. هناك أربعة فصول وهي الربيع والصيف والخريف والشتاء، وكل موسم يمكن أن يجلب تحدياته الخاصة لأنظمة التسقيف لدينا.
معظم الأسطح مائلة بسبب المناخ وهذا يسمح بتصريف الماء والثلج والجليد. وهذا يساعد على الحفاظ على أنواع مختلفة من مواد التسقيف ويحد من صيانة الهيكل. تعتبر الأسطح المائلة فعالة وتسمح للرطوبة بالانتشار وإزالتها. يمكن لعناصر مثل الثلج والمطر أن تلحق الضرر بمواد التسقيف، لذا فإن السقف المائل أمر حيوي.
لا يعد نظام التسقيف وسيلة لإزالة الثلوج أو المياه غير المرغوب فيها فحسب، بل يمكنه أيضًا توفير الاستقرار للمبنى. في وقت لاحق سوف ننظر إلى أنواع مختلفة من الأسطح ونحدد درجة لونها وشكلها.
نسبة كبيرة من المباني في المملكة المتحدة لديها نظام سقف مسطح. ومع ذلك، يجب أن يكون نظام السقف المسطح مدعومًا ذاتيًا وأن يكون قادرًا أيضًا على دعم أي وزن إضافي يكتسبه المطر أو الثلج. قد يستفيد السقف المسطح من حدبة طفيفة تصل إلى عشر درجات على سبيل المثال.
أنظمة الأسقف الجاهزة تكون جاهزة أو على شكل عدة، بينما التقليدية أو الحديثة يتم قصها وتصنيعها في الموقع.
سوف تتعلم
- المناخ والاعتبارات
- الاستقرار من خلال الهيكل
- تشريح السقف
- أنواع التسقيف
- أغطية الأسقف
- مكونات التسقيف
تتعرف في هذه الدورة على فوائد العزل الحراري وكيفية عمله في مساحات الأسطح.
مقدمة
للعزل الحراري فوائد أساسية لحماية البيئة؛ فهو يقلل من كمية الطاقة المستخدمة من الوقود الأحفوري، مثل الفحم والنفط والغاز. ولهذا السبب، يعد العزل الحراري عاملاً مهمًا في تعزيز الاستدامة.يتمتع العزل بأكبر إمكانية لتقليل انبعاثات ثاني أكسيد الكربون. يرتبط ثاني أكسيد الكربون (أي غاز "الدفيئة") ارتباطًا مباشرًا بالاحتباس الحراري لأنه يحبس الحرارة داخل الغلاف الجوي ويغير درجات الحرارة المناخية في جميع أنحاء العالم.
الطاقة المحفوظة من خلال استخدام العزل تفوق بكثير الطاقة المستخدمة في تصنيعه. فقط عندما يحقق المبنى معيار "الحرارة المنخفضة"، يصبح الكربون المتجسد في العزل مهمًا.
سوف تتعلم
سنتعرف في هذه الدورة على فوائد العزل الحراري وكيفية عمله في مساحات الأسطح:
- الكفاءة والفعالية
- مواد العزل
- الأسطح والسندرات والغرف العلوية
- السقوف المسطحة
The Introduction to Test Automation course is a practical, executive-level foundation programme designed to help software testing professionals understand the strategic role of automation within modern quality assurance environments. Rather than focusing on specific tools or certifications, the course develops a clear conceptual understanding of how automation supports faster delivery, improved consistency, and scalable testing practices across software development lifecycles.
This course is positioned as an essential stepping stone for organisations and individuals who are transitioning from predominantly manual testing approaches to more automated and efficiency-driven testing strategies. Learners gain clarity on where automation delivers genuine value, where it does not, and how informed decisions about automation can reduce risk, control costs, and improve overall product quality.
The training is highly relevant to real-world testing environments, providing a structured understanding of automation concepts that supports progression into tool-specific training, framework adoption, or advanced certification pathways at a later stage. This course does not lead to formal certification; instead, it builds the professional judgement and foundational knowledge required for effective automation adoption.
What’s Included
Instructor-led Introduction to Test Automation trainingAccompanying digital course materials
Conceptual frameworks and real-world examples
Guided explanations of automation approaches and techniques.
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Immersive learning experience delivered in an online virtual environment over 1 day, providing approximately 7 hours of guided instruction. The course includes interactive discussion, real-world examples, and structured knowledge development focused on automation fundamentals.
Price aligned with market standards for professional software testing training. Price: From £550 + VAT
Learners will develop a clear understanding of what test automation is and how it fits within modern software testing and delivery models.
Learners will be able to distinguish between manual and automated testing approaches and understand where each is most effective.
Learners will gain the ability to evaluate testing scenarios and identify where automation provides genuine business value.
Learners will understand common automation approaches, techniques, and high-level tooling concepts without being tied to a specific product.
Learners will develop informed decision-making skills that support efficient, scalable, and quality-focused testing strategies.
Facts
- Course Level: Introductory
- Duration: Approximately 7 hours
- Exam Duration: Not applicable
- Pass Mark: Not applicable
- Prerequisites: Prior experience in software or system testing recommended
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 1 day
Who It’s For
This course is designed for software testers, QA professionals, and test analysts who already have experience in manual or system testing and want to understand automation concepts before progressing to hands-on or tool-specific training. It is also suitable for test leads, QA managers, and technical professionals who need a strategic understanding of automation to support decision-making, team development, or process improvement initiatives.Exam Information
Exam : Not applicablePre-Course Requirements
Learners should have at least one year of experience working in software or system testing environments. Familiarity with basic programming concepts or scripting languages such as Java or C++ can be beneficial but is not mandatory.Frequently Asked Questions
Is this an accredited or certified course?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course and does not provide formal accreditation or certification.
Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.
Will I learn specific automation tools such as Selenium?
No. The course focuses on concepts, approaches, and decision-making rather than hands-on training with specific tools.
Is this course suitable as a first step into automation testing?
Yes. It is specifically designed as an introductory programme for professionals considering automation as a next step.
Do I need programming experience to attend?
Programming experience is not required, although basic familiarity with coding concepts may help contextual understanding.
How does this course differ from tool-specific automation training?
This course explains why and when automation should be used, whereas tool-specific training focuses on how to implement automation using particular technologies.
Is this course suitable for experienced automation testers?
No. It is aimed at beginners or those transitioning from manual testing roles.
Will this course help me progress to advanced testing certifications?
Yes. It provides the foundational understanding needed before pursuing advanced or tool-specific certifications.
Is this course relevant for managers or team leads?
Yes. It supports informed decision-making around automation strategy and investment.
Is this course suitable for corporate teams?
Yes. It is commonly used as an entry-level automation awareness programme for testing teams.
Is there any pre-course work required?
No. There is no mandatory pre-course study.
Are course materials provided?
Yes. Supporting course materials are included.
Does this course cover Agile or DevOps contexts?
Automation concepts are explained in the context of modern development and delivery environments.
Will I be able to automate tests after completing this course?
No. The course builds understanding, not hands-on automation capabilit.
The iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation course builds on foundational automation knowledge to provide participants with the skills, understanding, and formal certification required to design, implement, and maintain automated test solutions using Selenium WebDriver. This international certification is globally recognised and combines conceptual understanding with practical application so that learners can confidently develop and execute reliable automated tests across a range of web applications. Participants explore automation strategy, principles, and best practices as they relate to Selenium 4 and related tools within real-world testing environments. Completion of the course and successful examination demonstrates both knowledge and capability in essential Selenium automation techniques, making this training strategically valuable for test professionals seeking measurable credentialing and enhanced career prospects.
What’s Included
Accredited iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation trainingExam included (Pearson VUE or remote proctor)
Official course materials
Interactive instruction and practical examples
Practice support for exam preparation
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Instructor-led live virtual classroom training covering the full syllabus over three days in an online environment, combining theory and hands-on exercises with formative discussion and exam preparation guidance.
Price: £1,470.00 + VAT for virtual delivery including exam.
Learners will gain the ability to explain core Selenium automation concepts and articulate how automated testing fits into broader quality assurance and DevOps practices.
Learners will be able to design, implement, and maintain automated solutions using Selenium WebDriver with a clear understanding of scripting principles and object locators.
Learners will develop practical skills in creating and executing automated web application tests that are robust, maintainable, and efficient.
Learners will understand how to select appropriate Selenium components and tools such as WebDriver, IDE, and Grid to support parallel and scalable automation.
Learners will be prepared to sit the iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation examination and demonstrate measurable competency in automation design and execution,
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation (certification level)
- Duration: 3 days (approx. 21 hours)
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: General programming knowledge, basic familiarity with Python or Java recommended
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 3 days.
Who It’s For
This course is intended for software testers, automation engineers, developers, and quality assurance professionals who seek internationally recognised certification in Selenium automation. It is suitable for those with some basic programming understanding and testing experience who wish to formalise their automation skills, as well as for practitioners aiming to demonstrate their capability with a credential that supports professional progression.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: 40 multiple choice
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation (iSQI / A4Q recognised)
- Delivery Method: Online remote proctor or Pearson VUE authorised testing centre
Pre-Course Requirements
Participants should have a general understanding of basic programming concepts and familiarity with either Python or Java syntax. Prior exposure to foundational test automation principles will facilitate learning but is not strictly mandatory.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation course about?
The course introduces the essentials of Selenium automation, teaching participants how to create, execute, and maintain reliable automated tests while understanding tools, strategies, and best practices that enhance testing efficiency.
Can I take this course without coding experience?
Attendees should have a general knowledge of programming and some familiarity with Python or Java to fully engage with the practical aspects of the course, although complete beginners may still benefit from foundational portions.
Will this course enhance my career prospects?
Yes. The certification demonstrates recognised automation skills that can support roles such as software tester, automation engineer, or quality assurance specialist.
Is hands-on practice included?
The course combines theoretical understanding with practical training exercises that reinforce key concepts.
Is there pre-course work required?
No mandatory pre-course assignments are required, although preparation with basic programming and test automation principles will help learners.
Does the price include the exam?
Yes, the listed course price for virtual delivery includes the certification exam.
Can I take the exam remotely?
Yes. The exam can be conducted via remote proctoring or at a Pearson VUE test centre, depending on availability and learner preference.
Do I receive an internationally recognised certificate?
Yes. Upon passing the exam you receive the iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation certification, recognised globally.
What languages are used in the course?
The syllabus commonly references Python and Java as examples for Selenium automation scripts.
The Introduction to Risk Based Testing course provides a structured and practical understanding of how risk management principles are applied within software testing and wider IT projects. This course is designed to help professionals prioritise testing effort based on risk, enabling teams to focus resources where failures would have the greatest business, technical, or operational impact.
Through this two-day skills-based programme, learners develop a clear understanding of how risks are identified, analysed, and mitigated throughout the software development lifecycle. The course demonstrates how risk-based testing improves efficiency, supports better decision-making, and contributes to the delivery of more robust and reliable software solutions.
This training does not lead to formal certification; instead, it equips participants with practical knowledge and techniques that can be applied immediately within real-world testing and project environments.
What’s Included
- Instructor-led Introduction to Risk Based Testing training
- Accompanying digital course materials
- Practical explanations of risk management concepts
- Real-world examples applied to software testing contexts
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Immersive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of guided instruction. The course includes interactive discussion, applied examples, and structured exploration of risk-based testing techniques.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will understand the role of risk management within software development and software testing activities.
Learners will be able to explain the three stages of risk management: identification, analysis, and mitigation.
Learners will understand how risk-based testing is applied at both individual component level and across entire software projects.
Learners will develop the ability to prioritise testing effort based on risk exposure and business impact.
Learners will gain practical insight into applying risk management techniques to improve testing effectiveness and efficiency.
Facts
- Course Level: Introductory
- Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
- Exam Duration: Not applicable
- Pass Mark: Not applicable
- Prerequisites: No formal prerequisites
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for software testers, test analysts, test engineers, test consultants, and test managers who want to apply risk-based principles to improve testing outcomes. It is also relevant for user acceptance testers, software developers, project managers, quality managers, business analysts, and professionals involved in managing or delivering IT and software development projects.Exam Information
Exam :Not applicablePre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for attending this course. However, prior experience working on IT or software development projects is recommended to maximise understanding and practical application.Frequently Asked Questions
How does risk management improve software development and testing?
Risk management helps teams focus effort on the areas most likely to cause failure or business impact, improving efficiency, reducing defects, and supporting better delivery decisions.
Are there any prerequisites for the Introduction to Risk Based Testing course?
No formal prerequisites are required, although experience in IT or software projects is beneficial.
How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as a live virtual classroom programme over two consecutive days.
What are the benefits of completing this course?
Learners gain practical skills to prioritise testing effort, manage uncertainty, and improve the effectiveness of software testing activities.
Is this an accredited or certified course?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.
Does the course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.
Is this course suitable for managers and non-testers?
Yes. The course is relevant for professionals involved in project delivery, quality management, and decision-making roles.
Can these techniques be applied outside software testing?
Yes. Risk management principles covered in the course are applicable across wider IT and project management contexts.
Is there any pre-course work required?
No. There is no mandatory pre-course study.
Will completing this course help me increase my wages or salary potential?
Completing the Introduction to Risk Based Testing training can enhance your professional profile and demonstrate that you understand risk-driven testing approaches, which is valued by employers and can contribute to stronger performance reviews and improved negotiation position for salary progression.
What kind of job roles might offer higher wages after gaining skills from this course?
Roles such as Senior Test Analyst, Test Lead, QA Manager, Quality Assurance Consultant, and Project Test Coordinator often value risk-based testing expertise, and professionals in these positions frequently command higher wages compared to entry-level testing roles because of their strategic contribution to testing effectiveness.
Is risk-based testing knowledge recognised by employers in the UK and internationally?
Yes. Risk-based testing is widely recognised as a key competence in both UK and international software quality assurance practices, and many organisations explicitly list risk management and prioritisation skills in job descriptions, making this knowledge attractive to recruiters and hiring managers.
Can this course help me transition from a technical role into a managerial or leadership position?
Yes. The focus on risk prioritisation, quality decision-making, and strategic testing application in this course supports the development of leadership capabilities, which can be beneficial for individuals aiming to progress from technical testing roles into management, team leadership, or project coordination positions.
Yes. Professionals who can apply risk-based testing principles are often viewed as higher-value contributors because they help organisations prioritise testing effort, reduce project risk, and improve delivery outcomes. As a result, roles that require risk-based decision-making and testing leadership responsibilities typically attract higher salaries than purely execution-focused manual testing positions.
The Introduction to User Acceptance Testing course provides a comprehensive understanding of how UAT differs from other forms of software testing and why it is critical to delivering systems that truly meet business and user needs. The course explains where UAT sits within the software development lifecycle, who is responsible for conducting it, and how it supports effective decision-making before systems are released into live environments.
This course explores UAT across a range of delivery models, including traditional waterfall, V-model, and Agile projects. Learners develop practical skills in UAT planning, estimation, execution, and defect management, enabling them to bridge the gap between technical delivery teams and business stakeholders. The focus is on ensuring software solutions align with real-world user expectations and organisational objectives.
This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation or exam.
What’s Included
- Instructor-led Introduction to User Acceptance Testing training
- Accompanying course materials
- Practical exercises focused on UAT planning, execution, and reporting
- Hands-on examples aligned to real-world UAT scenarios
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Interactive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of immersive, skills-based learning. The course combines theory, discussion, and practical activities to build confidence in managing and executing effective UAT processes.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will understand the importance of user acceptance testing throughout all stages of software development.
Learners will be able to establish clear responsibilities between users, testers, and developers.
Learners will apply a risk-based approach to UAT activities.
Learners will be able to create a structured UAT plan.
Learners will define measurable and testable acceptance criteria.
Learners will identify the most common testing techniques used in UAT.
Learners will select appropriate UAT techniques based on system type and business risk.
Facts
- Course Level: Introductory / Foundation
- Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
- Exam Duration: Not applicable
- Pass Mark: Not applicable
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days
Who It’s For
This course is designed for Software Testers, Project Managers, Business Analysts, Business Managers, and other professionals involved in user acceptance testing in management, operational, or support roles. It is particularly valuable for those responsible for ensuring systems meet business and user expectations prior to release.Exam Information
Exam : Not applicablePre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No pre-course work is required.Frequently Asked Questions
What is user acceptance testing (UAT)?
User acceptance testing is the final phase of testing where users or business representatives validate that a system meets agreed requirements and is fit for purpose before release.
Who is this course designed for?
The course is suitable for testers, business analysts, project managers, and business stakeholders involved in validating software against user and business needs.
Is the Introduction to User Acceptance Testing course accredited?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.
How will this course help with my career?
The course strengthens practical UAT skills that are highly valued in testing, business analysis, and project delivery roles, particularly in organisations delivering business-critical systems.
How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as instructor-led live virtual classroom training over two days.
Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.
What salary impact can UAT skills have?
In the UK, professionals with UAT responsibilities typically earn between £35,000 and £55,000 per year, with senior UAT analysts and business-facing testing roles earning £60,000 or more, depending on experience and sector.
This course introduces learners to systematic testing approaches, focusing on how testing activities integrate throughout the software development lifecycle. Learners gain practical exposure to test design, execution, defect reporting, and working with user stories, enabling them to contribute effectively to testing activities within real project teams.
This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation or exam.
What’s Included
Instructor-led Introduction to Test Engineering trainingAccompanying course materials
Practical exercises focused on test design, execution, and defect reporting
Hands-on examples aligned to real-world testing scenarios.
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Interactive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of structured, skills-based learning. The course combines theory, discussion, and practical activities to build confidence in core test engineering skills.
Price: £700.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £58.33 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will be able to identify and report issues found in user stories.
Learners will design effective tests based on specific requirements.
Learners will record test execution results using session sheets.
Learners will verify software functionality against defined acceptance criteria.
Learners will document and raise defects with sufficient detail to support resolution.
Learners will understand how user stories support test case development.
Learners will apply structured test design techniques to improve software quality.
Facts
- Course Level: Introductory / Foundation
- Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
- Exam Duration: Not applicable
- Pass Mark: Not applicable
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days
Who It’s For
This course is aimed at individuals looking to start a career in software testing, including apprentices, people new to testing, and professionals seeking cross-functional training. It is also suitable for those working alongside testing teams who want to better understand structured testing practices.
Exam Information
Exam : Not applicable
Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required for this training. No prior testing experience is necessary.Frequently Asked Questions
How long does the Introduction to Test Engineering course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two days in a live virtual classroom format.
What are user stories in software testing?
User stories describe system functionality from an end-user perspective and are used by testers to design and validate tests against acceptance criteria.
How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as instructor-led live virtual classroom training, combining explanation, discussion, and practical exercises.
What career opportunities does this course support?
This course supports entry-level and junior roles such as Software Tester, Junior Test Engineer, QA Assistant, and Testing Apprentice.
Is this course accredited or certified?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.
Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.
Can this course help me move into Agile or DevOps environments?
Yes. The course introduces testing concepts applicable across traditional, Agile, and DevOps development models.
What salary can I expect after developing these skills?
In the UK, entry-level software testing roles typically offer salaries between £23,000 and £32,000 per year. With experience, test engineers commonly progress to roles earning £35,000 to £50,000 per year, depending on industry and responsibility.
The Test Techniques – Foundation Level course provides a structured introduction to the most widely used software test design techniques. It is designed to help learners understand how to design effective test cases that deliver meaningful coverage within the practical constraints of real-world projects.
The course focuses primarily on black-box testing techniques while introducing key white-box concepts, giving learners a balanced foundation for understanding how tests are derived from requirements, business processes, and system structure. Emphasis is placed on practical application, enabling learners to confidently select and apply appropriate test techniques based on system type, complexity, and risk.
This is a skills-based course with no formal accreditation or exam. It is commonly used as a foundation for progression into more advanced testing roles or advanced-level test techniques training.
What’s Included
- Instructor-led Test Techniques – Foundation Level training
- Practical group exercises and discussions
- Model answers to reinforce correct technique application
- Hands-on examples of test case design and coverage measurement
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Interactive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of structured, skills-based learning. The course combines explanation, discussion, and practical exercises to support the development of core test design competence.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will understand formal techniques used to design effective test cases.
Learners will gain experience applying commonly used black-box and introductory white-box test design techniques.
Learners will be able to select appropriate test techniques for different systems and contexts.
Learners will understand how risk influences the choice of test techniques.
Learners will learn how test techniques are used to create test cases and measure test coverage.
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
- Exam Duration: Not applicable
- Pass Mark: Not applicable
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days
Who It’s For
This course is aimed at professionals involved in software testing who want to improve the quality and effectiveness of the tests they design. It is suitable for junior testers, testers moving into more structured testing roles, developers involved in testing, and professionals seeking a solid grounding in test design techniques.
Exam Information
Exam: Not applicable
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no pre-course requirements for this training. The course is suitable for learners new to formal test design techniques as well as those seeking to strengthen their foundational knowledge.Frequently Asked Questions
How long does the Test Techniques – Foundation Level course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two days in a live virtual classroom format.
What is test design?
Test design is the process of defining and structuring test cases to ensure that software behaviour is validated efficiently and effectively against requirements and risks.
Do I need prior experience in software testing to attend this course?
No. This course does not require prior testing experience and is suitable for beginners.
What topics are covered in this course?
Topics include the test process, core test design techniques, process and state-based testing, structural testing, and selecting appropriate test techniques.
How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as live, instructor-led virtual classroom training with interactive exercises and discussions.
What career paths are available after completing this course?
This course supports progression into roles such as Software Tester, Test Analyst, QA Engineer, and provides a foundation for advanced test techniques or specialist testing training.
Is this course accredited or certified?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.
Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.
Can this course help me progress to advanced testing courses?
Yes. This course is commonly used as preparation for advanced-level test techniques training.
What salary range is typical for professionals using these skills?
In the UK, entry-level and junior testing roles typically earn between £25,000 and £35,000 per year, while testers with strong test design skills often progress to roles earning £40,000 to £55,000 per year, depending on experience and industry.
The Test Techniques – Advanced Level course is a specialist, skills-based programme designed for experienced software testing professionals who want to deepen their expertise in advanced test design and analysis techniques. The course focuses on both black-box and white-box testing approaches as they are applied to code, decision logic, and business processes, enabling learners to design more effective, risk-aware, and standards-aligned test cases.
This advanced training aligns with recognised software testing standards, including ISO/IEC/IEEE 29119 and the BCS Software Component Testing Standard, ensuring that techniques are applied in a structured and industry-accepted manner. Through intensive practical examples and guided analysis, learners develop the judgement required to select the most appropriate test techniques for different systems, levels of risk, and delivery contexts.
The course does not lead to formal certification; instead, it strengthens professional capability and supports progression into senior testing, quality assurance, and test leadership roles where advanced analytical skills are essential.
What’s Included
- Instructor-led Test Techniques – Advanced Level training
- Practical exercises supported by model answers
- Advanced test design and analysis examples
- Application of standards-aligned testing techniques
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Immersive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of advanced skills-based instruction. The course includes applied exercises, structured analysis, and expert guidance on selecting and applying test techniques effectively.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will be able to apply static analysis techniques to identify test objectives and testing risks.
Learners will develop the ability to apply structure-based and white-box test design techniques to code and logic flows.
Learners will be able to apply black-box testing techniques to business processes using use-cases and scenarios.
Learners will understand how to select appropriate test techniques based on system type, complexity, and risk exposure.
Learners will gain the ability to design test cases that support effective coverage measurement and quality assurance decision-making.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced
- Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
- Exam Duration: Not applicable
- Pass Mark: Not applicable
- Prerequisites: Test Techniques – Foundation Level or equivalent knowledge
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days
Who It’s For
This course is intended for software testers, test analysts, test engineers, and QA professionals who are actively involved in designing and reviewing test cases and want to improve the quality, depth, and effectiveness of their testing. It is particularly suitable for practitioners moving into senior testing, specialist, or test leadership roles where advanced analytical techniques are required.Exam Information
Exam : Not applicablePre-Course Requirements
Learners should have completed the Test Techniques – Foundation Level course or possess equivalent practical knowledge and experience in software testing concepts and test design techniques.Frequently Asked Questions
How long does the Test Techniques – Advanced Level course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two consecutive days in a live virtual classroom format.
Do I need prior experience in software testing to enrol on this course?
Yes. This is an advanced course and is intended for professionals with prior testing experience or equivalent foundational knowledge.
What topics are covered in this course?
Topics include static and dynamic testing fundamentals, flow and call graph analysis, advanced white-box techniques, black-box testing using use-cases, and selecting appropriate test techniques based on risk and context.
How will this course benefit my career?
The course strengthens advanced analytical and test design skills that are commonly required in senior testing, QA specialist, and test leadership roles.
Can this course help me move into a senior or lead testing role?
Yes. The advanced techniques covered support progression into roles with greater responsibility for test strategy, coverage, and quality assurance decisions.
Is this an accredited or certified course?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.
Does the course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.
What kind of salary can I expect with advanced test techniques skills?
In the UK, experienced software testers and QA professionals typically earn between £40,000 and £55,000 per year. Senior Test Analysts, QA Specialists, and Test Leads with advanced test design and analysis skills often earn between £55,000 and £70,000 per year, with higher salaries possible in London, large enterprises, or specialist consulting roles.
Does advanced test techniques knowledge add value beyond automation skills?
Yes. Advanced test techniques improve test effectiveness and decision-making regardless of whether testing is manual or automated, and are highly valued in complex or high-risk systems.
Is this course suitable for managers or non-technical roles?
The course is primarily aimed at hands-on testing professionals, but managers with strong technical involvement may also benefit.
The ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT) course equips software testers, quality assurance professionals, business analysts, and product owners with the practical expertise required to validate that software meets documented business requirements and stakeholder expectations. Acceptance testing is a critical phase of the software development lifecycle where the focus shifts from defect-based test design to collaboration with business units, product owners, and analysts to define and execute acceptance criteria that reflect real business scenarios. This course blends theoretical frameworks with practical techniques such as acceptance criteria creation, experience-based testing methods, business process modelling, and handling non-functional requirements including usability, performance, and security. By completing this course and successfully passing the ISTQB CT-AcT exam, delegates enhance their ability to ensure software outcomes align with strategic business goals, improve cross-functional team collaboration, and demonstrate internationally recognised competence in acceptance testing.
What’s Included
- Accredited TSG CT-AcT training materials
- Official ISTQB acceptance testing syllabus alignment
- Exam voucher for the ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing certification
- Interactive scenario-based exercises
- Tutor support throughout the course
- Practice exam questions and revision resources
- Post-course reference materials and guides
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG
Immersive 2-day accredited course delivered online, approximately 7 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: From £924 + VAT
Delegates will understand the foundational principles and business value of acceptance testing within the software lifecycle.
Participants will be able to collaborate effectively with product owners, business analysts, and stakeholders to define clear and testable acceptance criteria.
Learners will develop the ability to write robust acceptance tests that align with business objectives and quality requirements.
Participants will apply experience-based testing techniques to uncover defects that may not be visible through traditional test design methods.
Learners will gain competence in modelling business processes and deriving acceptance tests from those models.
Participants will incorporate non-functional aspects such as usability, performance, and security into acceptance test planning and execution.
Learners will improve their ability to communicate test outcomes and quality insights to both technical and business audiences.
Delegates will integrate acceptance testing practices into Agile, iterative, or traditional delivery models with confidence.
Participants will approach acceptance testing with a risk-aware mindset that balances business priorities with quality assurance needs.
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation / Specialist
- Duration: eLearning 16–20 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 2 days.
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native English speakers)
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation certificate required
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom 2 days,.
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for software testers, acceptance testers, QA professionals, test analysts, business analysts, product owners, and anyone involved in validating that software meets stakeholder or contractual requirements. It is particularly relevant for professionals who engage in user acceptance testing (UAT), contractual and regulatory acceptance testing, alpha and beta testing, or those responsible for aligning test activities with business outcomes.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native English speakers)
- Number of Questions: 40
- Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT)]
- Delivery Method: Online (eLearning), Live Virtual Classroom, or Classroom with Pearson VUE exam booking
Pre-Course Requirements
Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate prior to attending. It is recommended that participants have some practical experience with software testing principles and involvement with acceptance criteria or test execution in business contexts. No mandatory pre-course work is required, though familiarisation with the ISTQB acceptance testing syllabus enhances learning efficiency.
FAQ
What is the ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT) certification?
The CT-AcT certification validates that a professional can design, execute, and evaluate acceptance testing to ensure software meets business requirements and stakeholder expectations.
Who should take the ISTQB Acceptance Testing course?
This course is designed for testers, QA professionals, test analysts, business analysts, and product owners seeking to enhance their acceptance testing skills and ensure business alignment in testing.
What prerequisites are required for the CT-AcT course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation certificate. Prior practical testing experience is advantageous but not mandatory.
How long is the ISTQB Acceptance Testing course?
The Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom formats are 2 days, approximately 7 hours per day. eLearning is flexible, typically 16–20 hours of self-paced study.
Is the exam fee included in the course price?
Yes, all delivery options include the ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing exam voucher.
How is the CT-AcT exam structured?
The exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions, takes 60 minutes (with extra time for non-native English speakers), and requires a 65% pass mark.
Can I take the course without sitting the exam?
Yes, delegates may attend for professional development, although formal certification requires passing the exam.
What practical skills will I gain?
Delegates will learn acceptance test design, stakeholder collaboration, process modelling, experience-based testing, and quality evaluation techniques.
Does the CT-AcT course cover non-functional testing?
Yes, topics such as usability, performance, and security acceptance tests are included.
Will this certification help my career?
Yes, the certification demonstrates competency in acceptance testing and improves credibility with employers in quality assurance and cross-functional delivery roles.
How do I book the exam?
Delegates receive a Pearson VUE voucher and can schedule their exam at a convenient time and location before the voucher expiry.
Does the course include hands-on exercises?
Yes, scenario-based exercises and practical examples are integrated into the training to reinforce real-world application.
Is prior business analysis experience useful?
Yes, familiarity with requirements definition, business rules, or stakeholder engagement enhances understanding.
How does acceptance testing fit into Agile processes?
Acceptance testing is essential in Agile for validating user stories against acceptance criteria and ensuring incremental delivery aligns with stakeholder expectations.
What are follow-on certifications after CT-AcT?
Holders may progress to ISTQB Advanced Level qualifications such as Test Analyst, Test Manager, Technical Test Analyst, or specialist streams like Security or Test Automation.
The ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) v3.0 course is a strategic and practical leadership programme designed for experienced software testing professionals aspiring to senior test management roles. This course builds on the foundational principles of the ISTQB Certified Tester scheme to provide advanced competencies in planning, monitoring, controlling, and improving testing activities across the software development lifecycle. Delegates gain deep insight into how to define test strategies that align with organisational objectives, how to lead and motivate test teams, and how to make informed decisions using meaningful quality metrics. Through a blend of expert instruction, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation support, participants will develop the capability to manage complex testing projects, communicate effectively with stakeholders, and embed risk-based decision-making into test management processes. CTAL-TM certification is recognised globally as evidence of leadership in software testing, providing career enhancing value for professionals targeting roles such as Test Manager, QA Manager, Project Manager, or Test Consultant.
What’s Included
- Accredited ISTQB CTAL-TM training
- Official course manuals and supporting learning materials
- Exam voucher included for the ISTQB CTAL-TM exam
- Scenario-based exercises and practical workshops
- Tutor guidance throughout the course
- Practice exam questions and revision resources
- Post-course support and reference materials
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by TSG
Self-paced, approximately 30–35 hours, 12-month licence period, with exam included. Price: £1210 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG
Immersive learning experience, 4-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, approximately 7 hours per day, interactive workshops, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by TSG
In-person, instructor-led training with classroom exercises, structured discussions, and exam preparation. 4 days, approximately 7 hours per day. Exam included. Price: £2340 + VAT
Managers and test leaders will learn to define and implement test strategies that align with organisational goals and project contexts.
Participants will develop the ability to plan, monitor, and control testing activities through the application of established test management processes.
Delegates will be able to analyse stakeholder needs and communicate test status and quality risks clearly and effectively to project sponsors.
Learners will assess risk and incorporate risk-based testing methods into test planning and execution for better resource optimisation.
Participants will acquire skills to build and lead effective test teams, including role definition, skills assessment, and performance improvement.
Delegates will be equipped to prepare detailed test plans, estimate effort and resources, and structure testing tasks to meet deadlines and quality goals.
Learners will gain expertise in reporting test progress using meaningful metrics, dashboards, and status indicators.
Participants will understand defect lifecycle management techniques and how to integrate defect insights into continuous quality improvement processes.
Delegates will contribute to organisational improvement activities by applying process evaluation and optimisation techniques.
Learners will become familiar with test tools that support planning, tracking, reporting, and automation where applicable.
Participants will apply leadership skills to manage test objectives within Agile, DevOps, and hybrid project delivery environments.
Facts
Course Level: Advanced
Duration: eLearning 30–35 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 4 days, Classroom 4 days
Exam Duration: 120 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native English speakers as standard ISTQB policy)
Pass Mark: 65%
Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certificate required; six months testing or development experience recommended
Delivery Methods: eLearning 30–35 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 4 days, Classroom 4 days
Who It’s For
This course is designed for experienced testing professionals who are preparing for leadership roles in software testing. It is suitable for Test Managers, Test Leads, Quality Assurance Managers, Project Managers, Product Owners, Scrum Masters, and Senior Test Consultants. The course is also beneficial for professionals who collaborate closely with testing teams and need a strategic understanding of test governance, resource management, and quality risk communication.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes
- Number of Questions: 50
- Question Type: Multiple choice, scenario-based, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) v3.0
- Delivery Method: Remote proctored or in-centre Pearson VUE exam (voucher included)
Pre-Course Requirements
Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. It is recommended that participants have practical experience in software development or testing, typically at least six months, to maximize understanding and engagement with test management concepts. No mandatory pre-course work is required. ilxgroup.com
FAQ
What is the ISTQB Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) certification?
The CTAL-TM certification validates advanced competencies in planning, monitoring, controlling, and improving test activities across the software development lifecycle, aligning testing with business goals. istqb.org
Who should take the ISTQB CTAL-TM course?
This course is designed for professionals involved in managing test activities, including Test Managers, Test Leads, QA Managers, Project Managers, and Product Owners, as well as individuals aiming for strategic roles in software quality.
What prerequisites are required for the CTAL-TM course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. A minimum of six months’ testing or software development experience is recommended to fully benefit from the course content.
How long is the ISTQB CTAL-TM course?
The Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom formats are 4 days. eLearning is self-paced and typically requires about 30–35 hours of study.
Is the exam fee included in the course price?
Yes, all delivery options include the ISTQB CTAL-TM exam voucher.
How is the CTAL-TM exam structured?
The exam includes 50 multiple-choice questions, is 120 minutes long, and requires a 65% pass mark
Can I attend the course without taking the exam?
Yes, you may attend for professional development, though formal certification requires passing the exam.
What practical skills will I gain?
Delegates will learn strategic test planning, resource management, risk-based testing, metrics reporting, team leadership, and defect lifecycle management.
Does the course cover Agile and DevOps environments?
Yes, strategic test management in modern delivery environments such as Agile and DevOps is integrated into the syllabus.
Will this certification help my career?
Yes, it provides recognised advanced test management credentials that are valuable for senior QA, test leadership, and project management roles.
What tools and techniques are discussed?
The course includes methods for planning, tracking, reporting, test process improvement, and defect management, and introduces test tools as appropriate.
Are practical exercises included?
Yes, scenario-based workshops and exercises help reinforce real-world application of test management principles.
Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, the certification is fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB and recognised globally.
How do I book the exam?
Delegates receive a Pearson VUE exam voucher and can schedule their exam at a convenient local test centre.
What is the value of a Test Management certification?
It demonstrates strategic leadership in test governance and enhances credibility in senior testing and quality assurance roles.
What support is available if I need help?
Tutor support, revision resources, and practice questions are provided as part of the course materials.
The ISTQB Certified Tester Security Tester (CT‑SEC) course is an advanced certification designed for software testing professionals seeking specialist expertise in security testing. This course equips delegates with the knowledge and skills required to identify vulnerabilities, manage security risks, and enhance software resilience in both traditional and Agile development environments.
Through structured instruction, hands-on exercises, and practical examples, participants will gain a deep understanding of how to integrate security testing into the software development lifecycle. Delegates will explore human error mitigation, external threat management, and secure development practices to ensure software systems are robust and compliant with industry security standards.
By the end of the course, participants will be prepared to take the ISTQB Security Tester certification exam, demonstrating their ability to apply advanced security testing techniques, lead security testing initiatives, and contribute to organisational software security strategies. The CT‑SEC certification is internationally recognised, providing career advancement opportunities in high-demand security roles.
What’s Included
- Accredited Security Tester training
- Exam fee included
- Comprehensive course materials and manuals
- Practical exercises and scenario-based learning
- Tutor support throughout the course
- Access to practice exams and simulations
Delivery Options & Pricing
Virtual – Delivered by TSG
Interactive online learning with expert tutors, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Duration: 4 days. Exam included. Course materials included. Price: From £2100 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by TSG
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, practical exercises, and exam preparation. Duration: 4 days. Exam included. Course materials included. Price: From £2340 + VAT
eLearning – Delivered by TSG
Self-paced online learning with full access to course materials and the certification exam. Duration: variable. Exam included. Course materials included. Price: From £995 + VAT.
Participants will be able to evaluate system vulnerabilities and design test strategies that mitigate potential risks.
Delegates will apply security testing techniques across the software development lifecycle, including integration with Agile and DevOps practices.
Learners will assess human errors and lapses in testing procedures and implement corrective strategies.
Participants will identify and prioritise security risks, ensuring secure software development.
Delegates will analyse security testing results and communicate findings effectively to stakeholders.
Learners will implement secure practices in software development processes, reducing reliance on technology alone.
Participants will gain practical experience in managing security test infrastructure and tools.
Delegates will integrate security testing into continuous testing and continuous integration pipelines.
Learners will develop skills to lead security testing initiatives within project teams.
Participants will understand regulatory, compliance, and organisational requirements for security testing.
Delegates will monitor and optimise automated and manual security testing activities.
Learners will improve overall software quality by embedding security considerations into test planning and execution.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Security Tester (CT‑SEC)
- Duration: 3 days (Live Virtual Classroom / Classroom), 20 hours (eLearning)
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certificate; minimum three years of software testing experience recommended
- Delivery Methods: eLearning 20 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for experienced testers, security testers, test managers, IT security professionals, developers with security responsibilities, project managers, quality managers, business analysts, and IT directors. It is ideal for professionals who aim to incorporate advanced security testing practices into their software development and testing processes.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes
- Number of Questions: 45 multiple-choice
- Question Type: Multiple-choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 60%
- Delivery Method: Online (eLearning), remote proctoring (Live Virtual), in-class (Classroom)
Pre-Course Requirements
Participants must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. It is recommended that delegates have a minimum of three years of practical experience in software testing to fully benefit from the course content.
FAQ
What prerequisites are required for the ISTQB Security Tester course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation certificate and have a minimum of three years of software testing experience to maximise the benefit of this advanced training.
Who should take the ISTQB Security Tester course?
The course is designed for software testers, security testers, test managers, IT security professionals, developers with security responsibilities, project managers, and QA leads aiming to strengthen security testing expertise.
What is the duration of the ISTQB Security Tester course?
Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom formats run for 3 full days, 7 hours per day. The eLearning option is self-paced and comprises approximately 20 hours of interactive learning.
Is the exam fee included in the course price?
Yes, the ISTQB Security Tester exam fee is included in all delivery formats.
How is the ISTQB Security Tester exam structured?
The exam consists of 45 multiple-choice questions with a pass mark of 60%. The duration is 120 minutes. Non-native English speakers may receive additional time as per ISTQB guidelines.
What will I learn in this course?
Participants will develop advanced skills in identifying system vulnerabilities, designing security test strategies, mitigating human and technical risks, integrating security practices into software development lifecycles, and communicating findings effectively.
Does this course include practical exercises?
Yes, delegates engage in scenario-based exercises, real-world simulations, and practice exams to apply security testing principles.
What are the benefits of obtaining ISTQB Security Tester certification?
It validates advanced security testing competence, enhances career opportunities, and equips professionals to implement secure software development practices.
Can I attend the course without taking the exam?
Yes, the course may be taken for learning purposes, but certification requires passing the ISTQB Security Tester exam.
What tools and techniques are taught?
Delegates will use industry-standard security testing tools, risk assessment frameworks, and methods for evaluating vulnerabilities and optimising testing strategies.
Does this course cover regulatory and compliance requirements?
Yes, participants learn to align security testing practices with organisational policies, legal obligations, and industry standards.
Is prior security experience required?
While a foundation in software testing is required, the course introduces advanced security testing concepts suitable for delegates with limited prior exposure to security-specific practices.
Can this course support career progression?
Yes, it prepares professionals for roles such as Security Tester, Security Analyst, Test Manager, and other security-focused positions.
How do I register for the ISTQB Security Tester course?
Participants can register online or by contacting the ILX or DrTutor team, who will provide guidance on course options and scheduling.
Are there follow-on certifications after CT‑SEC?
Yes, participants may pursue ISTQB Advanced Level Test Manager, Technical Test Analyst, or Specialist certifications, including Security Testing or Agile streams.
Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, the ISTQB Security Tester certification is accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB and recognised worldwide.
The ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Analyst (CTAL-TA) course provides experienced testers with the specialist analytical capabilities required to design, implement, and optimise high-value testing activities across complex software environments. This advanced-level programme strengthens your ability to evaluate quality risks, engineer effective test conditions, and apply structured, evidence-based testing techniques aligned with industry best practice.
The course integrates the depth of the TSG programme with the proven ILX training methodology, ensuring complete alignment with the official ISTQB Advanced Level Test Analyst syllabus. Delegates develop mastery in defect classification, risk-based testing, requirements evaluation, behavioural testing approaches, and test design techniques that improve coverage and reduce rework. Throughout the training, learners work through realistic scenarios, structured exercises, and exam-style questions to reinforce application in real-world contexts.
By completing this course, professionals elevate their capability to support complex test strategies, contribute effectively to Agile, DevOps, and traditional project environments, and influence software quality decisions across teams. The certification is internationally recognised and forms a key milestone in the ISTQB Advanced career pathway. Delegates finish fully prepared to sit the ISTQB CTAL-TA exam and demonstrate advanced analytical testing expertise to employers worldwide.
What’s Included
- Accredited training manual
- Official ISTQB CTAL-TA syllabus reference
- TSG and ILX combined course materials
- Exam simulator with sample questions
- Scenario-based test design exercises
- Expert tutor support during training
- Full revision and exam preparation sessions
- ISTQB CTAL-TA exam voucher
- Accredited certificate upon passing the exam
- Course completion confirmation for CPD records
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by ILX-TSG with DrTutor support
Self-paced, approximately 30–35 hours of study, with 12-month access period, exam included. Price: £1210 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Immersive learning experience, 3-day accredited course delivered online, 7 hours per day, including interactive workshops, practical exercises, and exam preparation. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT
(Classroom delivery not available for this qualification under ILX or TSG at this time.)
Delegates will be able to analyse software quality risks and design targeted test conditions using advanced risk-based testing methods.
Delegates will apply behavioural test design techniques such as decision tables, state transition testing, and boundary value analysis to improve coverage and defect detection.
Delegates will conduct structured requirements reviews using analytical techniques to identify ambiguities, gaps, inconsistencies, and defects prior to testing.
Delegates will classify, prioritise, and track defects effectively using industry-standard classification models and reporting practices.
Delegates will contribute to integration, system, acceptance, and usability testing through well-engineered test scenarios and end-to-end coverage design.
Delegates will support Agile and iterative delivery models by analysing user stories, evaluating acceptance criteria, and contributing to collaborative test activities.
Delegates will measure, monitor, and communicate test progress, quality indicators, and risk exposure to stakeholders using structured reporting approaches.
Delegates will contribute to process improvement by evaluating test efficiency, analysing defect trends, and recommending optimisation strategies.
Delegates will design comprehensive test documentation that aligns with organisational policies, quality standards, and ISTQB best practice.
Delegates will apply advanced analytical reasoning to determine the most effective test design technique for given project constraints and risk profiles.
Key Facts
- Course Level: Advanced Level
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Analyst (CTAL-TA)
- Duration: eLearning 30–35 hours, Virtual Classroom 3 days
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes (150 minutes for non-native English speakers)
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL)
- Delivery Methods: eLearning 30–35 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days
Who It’s For
This course is designed for experienced software testers, test analysts, test engineers, quality assurance professionals, and test consultants who are responsible for designing and executing complex test scenarios, analysing software behaviour, and contributing to structured test strategies. It is also suitable for professionals preparing for advanced roles in test analysis, Agile testing, and quality risk assessment. Individuals seeking internationally recognised ISTQB Advanced certification will find this course an essential progression in their testing career.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes (150 minutes for non-native English speakers)
- Number of Questions: 40
- Question Type: Multiple choice, scenario-based, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Delivery Method: Online remote-proctored exam
Pre-Course Requirements
Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level Certificate (CTFL) before enrolling. It is strongly recommended that participants have a minimum of two to three years of practical software testing experience, including exposure to test design and defect reporting. Learners should be familiar with basic testing principles and comfortable analysing functional specifications prior to attending the course.
FAQ
What is the ISTQB Advanced Level Test Analyst certification?
It is an advanced-level qualification that validates a tester’s ability to design, implement, and analyse test conditions using structured, risk-based and behavioural techniques aligned with international best practice.
Is the course accredited?
Yes, the course is fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB.
What are the prerequisites for the CTAL-TA course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level Certificate (CTFL) and ideally have two to three years of practical testing experience.
How long is the course?
The virtual classroom course runs for 3 days at 7 hours per day. The eLearning course requires approximately 30–35 hours of self-paced study.
Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes, the exam voucher is included with both eLearning and Virtual delivery options.
What is the format of the exam?
The exam contains 40 multiple-choice questions, lasts 120 minutes, and requires a 65% pass mark.
Can I take the course without taking the exam?
Yes, you may take the course for learning only, although certification requires passing the formal exam.
What practical skills will I develop?
You will learn to analyse requirements, classify defects, design advanced test conditions, apply behavioural test techniques, and support risk-based testing approaches.
Does the course cover Agile environments?
Yes, the programme includes coverage of Agile testing practices, including user story analysis and iterative test design.
What industries recognise this certification?
The certification is widely recognised across technology, finance, government, telecommunications, healthcare, engineering, and consultancy sectors.
Will this certification help my career progression?
Yes, it provides advanced analytical testing capabilities that support progression to Test Lead, Senior Test Analyst, Test Consultant, or further ISTQB Advanced certifications.
What materials are provided?
Delegates receive accredited course manuals, practice questions, test design exercises, revision materials, and exam preparation support.
What is the difficulty level of the exam?
It is an advanced-level exam requiring strong analytical reasoning, structured test design, and deep understanding of testing techniques.
Is prior automation knowledge required?
No, CTAL-TA focuses on analysis and test design, not automation engineering.
Can I study using eLearning only?
Yes, the ILX eLearning package provides full coverage with tutor support and exam access.
What support is available if I struggle with certain topics?
Both ILX and DrTutor provide tutor assistance, revision guidance, and exam preparation resources.
Does the certificate expire?
No, ISTQB certificates do not expire once achieved.
The ISTQB Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI) course is an advanced certification program designed to equip software testing professionals with the skills required to effectively test AI systems. As AI technologies increasingly permeate enterprise applications, testers need specialized knowledge to understand AI models, validate AI outcomes, and assess potential risks related to algorithmic decision-making. This course provides delegates with a structured approach to AI testing, covering theoretical foundations, practical methodologies, and real-world applications. By the end of the program, participants will be able to confidently evaluate AI systems, design AI-specific test strategies, and contribute to higher-quality AI-driven products, ensuring alignment with organizational goals and regulatory standards. The course also prepares learners for the internationally recognized ISTQB CT-AI certification, demonstrating their expertise in AI testing practices.
What’s Included
- Instructor-led training in virtual or classroom formats
- Comprehensive course manuals and supporting materials
- Practical exercises and scenario-based workshops
- Access to practice exams and assessment simulators
- Tutor support and guidance throughout the course
- Official ISTQB CT-AI certification exam included
- Additional resources for AI testing methodologies and tools
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG
Immersive learning experience, 4-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, 7 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT.
Participants will be able to describe the purpose of AI testing within the software development lifecycle.
Delegates will understand AI system components, data pipelines, and model types, and how these affect testing strategies.
Learners will identify risks and biases in AI models and define test strategies to mitigate them.
Participants will design and execute test cases specifically for AI functionality, including validation of algorithms, training data, and outputs.
Delegates will integrate AI testing techniques into existing software testing frameworks and CI/CD pipelines.
Learners will analyze AI system outputs, evaluate model performance, and report findings effectively to stakeholders.
Participants will apply best practices for ensuring explainability, fairness, and compliance in AI systems.
Delegates will utilize tools and frameworks suitable for AI testing, including simulation, synthetic data generation, and automation.
Learners will assess the limitations of AI systems and communicate test results clearly to both technical and non-technical teams.
Participants will be equipped to plan continuous improvement opportunities for AI testing within an organization.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI)
- Duration: 4 days for Live Virtual Classroom or Classroom; Self-paced eLearning [insert hours]
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Certificate (CTFL) or equivalent; basic understanding of software testing
- Delivery Methods: eLearning [insert hours], Live Virtual Classroom 4 days, Classroom 4 days
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for software testers, test analysts, quality assurance engineers, test managers, and developers working with AI systems. It is also suitable for project managers, business analysts, and IT professionals seeking to understand AI testing practices and ensure the quality of AI-driven applications.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: 40 multiple-choice questions
- Question Type: Multiple-choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Delivery Method: Online, in-class, or remote proctored
- Accreditation: fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB
Pre-Course Requirements
Participants should hold the ISTQB Foundation Certificate (CTFL) or equivalent. A basic understanding of software testing principles and familiarity with AI concepts is recommended. Delegates are expected to complete any pre-course materials or reading assigned by TSG prior to attending the live sessions.
FAQs
What is the ISTQB AI Testing certification?
The ISTQB Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI) certification validates knowledge and skills in testing artificial intelligence systems. It ensures delegates understand AI fundamentals, machine learning principles, testing strategies for AI-driven software, and risk assessment approaches specific to AI applications. The certification demonstrates internationally recognized competence in AI testing, enhancing credibility in high-demand technology roles.
Who should take this course?
This course is suitable for software testers, QA engineers, developers, test managers, data scientists, and IT professionals working with AI systems. It is also relevant for professionals responsible for validating AI software quality, designing AI-based solutions, or integrating AI into existing testing processes.
What are the prerequisites for the AI Testing course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Certificate in Software Testing (CTFL). A basic understanding of software testing principles, practices, and lifecycle processes is recommended to fully benefit from the AI-specific content.
How long is the course?
The Virtual and Classroom versions run for 4 days, typically 7 hours per day. Self-paced eLearning is flexible and varies depending on the learner’s pace, with full coverage of the CT-AI syllabus.
Is the exam included in the course fee?
Yes, the ISTQB CT-AI certification exam is included in all delivery options. Delegates receive exam registration, structured preparation, and practice exercises as part of the course package.
How is the exam structured?
The exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions. Delegates have 60 minutes to complete the exam (75 minutes for non-native English speakers), and a pass mark of 65% is required to achieve certification.
Can I take the course without sitting the exam?
Yes, delegates may attend the course for professional development and learning purposes. However, the official ISTQB CT-AI certification is only awarded after successfully passing the exam.
What practical skills will I gain from this course?
Delegates will gain skills to assess AI systems, validate machine learning algorithms, identify and mitigate bias, design AI-specific testing strategies, evaluate data quality, and communicate AI testing findings effectively within development and QA teams.
Which tools and techniques are used in the course?
The course introduces practical AI testing frameworks, simulation tools, and synthetic data generation techniques. Delegates also learn to use automation and monitoring tools relevant for validating AI system behavior and performance.
Is prior AI experience required?
No prior experience with AI is required. The course provides foundational knowledge of AI and machine learning, explained in the context of software testing, making it accessible to professionals with general testing experience.
How does this course support career progression?
The course equips delegates with specialized AI testing skills, recognized internationally. This enables career advancement into roles such as AI software tester, test automation engineer with AI focus, QA lead for AI projects, and technical consultant in AI testing practices.
What follow-on certifications are available after CT-AI?
After completing CT-AI, participants can pursue further ISTQB certifications, including advanced technical modules in AI, specialist modules such as Security Testing or Test Automation, or Agile/Advanced Core testing streams. These provide a pathway to deepening expertise in AI testing or branching into related quality assurance areas.
How are AI-specific risks addressed in the course?
Delegates learn to identify unique risks in AI systems, including algorithmic bias, unpredictability of outputs, model transparency, and ethical considerations. The course teaches strategies to evaluate and mitigate these risks through targeted testing approaches and robust quality assurance practices.
Does the course include hands-on exercises?
Yes, delegates participate in scenario-based exercises and practical workshops designed to apply AI testing principles. These include designing test cases for AI models, evaluating AI system behavior, and working with datasets to simulate real-world testing conditions.
Is the CT-AI certification globally recognized?
Yes, the ISTQB CT-AI certification is fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB. It is internationally recognized and aligns with the ISTQB Certified Tester Scheme, which provides a global benchmark for software testing professionals.
The ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level – Test Automation Engineer (CTAL-TAE) v2.0 course is designed for experienced software testing professionals seeking to specialise in test automation. As part of the ISTQB Advanced Level certification track, this course equips delegates with the practical knowledge and methodologies required to design, implement, and maintain robust automated testing solutions within structured testing processes.
Through expert-led instruction and immersive practical exercises, participants will explore how test automation integrates into Agile, DevOps, and CI/CD practices. The course emphasises the selection of appropriate tools, frameworks, and methodologies to maximise test coverage, improve efficiency, and enhance overall software quality.
Aligned with the official ISTQB CTAL-TAE v2.0 syllabus, this training ensures comprehensive coverage of international certification standards. Delegates will gain the skills to assess automation feasibility, develop automation strategies, implement test automation frameworks, and manage automated test reporting effectively. By completing the course, participants will be fully prepared to sit the ISTQB Test Automation Engineer exam, validating their ability to lead and contribute to automation initiatives across diverse technologies and project domains.
What’s Included
Training materials, course manuals, instructor-led exercises, scenario-based workshops, practice exams, tutor support, eLearning resources, exam simulators, certification exam, access to post-course support resources.
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG / ILX
3-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, 9 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by TSG / ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. 3 days, 9 hours per day. Exam included. Price: £2280+ VAT
Collaborate in a cross-functional Agile team while being familiar with principles and practices of Agile software development.
-
Adapt existing testing experience and knowledge to align with Agile values and principles.
-
Support the Agile team in planning and coordinating test-related activities effectively.
-
Apply relevant methods and techniques for testing within an Agile project environment.
-
Assist the Agile team in test automation activities as required by project needs.
-
Understand the fundamentals of Agile software development.
-
Differentiate between various Agile approaches.
-
Comprehend the differences between testing in traditional and Agile approaches.
-
Plan and perform testing activities specifically for Agile projects.
-
Understand the roles and required skills of a tester in Agile projects.
-
Apply Agile testing techniques and methods proficiently.
-
Assess product quality risks within an Agile project and plan accordingly.
-
Estimate testing effort based on iteration content and quality risks.
-
Use tools commonly used in Agile projects for testing and reporting effectively.
-
Assist business stakeholders in defining understandable and testable user stories, scenarios, requirements, and acceptance criteria.
-
Communicate and share information effectively with other team members.
-
Describe the purpose of test automation within the software development lifecycle.
-
Understand the configuration of an infrastructure to enable test automation.
-
Learn the evaluation process for selecting appropriate tools and strategies.
-
Understand design concepts for building modular and scalable test automation solutions.
-
Select an approach, including a pilot, to plan test automation deployment within the software development lifecycle.
-
Design and develop (new or modified) test automation solutions that meet technical needs.
-
Consider scope, approach, and maintenance of testware.
-
Understand how automated tests integrate within CI/CD pipelines.
-
Collect, analyse, and report on test automation data to inform stakeholders.
-
Verify the test automation infrastructure.
-
Define continuous improvement opportunities for test automation.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced / Practitioner
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level – Test Automation Engineer (CTAL-TAE) v2.0
- Duration: 3 days (Live Virtual Classroom / Classroom), 18 hours (eLearning)
- Exam Duration: 90 minutes (113 minutes for non-native English speakers)
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certification, recommended minimum 3 years of testing experience
- Delivery Methods: eLearning 18 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for software testers, test automation engineers, test architects, test consultants, test managers, developers with automation responsibilities, project managers, quality managers, business analysts, and IT directors seeking to gain specialist skills in test automation.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 90 minutes (113 minutes for non-native English speakers)
- Number of Questions: 40 multiple-choice
- Question Type: Multiple-choice, scenario-based, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Accreditation: fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB
- Delivery Method: Online or in-class as per chosen training delivery
Pre-Course Requirements
Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certification. A minimum of three years of software testing experience is recommended. Familiarity with test automation concepts and Agile/DevOps practices is beneficial.
FAQs
What prerequisites are required for the ISTQB Advanced Test Automation Engineer course?
The entry requirement for the Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Automation Engineer qualification is that the candidate must hold the ISTQB Foundation certificate. It is also recommended that candidates have a minimum of three years of testing experience.
What is the duration of the ISTQB Advanced Test Automation Engineer course?
The course runs for three full days and includes exercises, practice exams, and comprehensive coverage of the syllabus designed to prepare participants for the certification exam.
What will I learn in the Advanced Test Automation Engineer course?
The course teaches delegates how to contribute to automation strategy development, evaluate automation tools, design and develop test automation solutions, manage automated test reporting, and maintain automated testing assets.
Is the exam fee included in the course fee, and what is the format of the exam?
Yes, the exam fee is included. The exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions to be completed in 90 minutes (113 minutes for non-native English speakers) with a pass mark of 65%.
What kind of accreditation will I receive upon completing the course?
Upon passing the exam, delegates will receive the ISTQB Advanced Test Automation Engineer Certification, which is internationally recognised.
Can I progress further after achieving CTAL-TAE?
Yes. Holders can progress to Advanced Level Test Manager, Advanced Technical Test Analyst, Agile Technical Tester, or Specialist certifications such as Security Testing.
Is practical training included?
Yes. Both virtual and classroom courses include scenario-based exercises and workshops to apply test automation techniques.
Who is the course suitable for?
Testers, Test Automation Engineers, Test Architects, Test Managers, Developers with automation responsibilities, Project Managers, Quality Managers, Business Analysts, and IT Directors.
How is the ISTQB Test Automation Engineer course delivered?
The course is available as self-paced eLearning, live virtual classroom, and in-person classroom sessions.
Is tutor support provided?
Yes. Tutors provide guidance, answer questions, and support exercises and practice exams.
What materials are provided?
Manuals, handouts, exercises, practice questions, eLearning resources, and exam simulators.
How does this course support real-world projects?
Scenario-based exercises and workshops allow delegates to apply automation techniques and principles to workplace testing environments.
Is the course internationally recognised?
Yes. ISTQB certification is globally recognised and aligns with international testing standards.
In today’s fast-paced Agile software development environment, the demand for high-quality, reliable software has never been greater. The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL‑AT) course from TSG is strategically designed to equip software testing professionals with the knowledge, methodologies, and practical skills required to excel within Agile teams. This course enables participants to understand the Agile lifecycle, including iterative planning, continuous integration, and collaborative testing practices. Through scenario-based exercises and real-world examples, learners gain the capability to implement effective testing strategies, align with Agile roles, and contribute meaningfully to project success. Completion of this course provides a recognised ISTQB certification, enhancing professional credibility, opening career advancement opportunities, and ensuring participants can apply Agile testing principles immediately in their workplace.
What’s Included
Course materials and manuals
Official ISTQB exam fee
Scenario-based exercises and workshops
Practical group exercises and tutor guidance
Access to eLearning resources (where applicable)
Certification upon successful completion
Delivery Options & Pricing – Delivered by TSG
Virtual Classroom
2-day instructor-led training, 9:00–17:00, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: From £1,105 + VAT
Classroom
2-day in-person instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Exam included. Price: From £1,225 + VAT
E-Learning
Self-paced, flexible access to course materials, practical exercises, and exam preparation resources. Exam included. Price: From £790 + VAT.
Participants will be able to collaborate in a cross-functional Agile team while being familiar with principles and basic practices of Agile software development.
-
Delegates will adapt their existing testing experience and knowledge to align with Agile values and principles.
-
Learners will support the Agile team in planning and coordinating test-related activities effectively.
-
Participants will apply relevant methods and techniques for testing within an Agile project environment.
-
Delegates will assist the Agile team in test automation activities as required by project needs.
-
Learners will understand the fundamentals of Agile software development.
-
Participants will be able to differentiate between various Agile approaches.
-
Delegates will comprehend the differences between testing in traditional and Agile approaches.
-
Learners will plan and perform testing activities specifically for Agile projects.
-
Participants will understand the roles and required skills of a tester in Agile projects.
-
Delegates will be able to apply Agile testing techniques and methods proficiently.
-
Learners will assess product quality risks within an Agile project and plan accordingly.
-
Participants will estimate testing effort based on iteration content and identified quality risks.
-
Delegates will be familiar with tools commonly used in Agile projects for testing and reporting.
-
Learners will assist business stakeholders in defining understandable and testable user stories, scenarios, requirements, and acceptance criteria as appropriate.
-
Participants will work and share information with other team members using effective communication styles and channels.
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation (Agile Tester Extension)
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL‑AT)
- Duration: Virtual 2 days, Classroom 2 days, E-Learning self-paced
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certification
- Delivery Methods: Virtual 2 days, Classroom 2 days, E-Learning self-paced
Who It’s For
This course is ideal for testers holding the ISTQB Foundation Certificate, test professionals transitioning into Agile projects, Scrum masters and product owners seeking to understand testing practices, developers and business analysts collaborating with testing teams, and anyone involved in Agile software delivery looking to formalise and certify their knowledge.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: 40
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Delivery Method: Online or in-class, depending on chosen course
Pre-Course Requirements
Participants must hold a valid ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. Basic experience in software testing is recommended. Familiarity with Agile principles is beneficial but not mandatory. Pre-course materials will be provided.
Key outcomes include:
- Mastery of Agile software development fundamentals and principles
- Ability to apply Agile testing techniques, methods, and tools in real projects
- Competence in planning and executing testing within iterative cycles
- Effective collaboration with Agile teams and stakeholders
- Skills to assess product quality risks and estimate testing effort accurately
- Practical application of TDD, BDD, and exploratory testing methods
- Understanding strategic benefits of Agile testing for business outcomes
- Capability to contribute to continuous improvement and team efficiency
FAQ
1-What is the ISTQB Agile Tester certification?
The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification provides a solid grounding in Agile testing principles, practices, and roles. It equips professionals with the skills to effectively test within Agile teams and projects.
2-How does Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) relate to Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
The Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) is a foundation-level certification, while the Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) is an advanced-level qualification. CTAL-ATT builds on the knowledge gained at Foundation level and focuses on more technical testing skills such as test automation, continuous integration, and service virtualisation.
3-Who should take the Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification?
This course is designed for software testers, test analysts, developers, business analysts, and anyone working in Agile teams who needs to understand how testing fits into Agile delivery.
4-What are the entry requirements for Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
To sit the exam, candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL) certificate. Agile project experience is recommended but not mandatory.
5-What skills will I gain from Agile Tester training?
You will learn how to apply Agile testing methods, work effectively within Agile teams, collaborate with developers and business stakeholders, and use risk-based testing and automation to support rapid delivery.
6-How is the Agile Tester exam structured?
The exam consists of multiple-choice questions, lasts 60 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native speakers), requires a passing score of 65%, and is a closed-book exam.
7-Can I progress further after Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
Yes. After achieving CTFL-AT, you can advance to higher-level certifications such as ISTQB Advanced Level Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) or explore other Agile, Core, or Specialist modules.
8-How long is the Agile Tester course?
The course duration depends on the delivery mode: Virtual Classroom and Classroom sessions are 2 days each, while eLearning is self-paced.
9-Is practical training included in the course?
Yes. Both Virtual Classroom and Classroom courses include scenario-based exercises and workshops that allow participants to apply Agile testing techniques in realistic situations.
10-Is the exam included in the course fee?
Yes. All delivery methods include the ISTQB Agile Tester exam as part of the course fee.
11-Do I need prior Agile experience to attend?
Familiarity with Agile concepts is helpful but not mandatory. The course covers all essential Agile principles and testing practices required for the certification.
12-What materials are provided during the course?
Participants receive manuals, handouts, access to practical exercises, and, where applicable, eLearning resources and simulators for exam preparation.
13-Will I receive tutor support?
Yes. Tutors are available throughout the course to guide participants, answer questions, and provide feedback on practical exercises.
14-What is the global recognition of this certification?
The ISTQB Agile Tester certification is recognized internationally and demonstrates that holders have the knowledge and skills to work effectively in Agile testing environments.
15-What are the benefits of obtaining this certification?
Benefits include improved competence in Agile testing, career advancement opportunities, ability to work effectively in Agile teams, and official ISTQB recognition of skills.
16-Can the exam be taken remotely?
Yes, depending on the delivery mode, the exam can be taken online or in-class.
17-How does this course support real-world Agile projects?
The course emphasizes practical application through scenario-based exercises, enabling participants to immediately apply learned techniques in their workplace and contribute to team success.
18-Is this course suitable for non-testers?
Yes. Developers, business analysts, Scrum masters, and other Agile team members who want to understand testing principles can benefit from this course.
What’s Included
Course materials, exam, tutor support, practical exercises, scenario-based workshops, online access for course resources, test simulatorsDelivery Options & Pricing
Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSGImmersive learning experience, 3-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, 9 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £895.50 + VAT
E‑Learning – Delivered by TSG
Self-paced, flexible online study, access to all course materials and exam simulator, with exam included. Price: £905.00 + VAT. //Offer: £510
Classroom – Delivered by TSG
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. 3 days, 9 hours per day. Exam included. Price: £1,057.50 + VAT
Note: Exact prices may vary depending on location, schedule and VAT. Please request a quote when booking.
Participants will be able to collaborate in a cross-functional Agile team while being familiar with principles and basic practices of Agile software development.
-
Delegates will adapt their existing testing experience and knowledge to align with Agile values and principles.
-
Learners will support the Agile team in planning and coordinating test-related activities effectively.
-
Participants will apply relevant methods and techniques for testing within an Agile project environment.
-
Delegates will assist the Agile team in test automation activities as required by project needs.
-
Learners will understand the fundamentals of Agile software development.
-
Participants will be able to differentiate between various Agile approaches.
-
Delegates will comprehend the differences between testing in traditional and Agile approaches.
-
Learners will plan and perform testing activities specifically for Agile projects.
-
Participants will understand the roles and required skills of a tester in Agile projects.
-
Delegates will be able to apply Agile testing techniques and methods proficiently.
-
Learners will assess product quality risks within an Agile project and plan accordingly.
-
Participants will estimate testing effort based on iteration content and identified quality risks.
-
Delegates will be familiar with tools commonly used in Agile projects for testing and reporting.
-
Learners will assist business stakeholders in defining understandable and testable user stories, scenarios, requirements, and acceptance criteria as appropriate.
-
Participants will work and share information with other team members using effective communication styles and channels.
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL)
- Duration: 3 days (Virtual & Classroom), Self-paced (E-Learning)
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL) recommended; basic IT understanding helpful
- Delivery Methods: Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days, E-Learning self-paced
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for software testers, test analysts, developers, business analysts, Scrum Masters, and other professionals working in Agile or traditional software development teams who wish to gain recognised testing certification and practical skills in software quality assurance.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: 40 multiple-choice
- Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Official ISTQB Agile Tester certification
- Delivery Method: Online (E-Learning), Remote Proctor (Virtual Classroom), In-class (Classroom)
Pre-Course Requirements
No formal prerequisites are required. A basic understanding of IT and software development concepts is recommended to fully benefit from the course.FAQ
1-What is the ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course?
The Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course is a foundational certification program designed for individuals seeking to advance their knowledge and skills in software testing. It covers the fundamentals of software testing, including test design, management, and understanding the software lifecycle.
2-Who should consider enrolling in the Certified Tester Foundation Level course?
The course is ideal for professionals who are new to the software testing field, including test analysts, test engineers, test consultants, test managers, user acceptance testers, and software developers. It is also beneficial for individuals seeking a career change into software testing.
3-What are the prerequisites for the Certified Tester Foundation Level course?
There are no formal prerequisites for the CTFL course. However, a basic understanding of IT and software development concepts is recommended to grasp the course content effectively.
4-Is there any pre-course work required?
Yes. There is mandatory online pre-course work that must be undertaken prior to attending this course. It is expected to take approximately four to five hours to complete. Full instructions and a link to the online pre-course are provided three weeks before the course start date.
5-How long does the course take to complete?
The duration of the Certified Tester Foundation Level course typically involves approximately 3 days of instructor-led training, which can be conducted in-person or online depending on the delivery mode.
6-What topics are covered in the Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course?
The course covers a wide range of topics, including fundamentals of testing, testing throughout the software development lifecycle, static testing, test design techniques, test management, and tool support for testing.
7-How is the Certified Tester Foundation Level certification exam structured?
The certification exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions. Candidates have 60 minutes to complete the exam (or 75 minutes for non-native English speakers in some countries). A score of 65% or higher is required to pass.
8-What are the benefits of obtaining the Certified Tester Foundation Level certification?
Obtaining the certification demonstrates a foundational understanding of software testing principles and practices. It enhances an individual’s credibility and marketability in the software testing job market and can lead to career advancement opportunities.
9-Can I take the Certified Tester Foundation Level course without taking the exam?
Yes. Individuals can attend the course for personal or professional development without taking the certification exam. However, taking and passing the exam results in obtaining the CTFL certification, which can be valuable for career progression.
10-How can I register for the Certified Tester Foundation Level course and exam?
To register:
-
Decide on the delivery method: choose between virtual (online) courses or traditional in-person classroom courses.
-
Select the exam format: the CTFL exam is typically available in both online and paper-based formats.
-
Complete payment: pay for the course and exam using credit card, bank transfer, or purchase order. Ensure all necessary information and authorisation are provided.
11-What is the cost of the Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course and exam?
The cost for the ISTQB Foundation Level Certification (CTFL) is from £895.50 + VAT for the Virtual Classroom, which is the cheapest option including exams and course materials.
12-What follow-on courses are available after passing the CTFL exam?
The CTFL certification is a prerequisite for other modules within the Certified Tester Scheme:
Core stream modules: Advanced Test Manager, Advanced Test Analyst, Advanced Technical Test Analyst
Agile stream modules: Advanced Agile Technical Tester
Specialist stream modules: Acceptance Testing, AI Testing, Mobile Application Testing, Model-Based Tester, Security Tester, Test Automation Engineer
13-What is the ISTQB Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification?
The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification provides a solid grounding in Agile testing principles, practices, and roles. It equips professionals with the skills to effectively test within Agile and traditional teams.
14-How does Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) relate to Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
The Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) is a foundation-level certification, while the Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) is an advanced-level qualification focusing on technical testing skills such as test automation, continuous integration, and service virtualisation.
15-Who should take the Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification?
This course is designed for software testers, test analysts, developers, business analysts, and anyone working in Agile or traditional teams who needs to understand how testing fits into project delivery.
16-What are the entry requirements for Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
Candidates should ideally hold the ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL) certificate. Agile project experience is recommended but not mandatory.
17-What skills will I gain from Agile Tester training?
You will learn to apply Agile and traditional testing methods, work effectively within teams, collaborate with stakeholders, and use risk-based testing and automation to support rapid delivery.
18-How is the Agile Tester exam structured?
Format: Multiple choice questions
Duration: 60 minutes
Passing Score: 65%
Closed book exam
19-Can I progress further after Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
Yes. You can advance to higher-level certifications such as ISTQB Advanced Level Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) or explore other Agile, Core, or Specialist modules.
20-How long is the course?
Virtual and Classroom: 3 days; E-Learning: self-paced.
21-Is practical training included?
Yes. Both Virtual and Classroom courses include scenario-based exercises and workshops to apply Agile testing techniques.
22-Is the exam included in the course fee?
Yes. All delivery options include the ISTQB exam.
23-Do I need prior Agile experience?
Familiarity is helpful but not mandatory. The course covers essential Agile principles and testing practices.
24-What materials are provided?
Manuals, handouts, exercises, eLearning resources, and exam simulators.
25-Will I receive tutor support?
Yes. Tutors provide guidance, answer questions, and support exercises.
26-What is the global recognition of this certification?
It is recognised internationally as a benchmark for software testing skills.
27-What are the benefits of obtaining this certification?
Improved testing competence, career advancement, ability to work effectively in Agile teams, and official ISTQB recognition.
28-Can the exam be taken remotely?
Yes, depending on delivery mode.
29-How does this course support real-world projects?
Scenario-based exercises allow immediate application in workplace Agile or traditional projects.
30-Is this course suitable for non-testers?
Yes. Developers, business analysts, and Agile team members benefit from understanding testing principles.
The BCS Business Analysis Foundation course provides a structured and comprehensive introduction to the principles, practices, and responsibilities of business analysis within modern organisations. It is designed to equip learners with a clear understanding of how business analysis supports organisational change, improves business processes, and ensures that solutions deliver measurable value.
Through this accredited course, learners develop a strong foundation in identifying business needs, analysing requirements, engaging stakeholders, and supporting the delivery of effective business solutions. The course explains the role of the Business Analyst within change initiatives and introduces proven frameworks and techniques used across industries.
Successful completion of this course leads to the BCS Business Analysis Foundation certification, a widely recognised qualification that supports entry into business analysis roles and progression into more advanced business analysis or change management pathways.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS Business Analysis Foundation eLearning
- BCS Business Analysis Foundation exam
- Approximately 18 hours of online study
- 12-month eLearning licence
- Tutor support
- Digital course materials
Delivery Options & Pricing
eLearning – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Self-paced accredited online training with a 12-month licence and approximately 18 hours of study time. The course includes the official BCS Foundation Certificate in Business Analysis exam, digital course materials, and learner support throughout the study period from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £785.00 + VAT
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom environment. The course includes structured tuition, interactive discussions, practical exercises, and exam preparation guidance, with ongoing learner support.
Price: From £945.00 + VAT
Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
In-person accredited classroom training delivered by experienced instructors. The course includes workshops, group discussion, and full exam preparation support, with learner assistance from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: From £1,326.00 + VAT
Learners will understand the definition and scope of business analysis within organisations.
Learners will recognise the role, responsibilities, and competencies of a Business Analyst.
Learners will apply the business analysis service framework to real organisational change.
Learners will document, model, validate, and manage business requirements effectively.
Learners will analyse and manage stakeholders using structured techniques.
Learners will identify opportunities to improve business services and processes.
Learners will understand how to develop and justify a business case.
Learners will support the delivery of requirements and business solutions aligned to organisational goals.
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Duration: Approximately 18 hours (eLearning)
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: eLearning – 12-month licence
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for aspiring Business Analysts, Business Managers, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals involved in business improvement or change initiatives. It is also ideal for individuals seeking to transition into a business analysis role or gain a formal understanding of business analysis best practice.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: Multiple choice
- Question Type: Closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: BCS Business Analysis Foundation
- Delivery Method: Online exam
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No prior business analysis experience is required.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the BCS Business Analysis Foundation course?
It is an accredited foundation-level qualification that introduces the principles, techniques, and responsibilities of business analysis.
Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.
Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Business Analysis Foundation certification.
How difficult is the BCS Business Analysis Foundation exam?
The exam is designed for foundation-level learners and tests understanding of key concepts rather than advanced practical application.
How long does the exam take?
The exam duration is 60 minutes.
What is the pass mark for the exam?
The pass mark is 65%.
Is the exam closed book?
Yes. The exam is closed book.
How is the course delivered?
The course is delivered via self-paced eLearning with a 12-month licence.
How long does the course take to complete?
The course takes approximately 18 hours to complete, depending on prior experience.
Are there any prerequisites?
No. There are no formal prerequisites.
Who should take this course?
Anyone involved in business change, process improvement, requirements gathering, or stakeholder engagement will benefit from this course.
Can this course help me change careers into business analysis?
Yes. It provides a recognised foundation qualification that supports entry into junior and associate business analysis roles.
What salary can a Business Analyst earn in the UK?
In the UK, entry-level Business Analysts typically earn £30,000 to £40,000 per year, while experienced Business Analysts earn £45,000 to £65,000 per year. Senior and lead Business Analysts can earn £70,000 or more, particularly in financial services, technology, and consultancy sectors.
Is this course suitable for project managers?
Yes. Project Managers benefit from understanding requirements management and stakeholder analysis.
Does the course include tutor support?
Yes. Tutor support is included with the eLearning package.
Are there optional extras available?
Optional extras such as Pass Protect and the Business Analysis textbook may be available at checkout.
Will this certification expire?
The BCS Business Analysis Foundation certification does not expire.
What career paths can this course support?
The course supports progression into Business Analyst, Junior Business Analyst, Business Change Analyst, and related roles.
The BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles (CISMP) provides a structured introduction to the concepts, frameworks, and practices required to manage information security effectively within modern organisations. As reliance on digital systems, cloud services, and connected devices continues to grow, information security has become a critical business capability rather than a purely technical concern.
This BCS-accredited course equips learners with a clear understanding of how information security supports organisational objectives, protects information assets, and ensures compliance with legislation and recognised standards. The course combines theory, practical examples, and workshops to develop awareness of risk management, governance, security controls, and incident response across a range of business environments.
Successful completion of the course leads to the BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles, a well-established qualification for professionals seeking a recognised entry point into information security and cyber security management roles.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS CISMP training
- BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles exam
- Instructor-led lectures and practical workshops
- Course materials aligned to the CISMP syllabus
- Optional Pass Protect available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom over four days. The course provides an immersive learning experience, combining structured teaching, practical exercises, and exam preparation. Learners receive full support throughout the course from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £1,150.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £95.83 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will understand core information security management concepts and terminology.
Learners will recognise relevant UK legislation and regulatory requirements related to information security.
Learners will understand key standards, frameworks, and organisations supporting information security management.
Learners will identify the environments in which information security management operates.
Learners will understand different types of security controls and how their effectiveness is measured.
Learners will gain awareness of information security governance and risk management.
Learners will understand secure software lifecycle principles.
Learners will develop foundational knowledge of security operations and incident
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Duration: 4 days
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: None (IT and security awareness recommended)
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 4 days
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Security Consultants, Cyber Security Managers, Security Engineers, Project Managers, Security Technicians, Software Testers, Business Analysts, Software Developers, Business Continuity Practitioners, and professionals who require a structured overview of information security management principles.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 120 minutes
- Number of Questions: Multiple choice
- Question Type: Closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles (CISMP)
- Delivery Method: Online exam
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. However, a working knowledge of IT systems, basic security principles, and awareness of security controls is recommended.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the CISMP qualification?
CISMP is a foundation-level BCS qualification that introduces the principles and practices of information security management.
Is the CISMP course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.
Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles.
How long does the CISMP course take?
The course is delivered over four days in a live virtual classroom.
Is there an exam included?
Yes. The CISMP exam is included with the course.
What is the format of the CISMP exam?
The exam is multiple choice, closed book, and lasts 120 minutes.
What is the pass mark for the CISMP exam?
The pass mark is 65%.
Are there any prerequisites for this course?
There are no formal prerequisites, but basic IT and security knowledge is recommended.
Who should take the CISMP course?
Anyone responsible for managing, supporting, or understanding information security within an organisation will benefit.
Is CISMP suitable for non-technical professionals?
Yes. The course is designed to be accessible to both technical and non-technical roles.
How does CISMP help with career progression?
CISMP provides a recognised foundation qualification that supports progression into security management, governance, and compliance roles.
What salary can information security professionals earn in the UK?
In the UK, entry-level information security roles typically earn £30,000 to £40,000 per year, while experienced security professionals earn £45,000 to £65,000 per year. Senior information security managers and specialists can earn £70,000 to £90,000 or more, depending on sector and responsibility.
Does this course focus on cyber security or management?
The course focuses on information security management principles rather than hands-on technical cyber security skills.
Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra at checkout.
Does the CISMP certification expire?
The CISMP certification does not expire.
Can CISMP lead to more advanced security certifications?
Yes. CISMP is commonly used as a foundation before progressing to more advanced information security or cyber security qualifications.
The BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering course equips professionals with the advanced knowledge and practical skills required to identify, analyse, document, validate, and manage business and system requirements effectively. This accredited qualification focuses on ensuring that requirements are clearly aligned with business objectives and stakeholder expectations, reducing project risk and improving delivery outcomes.
The course explores structured requirements engineering frameworks, stakeholder engagement techniques, modelling approaches, and validation methods. It enables learners to take a disciplined and rigorous approach to requirements definition, supporting successful change initiatives and complex project environments.
Successful completion awards the BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering certification, a respected qualification within the business analysis and project delivery professions.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering training
- BCS Requirements Engineering exam
- Official Business Analysis handbook
- Instructor-led virtual classroom delivery
- Optional Pass Protect available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
This instructor-led course is delivered virtually and focuses on advanced requirements engineering concepts, practical application, and examination preparation. Learners benefit from expert instruction, interactive discussion, and ongoing support from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £1,195.00 + VAT
Learners will understand the requirements engineering framework and its application in change initiatives.
Learners will identify the hierarchy of requirements and how different requirement levels interact.
Learners will understand the roles and responsibilities of stakeholders within requirements engineering.
Learners will apply structured requirements elicitation techniques.
Learners will use modelling techniques to analyse and communicate requirements.
Learners will document requirements clearly and consistently.
Learners will analyse requirements for completeness, consistency, and feasibility.
Learners will validate requirements against business objectives and stakeholder needs.
Learners will manage requirements throughout the project lifecycle.
Facts
- Course Level: Advanced
- Duration: Live Virtual Classroom
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: No formal prerequisites, practical business analysis experience recommended
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Business Analysts, Business Managers and their teams, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals involved in defining, managing, or validating requirements within projects or transformation programmes.
Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Exam Format: Closed book
- Delivery: Online exam via remote proctor
- Certification Awarded: BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering
Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required. While there are no formal prerequisites, some practical experience in business analysis or project environments is recommended.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering course?
It is an accredited qualification that develops advanced skills in capturing, analysing, validating, and managing requirements.
Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.
Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes. The exam is included in the course fee.
How long does the course take to complete?
The course is delivered as an instructor-led live virtual classroom programme.
Do I need prior business analysis experience?
Formal prerequisites are not required, but practical experience is recommended.
What type of exam is included?
The exam is multiple choice and closed book.
What is the pass mark for the exam?
The pass mark is 65%.
Can I take the exam online?
Yes. The exam is delivered online using remote proctoring.
How does this course differ from Business Analysis Practice?
Requirements Engineering focuses specifically on requirements lifecycle activities, while Business Analysis Practice covers broader strategic and organisational analysis techniques.
Who should take this qualification?
Professionals responsible for defining or managing requirements within projects or change initiatives.
How will this certification benefit my career?
It demonstrates advanced capability in requirements engineering and supports progression into senior business analysis and project roles.
What salary can professionals with requirements engineering skills expect?
In the UK, experienced Business Analysts and Requirements Engineers typically earn between £50,000 and £75,000 per year, with senior or specialist roles exceeding £80,000, depending on experience and sector.
Does the certification expire?
No. The BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering certification does not expire.
Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.
Is this course suitable for project managers?
Yes. Project managers benefit from improved requirements control and stakeholder alignment.
Will this course help reduce project risk?
Yes. Effective requirements engineering significantly reduces scope creep, rework, and delivery risk.
The BCS Business Analysis Practice course is a recognised professional qualification designed to develop the practical skills required to deliver effective business change. It builds on foundational business analysis knowledge and focuses on applying structured techniques to identify business problems, evaluate improvement opportunities, and recommend solutions aligned with organisational objectives.
This course develops a deeper understanding of business dynamics, stakeholder perspectives, and strategic analysis. Learners gain the ability to investigate business systems, model business activities, and contribute meaningfully to change initiatives. The qualification strengthens professional credibility and is widely recognised across industries where structured business analysis plays a key role in driving performance improvement and successful transformation.
Successful completion of this course leads to the BCS Business Analysis Practice certification.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS Business Analysis Practice training
- BCS Business Analysis Practice exam
- Official BCS Business Analysis manual
- Instructor-led training with practical exercises
- Optional Pass Protect available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom environment. The course combines structured teaching, group discussion, and practical activities to develop real-world business analysis capability. Full learner support is provided throughout by ILX and DrTutor.
Price: From £1,195.00 + VAT.
Learners will understand the role and responsibilities of a Business Analyst within change initiatives.
Learners will apply skills required to support and deliver business change.
Learners will use strategic analysis processes and techniques to assess organisational context.
Learners will investigate business systems to identify problems and improvement opportunities.
Learners will apply stakeholder analysis and management techniques effectively.
Learners will develop conceptual models using business activity modelling.
Learners will identify and recommend viable business improvements.
Learners will understand the role of the business case within the change lifecycle.
Facts
- Course Level: Practitioner / Intermediate
- Duration: Typically delivered over several days (live virtual classroom)
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: Practical business analysis experience recommended
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Business Analysts, Business Managers, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals involved in analysing business problems, defining requirements, or supporting organisational change initiatives.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Number of Questions: Multiple choice
- Question Type: Closed book
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: BCS Business Analysis Practice
- Delivery Method: Online exam via remote proctor
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course or the exam. However, some practical experience in business analysis or change-related work is strongly recommended.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the BCS Business Analysis Practice qualification?
It is a practitioner-level BCS qualification focused on applying business analysis techniques to real organisational challenges.
Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.
Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Business Analysis Practice certification.
How is the course delivered?
The course is delivered as instructor-led live virtual classroom training.
Is the exam included?
Yes. The Business Analysis Practice exam is included.
What is the format of the exam?
The exam is multiple choice, closed book, and delivered online via remote proctor.
How long does the exam take?
The exam duration is 60 minutes.
What is the pass mark?
The pass mark is 65%.
Are there any prerequisites?
There are no formal prerequisites, but prior business analysis experience is recommended.
Who should take this course?
Professionals involved in business change, requirements analysis, stakeholder engagement, or solution evaluation will benefit most.
How does this course differ from Business Analysis Foundation?
This course focuses on practical application of techniques rather than introductory concepts.
Does this course help with career progression?
Yes. It supports progression into senior Business Analyst, Lead Analyst, and change-focused roles.
Can this course be taken by project managers?
Yes. Project Managers benefit from the strategic and analytical techniques covered.
What salary can a Business Analyst earn in the UK?
In the UK, Business Analysts typically earn £35,000 to £50,000 per year, while experienced or senior Business Analysts earn £55,000 to £70,000 per year. Lead Business Analysts and specialists in finance or consultancy may earn £75,000 or more.
Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.
Does the certification expire?
The BCS Business Analysis Practice certification does not expire.
Can this qualification lead to further BCS certifications?
Yes. It is commonly followed by advanced BCS business analysis or change management qualifications.
The BCS Modelling Business Processes course provides professionals with the practical skills and knowledge to identify, map, and optimise organisational workflows. The course focuses on structured approaches to analyse business processes, detect inefficiencies, and design improvements that align with strategic objectives.
Participants will explore key principles in process mapping, hierarchical process models, gap analysis, and business process improvement frameworks. Practical exercises and real-world examples ensure that learners can immediately apply their skills to enhance operational efficiency and support organisational change initiatives.
Successful completion awards the BCS Modelling Business Processes certification, a recognised qualification for professionals in business analysis, operations, and project management.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS Modelling Business Processes training
- BCS Modelling Business Processes exam
- Official Business Analysis handbook
- Instructor-led virtual classroom delivery
- Optional Pass Protect available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
This two-day course is delivered virtually, combining interactive theory sessions and practical exercises. Learners benefit from instructor guidance, hands-on workshops, and ongoing support from ILX and DrTutor. Price: £945.00 + VAT
Learners will understand the role and purpose of business process modelling.
Learners will analyse organisational internal processes and workflows.
Learners will explore the hierarchy of process models and techniques to describe them.
Learners will model core business processes at both organisational and process levels.
Learners will document and analyse tasks effectively.
Learners will use gap analysis to identify inefficiencies and opportunities for improvement.
Learners will apply structured approaches to enhance operational efficiency.
Learners will evaluate and implement solutions to optimise business processes.
Facts
- Course Level: Intermediate
- Duration: 2 Days
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: No formal prerequisites; practical business analysis experience recommended
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Business Analysts, Business Managers and their teams, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals responsible for process analysis, improvement, or operational optimisation.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Exam Format: Closed book
- Delivery: Online exam via remote proctor
- Certification Awarded: BCS Modelling Business Processes
Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required. Some practical experience in business analysis or operational management is recommended to maximise learning outcomes.Frequently Asked Questions
What is BCS Modelling Business Processes?
It is an accredited course that teaches how to analyse, model, and optimise business processes using structured techniques and best practices.
Is there an exam included?
Yes. The course includes a 60-minute multiple-choice exam delivered online via remote proctoring.
Are there prerequisites for this course?
No formal prerequisites are required. Practical business analysis experience is recommended.
How long does the course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two full days in a live virtual classroom format.
Who should attend this course?
Professionals responsible for process improvement, workflow analysis, or operational optimisation, including Business Analysts, Project Managers, and Business Change Managers.
How will this certification benefit my career?
It demonstrates professional capability in business process modelling and improvement, supporting career progression in business analysis and operational roles.
What is business process modelling?
It is the structured representation of an organisation’s processes to analyse workflows, identify inefficiencies, and design improvements.
What will I learn in the course?
Participants learn to map processes, document tasks, analyse workflows, and apply gap analysis techniques for optimisation.
Does this course help reduce operational risk?
Yes. Understanding and improving business processes reduces inefficiencies, errors, and process-related risks.
Can project managers benefit from this course?
Yes. Project managers gain skills in mapping and aligning processes to project objectives, improving delivery outcomes.
Is this course suitable for team leads or managers?
Yes. Managers and team leads will gain insight into process efficiency, workflow alignment, and strategic optimisation techniques.
Does the course include hands-on exercises?
Yes. Interactive exercises and case studies are integral to the learning experience.
Can I take the exam online?
Yes. The exam is delivered online using remote proctoring technology.
What salary can I expect after completing this course?
In the UK, professionals with business process modelling skills typically earn between £45,000 and £65,000 per year, with senior roles exceeding £70,000, depending on experience and sector.
Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.
Does the certification expire?
No. The BCS Modelling Business Processes certification does not expire.
The BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence provides a comprehensive introduction to the principles, technologies, and applications that underpin modern artificial intelligence. This accredited qualification is designed for professionals at the early stages of their AI journey who require a structured and practical understanding of how AI systems are developed, deployed, and governed.
The course explores key AI concepts including machine learning, intelligent agents, natural language processing, and robotics, while also addressing the ethical, trustworthy, and sustainable use of AI in organisational and societal contexts. Learners gain insight into how AI is transforming industries, reshaping job roles, and influencing decision-making across both public and private sectors.
Successful completion leads to the BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence, a widely recognised qualification that supports career development and informed participation in AI-enabled initiatives.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence training
- BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence exam
- Instructor-led delivery with interactive discussion
- Course materials aligned to the official BCS syllabus
- Optional Pass Protect available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
This option provides instructor-led accredited training delivered over three days in a live online virtual classroom. Learners benefit from an immersive learning experience covering AI foundations, machine learning concepts, robotics, and ethical considerations, supported throughout by ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £1,555.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £129.58 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will define human intelligence, artificial intelligence, and intelligent agents.
Learners will explain the principles of ethical, trustworthy, and sustainable AI.
Learners will understand AI’s role in Universal Design and the Fourth Industrial Revolution.
Learners will identify machine learning as a core component of AI development.
Learners will summarise different types of AI agents and their functions.
Learners will define intelligent robotics and its relationship with AI systems.
Learners will outline the benefits, risks, and ethical challenges associated with AI adoption.
Learners will understand foundational machine learning concepts and toolsets.
Learners will recognise the collaborative role of humans and AI in the workplace.
Learners will identify key team roles required to manage AI projects effectively.
Facts
- Course Level: Foundation
- Duration: 3 days
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 3 days
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for engineers, scientists, professional research managers, chief technical officers, chief information officers, organisational and business change managers, service architects, programme and planning managers, and professionals who need a structured understanding of AI fundamentals. It is also appropriate for individuals preparing to work with AI-enabled systems or projects across any sector.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 60 minutes
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Exam Format: Closed book
- Certification Awarded: BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No prior AI, programming, or data science knowledge is required.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence?
It is an accredited foundation-level qualification that provides in-depth knowledge of AI principles, technologies, and ethical considerations.
Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.
Do I receive a certificate after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence.
How long does the course take to complete?
The course is delivered over three days in a live virtual classroom.
Is the exam included in the price?
Yes. The exam is included with the course.
What format is the exam?
The exam is multiple choice and closed book.
What is the pass mark for the exam?
The pass mark is 65%.
Do I need prior AI or technical experience?
No. The course is designed for learners with no prior AI background.
How does this differ from the BCS Essentials AI course?
The Foundation course goes deeper into AI concepts, machine learning, robotics, ethics, and organisational impact, while the Essentials course provides a high-level introduction.
Who should take this qualification?
Professionals involved in technology, transformation, data, innovation, or leadership roles who need a solid grounding in AI concepts.
How will this certification help my career?
It demonstrates recognised foundational AI knowledge and supports progression into AI-related, digital transformation, and data-driven roles.
What salary can AI-qualified professionals earn?
In the UK, professionals with AI foundation-level knowledge typically earn between £45,000 and £65,000 per year, while roles with hands-on AI or data responsibilities often exceed £70,000, depending on experience and industry.
Does the course include coding or programming?
No. The course focuses on concepts, governance, and application rather than hands-on coding.
Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.
Does the certification expire?
The BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence does not expire.
The BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence (AI) provides a clear and accessible introduction to artificial intelligence, explaining its origins, key concepts, and growing impact across modern organisations. This accredited course explores how AI technologies such as machine learning, data analytics, and robotics are shaping business operations, decision-making, and innovation across industries.
The course also addresses the ethical, legal, and societal considerations surrounding AI adoption, enabling learners to understand not only how AI works, but how it should be implemented responsibly. Designed for both technical and non-technical audiences, this qualification supports informed engagement with AI initiatives and helps professionals recognise opportunities and risks associated with AI-driven solutions.
Successful completion of the course leads to the BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence, a recognised entry-level qualification for professionals seeking foundational AI knowledge.
What’s Included
- Accredited BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence training
- BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence exam
- Instructor-led teaching with practical discussion
- Course materials aligned to the BCS syllabus
- Optional Pass Protect available at checkout
Delivery Options & Pricing
Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom over one day. The course provides an immersive learning experience covering AI fundamentals, ethics, and real-world business applications, with full learner support from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £555.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £46.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)
Learners will define key artificial intelligence terminology and historical milestones.
Learners will identify different types and applications of AI.
Learners will understand ethical and legal considerations associated with AI use.
Learners will recognise key AI enablers including machine learning and robotics.
Learners will understand the importance of data quality in AI systems.
Learners will identify risks related to AI-generated and managed data.
Learners will explore AI opportunities within business and governance contexts.
Learners will understand project management approaches for AI implementation.
Learners will recognise AI career opportunities and real-world use cases.
Learners will understand AI’s broader societal impact and future development.
Facts
- Course Level: Essentials / Foundation
- Duration: 1 day
- Exam Duration: 30 minutes
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Prerequisites: None
- Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 1 day
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for individuals seeking an introduction to artificial intelligence, business professionals, managers, IT staff, and anyone who wants to understand how AI is used within modern organisations and its implications for business, governance, and society.Exam Information
- Exam Duration: 30 minutes
- Number of Questions: 20
- Question Type: Multiple choice
- Pass Mark: 65%
- Certification: BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence
- Delivery Method: Online exam
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No prior AI or technical knowledge is required.Frequently Asked Questions
What is the BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence?
It is an accredited entry-level qualification that introduces key AI concepts, applications, and ethical considerations.
Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.
Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence.
Do I need prior knowledge of AI?
No. The course is designed for beginners with no prior AI experience.
How long does the course take?
The course is delivered over one day in a live virtual classroom.
Is the exam included?
Yes. The AI Essentials exam is included with the course.
What is the exam format?
The exam consists of 20 multiple-choice questions.
How long is the exam?
The exam duration is 30 minutes.
What is the pass mark?
The pass mark is 65%.
Is the exam closed book?
Yes. The exam is closed book.
Who should take this course?
Anyone seeking a foundational understanding of AI for business or professional development will benefit.
How will this course help my career?
It provides recognised foundational AI knowledge, supporting roles that interact with data, technology, and digital transformation initiatives.
What salary impact can AI knowledge have?
In the UK, professionals with AI-related knowledge typically earn £40,000 to £60,000 per year, while roles directly involving AI or data analysis may exceed £70,000, depending on experience and sector.
Does this course focus on technical coding?
No. The course focuses on concepts, applications, and governance rather than programming.
Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.
Does the certification expire?
The BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence does not expire.
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على المخاطر الأمنية لإنترنت الأشياء.
مقدمة
أمان الإنترنت هو مصطلح يصف أمان المعاملات وجميع الأنشطة التي تقوم بها عبر الإنترنت. إنه العامل الفعلي لأمن الكمبيوتر والأمن السيبراني، بما في ذلك أمان المتصفح والأمن عبر الإنترنت وأمن الشبكات.
سوف تساعد التعريفات التالية خلال هذه الدورة:· القرصنة – الوصول غير المصرح به إلى البيانات الموجودة في نظام الكمبيوتر
· التصيد الاحتيالي – أحد أشكال هجمات الهندسة الاجتماعية المستخدمة لسرقة البيانات الشخصية من قبل مهاجم متنكر في هيئة منظمة موثوقة
· التكنولوجيا القديمة – تكنولوجيا قديمة لم تعد مدعومة بالتنمية
· DDoS – رفض الخدمة الموزعة
· نقطة النهاية – جهاز بعيد يتصل بالشبكة التي يتصل بها (مثل سطح المكتب أو الكمبيوتر المحمول)
· Honeypot – نظام يهدف إلى محاكاة الأهداف المحتملة للهجمات الإلكترونية
سوف تتعلم
- مناقشة المخاطر الأمنية لإنترنت الأشياء
- التحقيق في طرق تأمين إنترنت الأشياء
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على إنترنت الأشياء والغرض منها.
مقدمة
ستساعدك هذه التعريفات خلال هذه الدورة :· RFID – تحديد الترددات الراديوية
· IP – بروتوكول الإنترنت، مجموعة من القواعد التي تحدد تنسيق البيانات المنقولة عبر الإنترنت أو الشبكة
· الإنترنت واسع النطاق – اتصال بالإنترنت بمعدل نقل بيانات مرتفع
· الشبكة الخلوية – شبكة راديو موزعة على الخلايا التي تخدم كل منها محطة أساسية
· الشبكة اللاسلكية – شبكة تستخدم اتصالات البيانات اللاسلكية بين العقد
إنترنت الأشياء (IoT) هو المصطلح المطبق على كل شيء متصل بالإنترنت. يتم استخدامه بشكل متزايد لتحديد الكائنات التي تتحدث مع بعضها البعض. تتراوح هذه الأجهزة من أجهزة الاستشعار إلى الهواتف الذكية والتكنولوجيا القابلة للارتداء (مثل FitBit أو Apple Watch).
يتيح إنترنت الأشياء للأجهزة الموجودة على الشبكات الخاصة التواصل مع الآخرين. وهذا بدوره يخلق عالمًا أكثر اتصالاً عبر أنواع شبكات مختلفة متعددة.
التحقيق في كيفية تمكين إنترنت الأشياء لجميع المستخدمين
في هذه الدورة مقدمة لتقنيات 5G.
مقدمة
5G هو الجيل الخامس من شبكات الهاتف المحمول/الخلوي. إنه معيار لاسلكي عالمي جديد بعد شبكات 1G و2G و3G و4G، وهو أسرع بما يصل إلى 100 مرة من 4G. تعمل تقنية 5G على خلق فرص لم يسبق لها مثيل للأفراد والشركات. توفر تقنية 5G اللاسلكية سرعات أعلى للبيانات متعددة جيجابت في الثانية، وزمن وصول منخفض للغاية، وموثوقية أكبر، وقدرة شبكة هائلة، وزيادة التوفر، وتجربة مستخدم أكثر اتساقًا لعدد أكبر من المستخدمين.
سنتناول في هذه الدورة أولاً بعض التعريفات المرتبطة بشبكات الراديو:· المجال الكهرومغناطيسي
· محطات القاعدة
· الخلايا
الطيف الكهرومغناطيسييغطي الإشعاع الكهرومغناطيسي مجموعة من الترددات (الطيف) والأطوال الموجية المرتبطة بها، والتي يشار إليها عادةً باسم الطيف الكهرومغناطيسي. تتميز موجات الراديو بترددات أقل وأطوال موجية أطول من الضوء المرئي.
سوف تتعلم
- إدخال تقنيات 5G
- استكشف حالات استخدام 5G وفوائدها
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على أساسيات الاتصال الإلكتروني.
مقدمة
تستخدم الموجات الجيبية في الرياضيات والفيزياء لتمثيل الموجات. انظر أدناه للحصول على بعض التعريفات الأساسية التي سيتم استخدامها طوال الجلسة:التردد (و)
· هذا هو عدد الدورات في الثانية المقاسة بالهرتز (هرتز)
· 1 هرتز = دورة واحدة في الثانية
السعة (أ)
· ارتفاع الدورة
المرحلة (Φ)
· القيمة النسبية للمتغير عند نقطة ما في الدورة
الطول الموجي (π)
· المسافة الفيزيائية التي تتكرر خلالها الدورة
العلاقات
سرعة الموجة (c) للإشعاع الكهرومغناطيسي (EM) هي 300000 كم/ثانية ("سرعة الضوء").وبما أن سرعة الموجة (ج) ثابتة:
· الترددات المنخفضة دائمًا لها أطوال موجية أطول
· الترددات الأعلى لها دائمًا أطوال موجية أقصر
ترتبط سرعة الموجة (ج) والتردد (و) والطول الموجي (ل) ويمكن تمثيلها بمثلث الصيغة.
\( f= \frac{c}{ \lambda } \)
حيث: c = سرعة الموجة، f = التردد، lect = الطول الموجي
\( c \equiv f \times \lambda \)
حيث: c = سرعة الموجة، f = التردد، lect = الطول الموجي
\( \lambda \equiv \frac{c}{f} \)
حيث: c = سرعة الموجة، f = التردد، lect = الطول الموجي
تقديم المفهوم الأساسي للنظرية الموجية
استكشاف الطيف الكهرومغناطيسي
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة على الصناعة 4.0 والتحول الرقمي.
التعريف
لقد أصبح التحول الرقمي مهمًا جدًا، فهو الآن مسؤول عن تغيير الصناعة وتكييفها مع الصناعة المتصلة.
سوف تساعد التعريفات التالية خلال هذه الجلسة:· وحدات التحكم المنطقية القابلة للبرمجة (PLC) – جهاز كمبيوتر صناعي ذو حالة صلبة يتخذ قرارات قائمة على المنطق للعمليات الآلية بناءً على المدخلات والمخرجات المراقبة
· الحوسبة السحابية – تقديم خدمات الحوسبة عبر الإنترنت
· الذكاء الاصطناعي – قدرة الآلات أو أنظمة الكمبيوتر على التعلم والتكيف بشكل مماثل للبشر
- RDA -
- تحديد الترددات الراديوية لقاعدة البيانات عن بعد
اكتشف الصناعة 4.0
ناقش كيف تعمل إنترنت الأشياء (IoT) و5G على تمكين الصناعة 4.0
اكتشف 5G
تعرف على الأنواع المختلفة لوسائل التواصل الاجتماعي، مثل تويتر وفيسبوك وتيك توك. افهم إيجابيات وسلبيات استخدام هذه الأشياء بالإضافة إلى المخاطر التي قد تواجهها
- التعرف على الأنواع المختلفة لوسائل التواصل الاجتماعي
- شرح مجموعة متنوعة من الطرق التي يتم بها استخدام وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي
- اشرح الجوانب الجيدة والسيئة لوسائل التواصل الاجتماعي
- فهم كيفية استخدام شركات الإعلام لبياناتك
- تعرف على كيفية الإبلاغ عن المحتوى عبر الإنترنت
تعرف على سبب استخدام المتطرفين للإنترنت، والمكان الذي قد تواجه فيه التطرف عبر الإنترنت، وكيفية اكتشاف علامات الأيديولوجية المتطرفة عبر الإنترنت، وماذا تفعل إذا واجهت محتوى متطرفًا عبر الإنترنت
مهارات
- افهم لماذا يستخدم المتطرفون عبر الإنترنت الإنترنت
- تعرف على الأماكن التي قد تواجه فيها التطرف عبر الإنترنت
- تعرف على كيفية اكتشاف علامات الأيديولوجية المتطرفة عبر الإنترنت
- تعرف على ما يجب عليك فعله إذا واجهت محتوى متطرفًا عبر الإنترنت
تعرف على المخاطر عند استخدام هاتفك المحمول مثل عمليات الاحتيال والاحتيال وكيفية حماية نفسك منها
- التعرف على المخاطر التي تظهر أثناء استخدام هاتفك المحمول
- فهم كيفية حماية نفسك من هذه المخاطر
In this courses you will learn about the physical and mental effects that technology can have on your health. As well as this you will look into ways to help maintain your physical and mental health while using this technology
Skills
- Understand the physical effects technology can have on our health
- Understand the mental effects technology can have on our health
- Explain how different technologies affect us
- Understand some ways to help maintain your physical and mental health while using technology
تعرف على ماهية الاستمالة عبر الإنترنت (يبني علاقة) وكيف يستخدم المحتالون الإنترنت لاستهداف الأشخاص للقيام بشيء لا يريدون القيام به. تبحث هذه الجلسة في كيفية التعرف على المحتالين المحتملين وأفضل الطرق لحماية نفسك عبر الإنترنت
مهارات
- فهم ما هو الاستمالة
- تعرف على كيفية التعرف على الحيوانات المفترسة المحتملة
- تعرف على كيفية حماية نفسك من المحتالين عبر الإنترنت
- تعرف على العلامات التي تدل على تعرض شخص ما للاستمالة
مقدمة
تشير المواطنة الرقمية إلى الاستخدام المسؤول للتكنولوجيا والإنترنت للتفاعل مع الآخرين عبر الإنترنت. المواطن الرقمي هو الشخص الذي يستخدم تكنولوجيا المعلومات على نطاق واسع، وتتراوح أعمار المواطنين من الأطفال الصغار إلى كبار السن.
إن كونك مواطنًا رقميًا يعني فهم الثقافة الرقمية، وآداب السلوك عبر الإنترنت، والسلامة عبر الإنترنت، وفهم الفرق بين المعلومات الخاصة والعامة. فهو يتطلب أن يكون مستخدمو التكنولوجيا مسؤولين عن الطريقة التي يقدمون بها أنفسهم ويتفاعلون مع الآخرين عبر الإنترنت، ويشجع مشاركة جميع مستخدمي الإنترنت في محاولة لتعزيز تكافؤ الفرص وجعل الفضاء عبر الإنترنت مكانًا لطيفًا وسهل الوصول إليه.
يعرف المواطن الرقمي الجيد كيفية التواصل مع الآخرين عبر الإنترنت، وكيفية التعاطف مع الأشخاص الذين لديهم خلفيات مختلفة عن خلفياتهم، وتكوين صداقات عبر الإنترنت على أساس الاحترام المتبادل.
المواطن الرقمي السيئ هو الشخص الذي يفتقر إلى المعرفة حول كيفية استخدام الإنترنت بأمان، ولا يفهم التأثير الذي يمكن أن تحدثه وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي على نفسه وعلى الآخرين، أو قد يستخدم إخفاء هويته على الإنترنت للتنمر عبر الإنترنت أو مضايقة شخص ما، أو حتى ارتكاب الجرائمسوف تتعلم:
- فهم المقصود بمصطلح المواطنة الرقمية
- فهم الجوانب المهمة لكونك مواطنًا رقميًا
- فهم ما هي الفجوة الرقمية وسبب أهميتها
- افهم كيفية الحفاظ على سلامتك وصحتك عبر الإنترنت
في هذه الدورة :
سوف تكتشف المقصود بمصطلح التنمر عبر الإنترنت والأنواع المختلفة من التنمر عبر الإنترنت التي يمكن أن تحدث. بالإضافة إلى ذلك، ستكون قادرًا على شرح سبب قيام الأشخاص بالتنمر عبر الإنترنت وماذا تفعل إذا أصبحت أنت أو أي شخص تعرفه هدفًا للتنمر عبر الإنترنت.
اشرح ما هو التنمر الإلكتروني.
وصف بعض الأنواع المختلفة من التنمر الإلكتروني
اشرح لماذا يتنمر الناس عبر الإنترنت
شرح بعض العواقب التي تنتج عن التنمر الإلكتروني
افهم ما يجب فعله إذا أصبحت أنت أو أي شخص تعرفه هدفًا للتنمر عبر الإنترنت
ستتعرف في هذه الدورة التدريبية على العالم المثير للعملات المشفرة والرموز غير القابلة للاستبدال (NFTs)، وستتعمق في تقنية blockchain التي تعتمد عليها معظم العملات المشفرة وتنظر إلى المخاوف التي تحيط بهذه التكنولوجيا المتطورة.
مقدمة
تشير العملة الرقمية، أو النقود الرقمية ، إلى طريقة دفع موجودة فقط في شكل رقمي وليس لها نظير مادي. العملة المشفرة هي شكل من أشكال الأموال الافتراضية التي يتم تأمينها باستخدام تقنية تسمى التشفير.
التشفير هو إنشاء رموز التشفير للسماح بالتشفير الآمن بين الأفراد، مما يعني أن البيانات المرسلة بينك وبين فرد آخر تعتبر خاصة. لذلك، إذا كنت ستجري عملية شراء باستخدام أحد أشكال العملات المشفرة، فسيتم التحقق من صحة العملة التي ترسلها للتأكد من صحتها، ثم يتم إرسال تلك العملة إلى البائع الذي يعلم أيضًا أن الدفع مشروع. دون الحاجة إلى الاستعانة بطرف ثالث، مثل البنك أو PayPal.
العملة المشفرة هي أصل رقمي حصري يمكن استخدامه لدفع ثمن الأشياء، ومع ذلك فهي لا تعتمد على أي أصل فعلي، أو مدعومة باللوائح الحكومية. هذا يعني أن العملة المشفرة لا تستحق سوى ما سيدفعه المشتري مقابلها. يؤدي هذا إلى عدم القدرة على التنبؤ بالعملات المشفرة لأن قيمتها يمكن أن تتغير بشكل كبير خلال فترة زمنية قصيرة.
فهم ما هي العملة المشفرة.
افهم ما هي تقنية blockchain.
فهم ما هي NFT.
افهم المخاوف المحيطة بالعملات المشفرة والرموز غير القابلة للاستبدال (NFTs).
تكتشف في هذه الدورة ما هو المقصود بمصطلح البصمة الرقمية وكيف يمكن أن تضيف أنشطتك عبر الإنترنت إليه. تعرف أيضًا على كيفية ضمان خصوصيتك عبر الإنترنت وكيفية بناء بصمة رقمية إيجابية.
مقدمة
البصمة الرقمية هي الاسم الذي يطلق على مسار البيانات والمعلومات التي تتركها أثناء استخدام الإنترنت. هذه المعلومات خاصة بك، وكل من يستخدم الإنترنت يترك بصمة رقمية من نوع ما.
هناك نوعان من البصمة الرقمية:
سلبي: يتم إنشاء هذا النوع من البصمة من خلال تصفح الإنترنت، وغالبًا ما لا يدرك المستخدمون أنه يتم حفظ البيانات الموجودة عليهم. تقوم مواقع الويب بحفظ المعلومات الخاصة بك كملفات تعريف الارتباط عند زيارتك لها؛ تقوم محركات البحث بتخزين سجل البحث الخاص بك، وتقوم معظم مواقع الويب بتسجيل عنوان IP الخاص بك عند زيارة موقع ويب.
نشط: يتم إنشاء هذا النوع من البصمة عند مشاركة المعلومات عبر الإنترنت. على سبيل المثال، إذا قمت بإرسال بريد إلكتروني، أو قمت بالتسجيل في خدمة عبر الإنترنت، أو قمت بنشر شيء ما على وسائل التواصل الاجتماعي، فيمكن ربط هذه المعلومات بك مرة أخرى.
فهم المقصود بمصطلح البصمة الرقمية
حدد بعض الأنشطة التي تضيف إلى بصمتك
افهم مشكلات الخصوصية المتعلقة ببصمتك الرقمية
شرح كيفية بناء بصمة رقمية إيجابية
A scam can appear in many different forms, but they are all ultimately designed to part you from your money. You may get a message via email, text or any social media messaging service, all with the intention of tricking you into giving over your details or giving the scammers money.
Almost half of all victims of these scams are those aged 18 to 34, so it is important to remember to stay vigilant.
تعرف على ما هي عملية الاحتيال
فهم الأنواع المختلفة لعمليات الاحتيال عبر الإنترنت
افهم بالتفصيل ماهية التصيد الاحتيالي وأنواع الاحتيال الأخرى
حدد الطرق التي يحاول المحتالون من خلالها الاحتيال عليك
فهم كيفية حماية نفسك من المحتالين
تحسين محركات البحث - نظرة عامة مختصرة
يوفر هذا النشاط التعليمي نظرة عامة على تحسين محركات البحث أو SEO.
SEO - تحسين الموقع
يشرح هذا النشاط التعليمي كيف يمكن لبنية الموقع وتنظيمه أن يكون لهما تأثير إيجابي على التحسين وزيادة عدد الزيارات إلى موقع الويب الخاص بك.
SEO - تنظيم الموقع وهيكله
في هذا النشاط، سنشرح آليات بنية الموقع والدور الذي تلعبه في تحسين محركات البحث.
تحسين محركات البحث: التحليلات
في هذا النشاط، ستستكشف ماهية تحليلات الويب وكيفية استخدامها لتحسين الموقع.
SEO - الترويج لموقع الويب الخاص بك
يشرح هذا الكائن التعليمي طرقًا جديدة ومجانية وتقليدية لتسويق موقع الويب الخاص بك.
تعلم تحسين محركات البحث
تعرف على بنية الموقع وجذب الزيارات إلى موقع الويب الخاص بك.
تعلم آليات محرك البحث الخاص ببنية الموقع.
تعلم تحليلات الويب وكيفية استخدامها لتحسين الموقع.
تعلم الطرق التقليدية لتسويق موقع الويب الخاص بك.
جدار الحماية هو جهاز أمان للشبكة يحمي طبقة التطبيق من محاولات الاحتيال أو سرقة البيانات؛ منع النشاط المشبوه. من خلال فحص كل طلب ويب للبرمجة النصية عبر المواقع، وحقن SQL، تضمن هذه الطبقة الواقية بقاء بياناتك آمنة، وجدار الحماية هو في الأساس الحاجز الذي يقع بين الشبكة الداخلية الخاصة والإنترنت العام.
جدار الحماية: فحص الحزم الحالة. في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستقوم بفحص جدار حماية فحص الحزم الذي يتتبع طلبات خدمة الإنترنت المشروعة، والمعروف أيضًا باسم تصفية الحزم الديناميكية.
جدران الحماية: مرشحات الحزمة. في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستقوم بإنشاء مرشح حزم.
جدار الحماية: خوادم البوابة. في هذا الكائن المتحرك، يفحص المتعلمون كيفية عمل خادم البوابة.
جدار الحماية: ترجمة عنوان الشبكة/ترجمة عنوان المنفذ. في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستختبر كيفية عمل ترجمة عنوان الشبكة.
جدران الحماية: العلاقات بين محيطات جدار الحماية. في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستختبر كيفية قيام جدران الحماية بحظر الفيروسات من خلال مناقشة الشبكات الموثوقة وشبه الموثوقة وغير الموثوقة.
جدار الحماية: فحص الحزم الحالة
جدران الحماية: العلاقات بين محيطات جدار الحماية.
جدران الحماية: مرشحات الحزمة.
جدار الحماية: خوادم البوابة.
جدار الحماية: ترجمة عنوان الشبكة/ترجمة عنوان المنفذ
الوعي بالبرمجة النصية عبر المواقع: في هذه الدورة التعليمية، ستستكشف ماهية هجوم رفض الخدمة وتتعلم كيف يمكن لمتسلل واحد تدمير نظام بأكمله ، وستستكشف موضوع البرمجة النصية عبر المواقع (أو XSS)
تعد هجمات البرمجة النصية عبر المواقع (XSS) نوعًا من الحقن، حيث يتم حقن البرامج النصية الضارة في مواقع الويب الموثوقة. تحدث هجمات XSS عندما يستخدم المهاجم تطبيق ويب لإرسال تعليمات برمجية ضارة.
يستخدم المهاجم XSS لإرسال برنامج نصي ضار إلى العملاء غير الحذرين. سيقوم متصفح المستخدم النهائي بتنفيذ البرنامج النصي، ويمكن للبرنامج النصي الضار الوصول إلى أي ملفات تعريف ارتباط أو الرموز المميزة للجلسة أو غيرها من المعلومات الحساسة التي يحتفظ بها المتصفح ويستخدمها مع هذا الموقع.
افهم ما هي البرمجة النصية عبر المواقع XSS
تعلم واستكشف ماهية هجوم رفض الخدمة
فهم استراتيجيات الهاكر
البرامج الضارة هي مصطلح يشير إلى أي نوع من البرامج الضارة المصممة لإتلاف أو إتلاف أو استغلال أي جهاز أو خدمة أو شبكة قابلة للبرمجة. عادةً ما يستخدمه مجرمو الإنترنت لاستخراج البيانات التي يمكنهم السيطرة عليها من الضحايا لتحقيق مكاسب مالية. يمكن أن تتراوح هذه البيانات من البيانات المالية إلى سجلات الرعاية الصحية إلى رسائل البريد الإلكتروني وكلمات المرور الشخصية، وأصبحت احتمالات نوع المعلومات التي يمكن اختراقها لا حصر لها.
في هذه الدورة التعليمية، ستستكشف ما هي البرامج الضارة، وما هي الأنواع المختلفة من البرامج الضارة، وكيف يمكنك حماية جهاز الكمبيوتر الخاص بك من هذه التهديدات.
تعلم واستكشف ما هي البرامج الضارة.
تعرف على كيفية حماية جهاز الكمبيوتر الخاص بك من البرامج الضارة.
فهم الأنواع المختلفة من البرامج الضارة.
التشفير بالمفتاح العام، أو التشفير غير المتماثل، هو مجال أنظمة التشفير التي تستخدم أزواجًا من المفاتيح المرتبطة. يتكون كل زوج من المفاتيح من مفتاح عام ومفتاح خاص مطابق. يتم إنشاء أزواج المفاتيح باستخدام خوارزميات التشفير بناءً على مشاكل رياضية تسمى الوظائف ذات الاتجاه الواحد.
التشفير هو عملية ترجمة بيانات النص العادي (نص عادي) إلى شيء يبدو عشوائيًا ولا معنى له (نص مشفر). فك التشفير هو عملية تحويل النص المشفر مرة أخرى إلى نص عادي. لتشفير أكثر من كمية صغيرة من البيانات، يتم استخدام التشفير المتماثل
ستستكشف في هذه الدورة التعليمية تشفير المفتاح العام وتختتم باختبار قصير.
تعلم واستكشف تشفير المفتاح العام
فهم التشفير وفك التشفير
اكتشف تشفير المفاتيح العامة والخاصة
الشبكات الافتراضية الخاصة (VPN): ستستكشف في هذا النشاط التعليمي كيفية استخدام VPN لإنشاء اتصال آمن بين شبكتين.
إعداد الشبكة الافتراضية الخاصة (VPN): سوف يفهم المتعلم كيفية إعداد الشبكة الافتراضية الخاصة (VPN) باستخدام شبكة الكمبيوتر المنزلية.
تعلم وفهم ما هي الشبكة الافتراضية الخاصة (VPN)
تعرف على كيفية إنشاء اتصال آمن
تعرف على كيفية إعداد الشبكة الافتراضية الخاصة (VPN)
تحديد الهوية والمصادقة مقابل الترخيص
تحديد الهوية هو إجراء تحديد مستخدم معين، غالبًا من خلال اسم المستخدم. المصادقة هي إثبات هوية هذا المستخدم، والتي تتم إدارتها عادةً عن طريق إدخال كلمة مرور.
المصادقة والترخيص هما عمليتان حيويتان لأمن المعلومات تديران الاستخدام لحماية الأنظمة والمعلومات. ومع ذلك، غالبًا ما يتم استخدام المصادقة والترخيص بالتبادل، فهي عمليات منفصلة تستخدم لحماية المؤسسة من الهجمات السيبرانية. المصادقة هي عملية التحقق من هوية المستخدم، في حين أن التفويض هو عملية التحقق من ما يمكنه الوصول إليه.تعلم ما هو تحديد الهوية.
تعرف على ما هي المصادقة.
تعرف على ما هو التفويض.
تعرف على العمليات المستخدمة لحماية المؤسسة من الهجمات الإلكترونية.
Social engineering is a term that encompasses a wide range of malicious activity, most common attack types that social engineers use to target victims, phishing, pretexting, baiting, quid pro quo, and tailgating.
In this learning course, you’ll identify information hackers use to gain access to a company, explain different types of social engineering attacks, and recognize different solutions to avoid these attacks.
Learn and identify information hackers use to gain access to your company.
Learn different types of social engineering attacks.
Learn different solutions to avoid social engineering attacks.
DDoS - هجمات رفض الخدمة الموزعة: اكتشف ماهية هجمات DDoS والأساليب المستخدمة لتنفيذها وكيفية منعها.
هجمات رجل في الوسط باستخدام تسمم ARP: في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستتعرف على هجمات رجل في الوسط وتناقش كيفية تأثيرها على أمان الشبكة.
DDoS - هجمات الخدمة
الهجمات مع التسمم ARP
الأساليب المستخدمة لتنفيذ الهجمات ومنعها
حالات المنفذ: في هذا النشاط التعليمي، ستتعرف على حالات منفذ TCP وUDP وكيفية تصرفها أثناء التفاعل.
فحص المنافذ: ستستكشف في هذا النشاط التعليمي كيفية استخدام المتسللين لفحص المنافذ بشكل شائع للتسلل إلى الشبكة وكيف يمكن لمحترفي أمن تكنولوجيا المعلومات اكتشافه.
فحص المنافذ - بروتوكولات الشبكة العامة: ستستكشف في هذا النشاط التعليمي ثلاثة بروتوكولات شبكة شائعة تستخدمها أجهزة الكمبيوتر للتواصل في الشبكة.
حالات منفذ TCP وUDP
مسح المنفذ
بروتوكولات الشبكة المشتركة
ستتعلم في هذه الدورة كيفية التعرف على رموز الخطر وعلامات التحذير الموجودة في مكان العمل، بالإضافة إلى فهم ما هو اختبار PAT.
مقدمة
سواء كنت طالبًا أو محترفًا متمرسًا، ومهما كان القطاع الذي تعمل فيه أو الوظيفة التي تقوم بها، فإن العمل بأمان هو أهم الاعتبارات لكل مهندس. كثيرًا ما يستخدم عمل المهندس مواد خطرة، أو معدات معقدة، أو يتم في أماكن يحتمل أن تكون خطرة، لذلك من المهم أن يفهم الجميع الطرق التي يمكنهم من خلالها البقاء آمنين هم وكل من حولهم.
يتم اتخاذ احتياطات السلامة بعدة طرق، بدءًا من التشريعات والسياسات والإجراءات وحتى اللافتات ووضع العلامات. سنلقي نظرة في هذه الجلسة على بعض الأشياء الأساسية التي يجب أن تكون على دراية بها لضمان سلامتك وكل من حولك أثناء العمل، بما في ذلك المناولة اليدوية ومتطلبات COSHH ووضع العلامات وعلامات السلامة واختبار PAT.
سوف تتعلم
- تعرف على الأنواع السبعة لرموز الخطر والأنواع الأربعة للعلامات التحذيرية الموجودة في مكان العمل
- فهم أهمية العمل بأمان
- التعرف على الأنواع السبعة لرموز خطر COSHH
- التعرف على الأنواع الأربعة من العلامات التحذيرية الموجودة في مكان العمل
- تعرف على ما هو اختبار الأجهزة المحمولة وما يستلزمه
في هذه الدورة، نلقي نظرة على التشريعات المتعلقة بالسلامة في مكان العمل، وكيفية البقاء آمنًا في العمل، ونتعلم كيفية توثيق الحوادث أو الإصابات في مكان العمل.
سوف تتعرف على التشريعات المتعلقة بالصحة والسلامة في مكان العمل، وما هي معدات الوقاية الشخصية، وماذا تفعل عند وقوع حادث أو واقعة.
مقدمة
سواء كنت طالبًا أو محترفًا متمرسًا، ومهما كان القطاع الذي تعمل فيه أو الوظيفة التي تقوم بها، فإن العمل بأمان هو أهم الاعتبارات لكل مهندس. كثيرًا ما يستخدم عمل المهندس مواد خطرة، أو معدات معقدة، أو يتم في أماكن يحتمل أن تكون خطرة، لذلك من المهم أن يفهم الجميع الطرق التي يمكنهم من خلالها البقاء آمنين هم وكل من حولهم.
يتم اتخاذ احتياطات السلامة بعدة طرق، بدءًا من التشريعات والسياسات والإجراءات، وحتى اللافتات ووضع العلامات. سنلقي نظرة في هذه الجلسة على بعض الأشياء الأساسية التي يجب أن تكون على دراية بها لضمان سلامتك وسلامة كل من حولك أثناء العمل، بما في ذلك فهم وتحديد المخاطر والمخاطر، وكتابة تقييمات المخاطر، ومعدات الوقاية الشخصية، والحوادث والحوادث و إسعافات أولية.
فهم أهمية العمل بأمان.
معرفة كيفية التعرف على الأخطار والمخاطر والرد عليها،
معرفة ما هي الحوادث والأحداث وكيفية التعامل معها
افهم ما هي معدات الوقاية الشخصية وأعطي بعض الأمثلة